Deville (1997) - Automobile CADILLAC - Free user manual and instructions

Product Type	Full-size luxury sedan
Model Year	1997
Engine Type	4.6L V8 (LD8 or L37)
Horsepower	Approximately 275-300 hp
Transmission	4-speed automatic (4T80-E)
Drivetrain	Front-wheel drive
Fuel Type	Regular unleaded gasoline
Fuel Capacity	Approximately 18.5 gallons
Overall Length	Approximately 205.6 inches
Overall Width	Approximately 76.5 inches
Overall Height	Approximately 56.4 inches
Wheelbase	Approximately 113.8 inches
Curb Weight	Approximately 4,000 lbs
Seating Capacity	5-6 passengers
Safety Systems	Dual front air bags, anti-lock brakes
Brakes	Power-assisted disc brakes with ABS
Steering	Power rack-and-pinion
Maintenance	Oil changes every 3,000-5,000 miles; regular fluid checks
Battery	12V, maintenance-free
Spare Tire	Compact spare in cargo area
Fuel Economy (EPA)	Approximately 16 city / 24 highway mpg
Recommended Oil	5W-30 or 10W-30 (check manual)
Climate Control	Automatic dual-zone climate control

Frequently Asked Questions - Deville (1997) CADILLAC

How do I adjust the driver's seat?

The driver's seat can be adjusted manually using levers on the front of the seat. Pull the lever to slide the seat forward or backward, and use the knob to adjust the seatback angle. For power seats, use the switches on the side of the seat.

How do I properly use the safety belts?

Wear the lap portion low on your hips, not across your abdomen. The shoulder belt should cross your chest and shoulder. Always buckle up, and ensure the belt is not twisted. For height adjustment, use the shoulder belt height adjuster on the door pillar.

What should I do if the air bag light comes on?

The air bag readiness light indicates a possible problem with the supplemental restraint system. Have the vehicle inspected by a qualified technician as soon as possible to ensure air bags function correctly.

How do I use the built-in child restraint?

If equipped, lift the child restraint cushion, adjust the head restraint, and secure the child using the five-point harness. The child must weigh between 22-40 lbs and sit upright alone. Follow the manual instructions carefully.

What type of engine oil should I use?

Use SAE 5W-30 or 10W-30 engine oil that meets GM Standard 6094M or ILSAC GF-2. Check the oil level regularly and change it according to the maintenance schedule.

How do I jump-start the vehicle?

Use jumper cables to connect the positive terminal of the dead battery to the positive terminal of the good battery, then connect the negative terminal of the good battery to an unpainted metal part of the disabled vehicle. Start the working vehicle and then the disabled one. Avoid sparks near the battery.

How do I fold and remove the rear seats?

For rear seats, pull the nylon straps to fold the seatback forward. To remove, release the rear latches from the floor pins, then unhook the front latches. Lift the seat out. Reinstall by reversing the steps, ensuring all latches lock securely.

What is the towing capacity of the Cadillac Deville?

The 1997 Deville can tow up to 1,000 lbs (450 kg) when properly equipped. Use a weight-distributing hitch for trailers over 200 lbs tongue weight. Follow the towing guidelines in the owner's manual.

How do I reset the 'Check Engine' light?

The check engine light indicates a fault. After repairing the issue, the light may turn off automatically after a few drive cycles. Alternatively, a qualified technician can reset it using a diagnostic scanner. Do not disconnect the battery to reset it, as this may erase adaptive learning.

Where can I find the vehicle identification number (VIN)?

The VIN is located on the driver's side dashboard near the windshield, on the driver's door jamb sticker, and on the vehicle title and registration documents. It is a 17-character number used for identification and parts ordering.

USER MANUAL Deville (1997) CADILLAC

Close-up of a red car's front wheel and grille (no visible text or symbols)

1997

POINTAC.

TRANS SPORT

The 1997 Pontiac Trans Sport Owner's Manual

1-1 Seats and Restraint Systems
This section tells you how to use your seats and safety belts properly. It also explains the "SRS" system.
2-1 Features and Controls
This section explains how to start and operate your Pontiac.
3-1 Comfort Controls and Audio Systems
This section tells you how to adjust the ventilation and comfort controls and how to operate your audio system.
4-1 Your Driving and the Road
Here you'll find helpful information and tips about the road and how to drive under different conditions.
5-1 Problems on the Road
This section tells what to do if you have a problem while driving, such as a flat tire or overheated engine, etc.
6-1 Service and Appearance Care
Here the manual tells you how to keep your Pontiac running properly and looking good.
7-1 Maintenance Schedule
This section tells you when to perform vehicle maintenance and what fluids and lubricants to use.
8-1 Customer Assistance Information
This section tells you how to contact Pontiac for assistance and how to get service and owner publications. It also gives you information on “Reporting Safety Defects” on page 8-10.
9-1 Index
Here's an alphabetical listing of almost every subject in this manual. You can use it to quickly find something you want to read.

GENERAL MOTORS, GM, the GM Emblem, PONTIAC, the PONTIAC Emblem and the name TRANS SPORT are registered trademarks of General Motors Corporation.

This manual includes the latest information at the time it was printed. We reserve the right to make changes in the product after that time without further notice. For vehicles first sold in Canada, substitute the name "General Motors of Canada Limited" for Pontiac Division whenever it appears in this manual.

Please keep this manual in your Pontiac, so it will be there if you ever need it when you're on the road. If you sell the vehicle, please leave this manual in it so the new owner can use it.

Litho in U.S.A.

Part No. 10293474 B First Edition

WE SUPPORT VOLUNTARY TECHNICIAN CERTIFICATION THROUGH

National Institute for AUTOMOTIVE SERVICE EXCELLENCE

We support voluntary technician certification.

For Canadian Owners Who Prefer a French Language Manual:

©Copyright General Motors Corporation 1996 All Rights Reserved

How to Use this Manual

Many people read their owner's manual from beginning to end when they first receive their new vehicle. If you do this, it will help you learn about the features and controls for your vehicle. In this manual, you'll find that pictures and words work together to explain things quickly.

Index

A good place to look for what you need is the Index in the back of the manual. It's an alphabetical list of all that's in the manual, and the page number where you'll find it.

Safety Warnings and Symbols

You will find a number of safety cautions in this book. We use a box and the word CAUTION to tell you about things that could hurt you if you were to ignore the warning.

CAUTION:

These mean there is something that could hurt you or other people.

In the caution area, we tell you what the hazard is. Then we tell you what to do to help avoid or reduce the hazard. Please read these cautions. If you don't, you or others could be hurt.

You will also find a circle with a slash through it in this book. This safety symbol means "Don't," "Don't do this," or "Don't let this happen."

Vehicle Damage Warnings

Also, in this book you will find these notices:

NOTICE:

These mean there is something that could damage your vehicle.

In the notice area, we tell you about something that can damage your vehicle. Many times, this damage would not be covered by your warranty, and it could be costly. But the notice will tell you what to do to help avoid the damage.

When you read other manuals, you might see CAUTION and NOTICE warnings in different colors or in different words.

You'll also see warning labels on your vehicle. They use the same words, CAUTION or NOTICE.

Vehicle Symbols

These are some of the symbols you may find on your vehicle.

For example, these symbols are used on an original battery:

CAUTION POSSIBLE INJURY

PROTECT EYES BY SHIELDING

CAUSTIC BATTERY ACID COULD CAUSE BURNS

AVOID SPARKS OR FLAMES

SPARK OR FLAME COULD EXPLODE BATTERY

These symbols are important for you and your passengers whenever your vehicle is driven:

DOOR LOCK UNLOCK

FASTEN SEAT BELTS

POWER WINDOW

AIR BAG

These symbols have to do with your lamps:

MASTER LIGHTING SWITCH

TURN

PARKING LAMPS

HAZARD WARNING FLASHER

DAYTIME RUNNING LAMPS

FOG LAMPS

These symbols are on some of your controls:

WINDSHIELD WIPER

WINDSHIELD WASHER

WINDSHIELD DEFROSTER

REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER

VENTILATING FAN

These symbols are used on warning and indicator lights:

ENGINE COOLANT TEMP

BATTERY CHARGING SYSTEM

BRAKE

COOLANT

ENGINE OIL PRESSURE

ANTI-LOCK BRAKES

Here are some other symbols you may see:

FUSE

LIGHTER

HORN

SPEAKER

FUEL

NOTES

vi

Section 1 Seats and Restraint Systems

Here you'll find information about the seats in your Pontiac and how to use your safety belts properly. You can also learn about some things you should not do with air bags and safety belts.

1-2 Seats and Controls

1-2 Manual Seats

1-3 Power Seats

1-3 Folding Driver's Seatback

1-4 Reclining Front Seatbacks

1-6 Rear Seats

1-6 Manual Lumbar Control

1-6 Head Restraints

1-7 Second Row Safety Belt Stowage

1-7 Dump and Stow Feature

1-8 Solid Bench Seats

1-18 Split Bench Seats

1-26 Bucket Seats

1-32 Captain Chairs

1-36 Why Safety Belts Work

1-39 Questions Many People Ask About Safety Belts

1-40 How to Wear Safety Belts Properly

1-49 Safety Belt Use During Pregnancy

1-55 Questions and Answers About Air Bags

1-56 Reat Seat Passengers

1-60 Rear Safety Belt Comfort Guides

1-65 Important for Buckling Children in Child Restraints

1-67 Using the Built-In Child Restraint

1-78 How to Use Child Restraints

1-79 Child Restraint Top Straps

1-92 How to Obtain a Safety Belt Extender

1-92 Checking Your Restraint Systems

1-92 Replacing Parts After a Crash

Seats and Seat Controls

This section tells you about the seats -- how to adjust them, take them out, put them back in, and fold & unfold them.

Driver's 4-way Manual Seat

Close-up of a medical or surgical tool with a metallic handle and blade, resting on a textured surface (no visible text or symbols)

Use the lever on the front left side of the seat to adjust the seat forward or backward. Pull up the lever on the front of the seat to unlock it. Slide the seat to where you want it. To make sure the seat is locked into place, release the lever and try to move the seat with your body.

Close-up of a mechanical component with curved and straight lines, possibly a tool or bracket (no visible text or symbols)

To raise the seat, pull up on the lever on the front right side of the seat. To lower the seat, push the lever down.

CAUTION:

You can lose control of the vehicle if you try to adjust a manual driver's seat while the vehicle is moving. The sudden movement could startle and confuse you, or make you push a pedal when you don't want to. Adjust the driver's seat only when the vehicle is not moving.

6-Way Power Seat (Option)

To adjust the six-way power seat:

Front Control (A): Raise the front of the seat by holding the switch up. Hold the switch down to lower the front of the seat.

Center Control (B): Move the seat forward or backward by holding the control to the front or back. Raise or lower the seat by holding the control up or down.

Rear Control (C): Raise the rear of the seat by holding the switch up. Hold the switch down to lower the rear of the seat.

Folding Driver's Seatback

Close-up of a black plastic door clip attached to a textured surface (no visible text or symbols)

The seatback on the driver's seat folds forward to put items behind the seat. Lift the lever and fold the seatback forward. The seatback will lock into place when you push it back to the upright position.

Manual Front Seats

Close-up of a black-handled tool handle attached to a wall, no visible text or symbols

To use, pull up the lever on the front of the seat to unlock it.

Slide the seat to where you want it. To make sure the seat is locked into place, release the lever and try to move the seat with your body.

Reclining Front and Captain's Chair Seatbacks

All front seats recline.

Close-up of a textured, circular object with a dark central feature, possibly a mechanical or electronic component (no visible text or symbols)

To adjust the seatback, rotate this knob. It is easier to recline the seat if you lean forward, taking your weight off the seatback.

Illustration of a person lying on a seatbelt inside a vehicle, with a no-smoking symbol above (no text or labels)

But don't have a seatback reclined if your vehicle is moving.

CAUTION:

Sitting in a reclined position when your vehicle is in motion can be dangerous. Even if you buckle up, your safety belts can't do their job when you're reclined like this.

The shoulder belt can't do its job because it won't be against your body. Instead, it will be in front of you. In a crash you could go into it, receiving neck or other injuries.

The lap belt can't do its job either. In a crash the belt could go up over your abdomen. The belt forces would be there, not at your pelvic bones. This could cause serious internal injuries.

For proper protection when the vehicle is in motion, have the seatback upright. Then sit well back in the seat and wear your safety belt properly.

Manual Lumbar Control

Close-up of a dark, irregularly shaped object with a faint circular mark on its surface (no text or symbols visible)

Turn the knob on the outboard side of the seat to adjust the lower back support.

Head Restraints

Slide the head restraint up or down so that the top of the restraint is closest to the top of your ears. This position reduces the chance of a neck injury in a crash.

The head restraints tilt forward and rearward also.

Rear Seats

Seat Controls

The rear seats in your vehicle have levers and straps used to adjust, remove and replace the seats. By using the levers and straps, in the correct order, you can easily remove the seats from your vehicle.

When you replace the seats in the vehicle, be sure to follow the label on the back of the seat for proper location. Follow this diagram when the text in this manual tells you what sets of floor cups to use for each seat.

Second Row Safety Belt Stowage

If your vehicle has seats in the third row, there is a sleeve on the second row outside safety belt to store the safety belt while entering and exiting the third row of the vehicle.

If your vehicle has a bench seat in the second row, follow this procedure:

• Pull the belt out and slide the sleeve along the belt until it reaches the patch of Velcro® on the roof.
• Simply press the sleeve against the Velcro patch to secure it in place.

Do not have the second row outside safety belt stored if someone is sitting in the second row outside position.

To release the second row outside safety belt, just pull the sleeve away from the Velcro patch and use the safety belt as usual. The sleeve should slide freely when not in use.

There is also a clip on the safety belt used to secure the belt after it is disconnected from the mini-buckle. When removing the second row bench seat, secure the loose end of the safety belt in this clip. This will keep the safety belt from dangling and possibly striking something.

Dump and Stow Feature

The rear seats in your vehicle, except the Captain's chairs, can be folded forward. Use this feature for exiting and entering third row seats.

Push adjustable head restraints fully down. Fold the seatback flat on the seat. If the seat adjusts, slide it all the way back. Release the rear set of hooks from the floor pins; hang on to the straps as the seat folds forward.

Line drawing of a person seated in a chair with a curved arrow indicating motion (no text or symbols)

Simple line drawing of a person in motion, showing a curved arrow and foot (no text or symbols)

Solid Bench Seat

If you have a solid bench seat, the seatback can be folded down. The seat can also be folded forward or removed to provide extra storage space.

Second Row Solid Bench Seats

Folding the Seatback

Line drawing of a hand holding a small object, possibly a device or tool, with no visible text or symbols.

To fold down the seatback, pull the nylon strap on the back of the seat.

To raise the seatback, pull the nylon strap on the back of the seat while raising the seatback until it locks upright. Push and pull on the seatback to check that it is locked.

Removing the Second Row Solid Bench Seat

With the seatback in the upright position, unhook the side attachment for the safety belt. This mini-buckle is located on the right side of the seat.

Close-up of a hand using a tool to adjust or install a dark circular object (no visible text or symbols)

Push up the red center on the buckle with a small pointed object like a key or pen.

1. Pull the nylon strap on the back of the seat to fold the seatback forward.

2. From behind the bench seat, pull the nylon strap at the base of the seat to release the rear latches from the floor pins.

Technical line drawing of a mechanical clamp or bracket assembly (no text or symbols)

1. Do not let go of the straps until the seat is folded all the way forward.

2. Unhook the front latches by rolling up the gray handle under the seat until the handle locks.

Line drawing of a hand holding a flexible cable with a bracket, placed on a table (no text or symbols)

Line drawing of a hand using a tool to press or install a component on a flat surface (no text or symbols)

1. Remove the seat by rocking it slightly towards the rear of the vehicle and then pulling it out. This should be done in one motion.

Replacing the Second Row Solid Bench Seat

Don't put the bench seat in so it faces backward because it won't latch that way.

The solid benches have seat position labels, located on the back of the seat, showing where the seat must go. Follow that diagram. Use the A, C and E sets of floor cups. See “Seat Controls” in the beginning of this section for more details. The seat must be placed in the proper location for the legs to attach correctly.

Close-up of a mechanical component with no visible text or symbols

1. Place the front hooks of the bench seat onto the front two floor pins. To do this, the seat will need to be angled so that the front hooks clear the floor pins.

2. With the seat still folded forward, roll down the gray handle underneath the seat to lock the front latches.

Technical line drawing of a mechanical component with no visible text or symbols

1. If the front legs are not attached correctly, the rear legs will not attach to the rear set of floor pins.

Close-up of a mechanical component with a curved handle and mounting bracket (no visible text or symbols)

1. Firmly push the rear hooks into the rear floor pins by pushing down on the rear of the seat.

2. Try to raise the bench seat to check that it is locked down.

CAUTION:

A seat that isn't locked into place properly can move around in a collision or sudden stop. People in the vehicle could be injured. Be sure to lock the seat into place properly when installing it.

1. Pull the nylon strap on the back of the seat and raise the seatback until it locks upright.
2. Push and pull on the seatback to check that it is locked into place.

CAUTION:

If the seatback isn't locked, it could move forward in a sudden stop or crash. That could cause injury to the person sitting there. Always press rearward on the seatback to be sure it is locked.

1. Attach the mini-buckle so that the safety belt is ready for use when a passenger uses the seat.

The buckle reattaches by pushing the latch into the buckle until the red center pops out again.

CAUTION:

A safety belt that is twisted or not properly attached won't provide the protection needed in a crash. The person wearing the belt could be seriously injured. After installing the seat, always check to be sure that the safety belts are not twisted and are properly attached.

Third Row Solid Bench Seats

Folding the Seatback

To fold down the seatback, pull the nylon strap on the back of the seat.

Line drawing of a hand holding a small object, possibly a device or tool, with no visible text or symbols.

To raise the seatback, pull the nylon strap while raising the seatback until it locks upright.

Push and pull on the seatback to check that it is locked.

Adjusting the Third Row Solid Bench Seat

Close-up of a hand adjusting a small mechanical component on a flat surface (no visible text or symbols)

Technical line drawing of a mechanical bracket assembly (no text or symbols)

There are two levers to adjust the seat forward or rearward. They are below the center position of the bench, one in front and one in back of the seat.

Lift up either lever and slide the seat forward to allow for extra storage behind the seat, or slide the seat back to allow extra room for third row passengers. Release the lever. Push and pull on the seat to be sure it is locked into place.

Removing the Third Row Solid Bench Seat

1. Pull the nylon strap on the back of the seat to fold the seatback forward.
2. Slide the seat all the way back by either lifting the front adjuster bar and pushing back, or by lifting the handle on the back of the seat and pulling the seat towards the rear of the vehicle.
3. From behind the bench seat, pull the nylon straps at the base of the seat to release the rear latches from the floor pins.

Line drawing of a mechanical assembly with pulleys and rods (no text or symbols)

1. Do not let go of the straps until the seat is folded all the way forward.

2. Unhook the front latches by rolling up the gray handle under the seat until the handle locks.

Technical line drawing of a mechanical assembly with no visible text or symbols

Line drawing of a mechanical assembly with hands operating a component (no text or symbols)

1. Remove the seat by rocking it slightly towards the rear of the vehicle and then pulling it out. This should be done in one motion.

Replacing the Third Row Solid Bench Seat

Don't put the bench seat in so it faces backward because it won't latch that way. If you want more storage room behind the seat, adjust the seat by sliding it forward.

The solid benches have seat position labels, located on the back of the seat, showing where the seat must go. Follow that diagram. Use all of the sets of floor cups in the third row, G, H, I and J sets of floor cups. See “Seat Controls” in the beginning of this section for more details. The seat must be placed in the proper location for the legs to attach correctly.

Make sure the seat is in the full rear position before beginning this procedure.

Close-up of a sewing machine needle and foot (no visible text or symbols)

1. Place the front hooks of the bench seat onto the front two floor pins in the third row. To do this, the seat will need to be angled so that the front hooks clear the floor pins.

2. With the seat still folded forward, roll down the gray handle underneath the seat to lock the front latches.

Technical line drawing of a mechanical assembly with no visible text or symbols

Technical line drawing of a mechanical component with no visible text or symbols

1. If the front legs are not attached correctly, the rear legs will not attach to the rear set of floor pins.

Close-up of a mechanical clamp or bracket component mounted on a flat surface (no visible text or symbols)

1. If the front latches are not attaching correctly, check that the seat is in the full rear position.
2. Firmly push the rear hooks into the rear floor pins by pushing down on the rear of the seat.
3. Try to raise the bench seat to check that it is locked down.

CAUTION:

A seat that isn't locked into place properly can move around in a collision or sudden stop. People in the vehicle could be injured. Be sure to lock the seat into place properly when installing it.

1. Pull the nylon strap on the back of the seat and raise the seatback until it locks upright.
2. Push and pull on the seatback to check that it is locked into place.

CAUTION:

If the seatback isn't locked, it could move forward in a sudden stop or crash. That could cause injury to the person sitting there. Always press rearward on the seatback to be sure it is locked.

Split Bench Seats

If you have the split bench seat (50/50 or 40/60), the seatbacks can be folded down individually and the sections can be removed individually. The sections can also be adjusted forward or rearward individually.

The second row (40/60) split bench may be equipped with built-in child restraint(s). See “Built-In Child Restraint” in the Index.

Folding or Reclining the Seatbacks

Line drawing of a hand holding a small object, possibly a belt or seatbelt, within a vehicle (no text or symbols)

To fold down the seatback on either section of the split bench seat, pull the nylon strap on the back of the seat or lift up on the lever on the front of the seatback.

Use the lever on the front of the seatback to raise or lower the seatback to the desired position.

Line drawing of a person using a tool on a mechanical component (no text or symbols)

To raise either seatback, pull the nylon strap on the back of the seat while raising the seatback until it locks upright. Push and pull on the seatback to check that it is locked upright.

Adjusting the Split Bench Seats

Line drawing of a hand adjusting a mechanical component with no visible text or symbols

There are two adjustment levers on each section of the split bench seats to adjust the seat forward or rearward. They are located below the center of each section of the split bench, one in front and one in back of the seat.

Illustration of hands using a tool to adjust or install a mechanical component (no text or symbols visible)

Lift up either lever and slide the seat forward to allow for extra storage behind the seat, or slide the seat back to allow extra room for passengers.

Release the lever. Push and pull on the seat to be sure it is locked into place.

Removing the Split Bench Seat

Make sure the seatback is in the upright position and that the safety belts are on the correct section of the seat. The head restraints should be fully down.

For the second row bench: With the seatback in the upright position, unhook the side attachment for the safety belt. This mini-buckle is located on the right side of the seat.

Close-up of a hand adjusting a black plastic buckle on fabric (no visible text or symbols)

Push up the red center on the buckle with a small pointed object like a key or pen.

1. Lift the seatback recliner lever or pull the nylon strap on the back of the seat to fold the seatback forward.

2. Slide the seat all the way back by lifting either one of the adjustment bars and sliding the seat fully rearward.

3. From behind the bench seat, pull the nylon strap at the base of the seat to release the rear latches from the floor pins.

Technical line drawing of a mechanical assembly with no visible text or symbols

1. Do not let go of the straps until the seat is folded all the way forward.

2. To unlatch the front latches, squeeze the angled latch release bar towards the straight crossbar.

Line drawing of a person using a mechanical lever system to lift a seat (no text or symbols present)

Line drawing of a hand using a tool to press or install a component on a flat surface (no text or symbols)

1. Remove the seat by rocking it slightly towards the rear of the vehicle and then pulling it out.

Repeat Steps 1 through 5 for the other section of the split bench seat.

Replacing the Split Bench Sections

Don't put the sections of the bench seat in so they face backward because they won't latch that way. If you want more storage room behind the seat, adjust each section by sliding it forward.

The split benches have seat position labels, located on the back of each seat, showing where the seat must go. Follow that diagram.

• The left (40) section of the 40/60 split bench uses the A and B sets of floor cups.
  ● The right (60) section of the 40/60 split bench uses the C and D sets of floor cups.
• The left section of the 50/50 split bench uses the G and H sets of floor cups.
• The right section of the 50/50 split bench uses the I and J sets of floor cups.

See “Seat Controls” in the beginning of this section for more details. The seat must be placed in the proper location for the legs to attach correctly.

Make sure the seat is in the full rear position before beginning this procedure.

1. Squeeze the angled gray bar towards the solid gray crossbar while placing the front hooks of the bench seat onto the front two floor pins.

Line drawing of a mechanical assembly with hands operating a bracket (no text or symbols)

Close-up of a mechanical component with no visible text or symbols

1. To do this, the bench seat will need to be angled so that the front hooks clear the floor pins.

Technical line drawing of a mechanical component with no visible text or symbols

1. If the front legs are not attached correctly, the rear legs will not attach to the rear set of floor pins.

Close-up of a mechanical component with a metallic bracket and attached cable (no visible text or symbols)

1. If the front latches are not attaching correctly, check that the seat is in the full rear position.

2. Firmly push the rear hooks onto the rear floor pins by pushing down on the rear of the seat.

3. Try to raise the seat to check that it is locked down.

CAUTION:

A seat that isn't locked into place properly can move around in a collision or sudden stop. People in the vehicle could be injured. Be sure to lock the seat into place properly when installing it.

1. Lift the seatback recliner lever or pull the nylon strap on the back of the seat and raise the seatback until it locks upright.
2. Push and pull on the seatback to check that it is locked.

CAUTION:

If the seatback isn't locked, it could move forward in a sudden stop or crash. That could cause injury to the person sitting there. Always press rearward on the seatback to be sure it is locked.

1. Attach the mini-buckle so that the safety belt is ready for use when a passenger uses the seat. The buckle reattaches by pushing the latch into the buckle until the red center pops out again.

CAUTION:

A safety belt that is twisted or not properly attached won't provide the protection needed in a crash. The person wearing the belt could be seriously injured. After installing the seat, always check to be sure that the safety belts are not twisted and are properly attached.

Repeat Steps 1 through 5 for the other section of the split bench seat.

Bucket Seats

There are three types of rear bucket seats: RIGHT ONLY, CENTER OR LEFT and LEFT ONLY. RIGHT ONLY and LEFT ONLY seats may be equipped with the built-in child restraint option.

The rear bucket seats can be removed to provide extra storage. Each seat that has the built-in child restraint option fits in only one location in your vehicle, but seats that don't have the built-in child restraint option can be moved to different rows.

Folding or Reclining the Seatbacks

Line drawing of a car seatbelt buckle (no text or symbols)

To fold down the seatback, pull the nylon strap on the back of the seat or lift up on the lever on the front of the seatback.

Use the lever on the front of the seatback to raise or lower the seatback to the desired position.

Line drawing of a mechanical component with a tool inserted, showing motion (no text or symbols)

To raise the seatback, pull the nylon strap on the back of the seat while raising the seatback until it locks upright. Push and pull on the seatback to check that it is locked upright.

Adjusting the Bucket Seats

Technical line drawing of a hand operating a mechanical component with no visible text or symbols

There are two adjustment levers on each seat to adjust the seat forward or rearward. They are located below the center, one in front and one in back of the seat.

Illustration of hands using a tool to adjust or install a mechanical component (no text or symbols visible)

Lift up either lever and slide the seat forward to allow for extra storage behind the seat, or slide the seat back to allow extra room for passengers.

Release the lever. Push and pull on the seat to be sure it is locked into place.

Removing the Bucket Seats

Make sure the seatback is in the upright position. The head restraints should be fully down.

1. Lift the seatback recliner lever or pull the nylon strap on the back of the seat to fold the seatback forward.
2. Slide the seat all the way back by lifting either one of the adjuster levers and sliding the seat fully rearward.
3. From behind the seat, pull the nylon strap at the base of the seat or lift the paddle on the side to release the rear latches from the floor pins.

Technical line drawing of a mechanical assembly with no visible text or symbols

Line drawing of a hand holding a tool, no text or symbols present

1. Do not let go of the straps until the seat is folded all the way forward.

2. To unlatch the front latches, with the seat folded forward, squeeze the angled latch release bar towards the straight crossbar.

Line drawing of a mechanical assembly with hands operating a lever (no text or symbols)

Line drawing of a hand using a tool to press or install a component on a flat base (no text or symbols)

1. Remove the seat by rocking it slightly towards the rear of the vehicle and then pulling it out. This should be done in one motion.

Replacing the Bucket Seats

Don't put the seats in so they face backward because they won't latch that way. If you want more storage room behind the seat, adjust the seat by sliding it forward.

The bucket seats have seat position labels, located on the back of the seat, showing where the seat must go. Follow that diagram. See "Seat Controls" in the beginning of this section for more details. The seat must be placed in the proper location for the legs to attach correctly.

RIGHT ONLY seats that don't have the built-in child restraint option fit only in the right location of either row, the E and F or I and J sets of floor cups.

The CENTER OR LEFT seat fits in the center location or in either left location, the A and B, C and D or G and H sets of floor cups.

The LEFT ONLY seats that don't have the built-in child restraint option fit only in the left location of either row, the A and B or G and H sets of floor cups.

RIGHT ONLY seats that have the built-in child restraint option fit only in the right location of the second row, the E and F sets of floor cups.

LEFT ONLY seats that have the built-in child restraint option fit only in the left location of the second row, the A and B sets of floor cups.

Make sure the seat is in the full rear position before beginning this procedure.

1. With the seat folded, squeeze the angled gray bar towards the solid gray crossbar while placing the front hooks of the bench seat onto the front two floor pins.

Close-up of a mechanical component with visible brackets and mounting features (no text or symbols)

1. To do this, the seat will need to be angled so that the front hooks clear the floor pins.

Technical line drawing of a mechanical component with no visible text or symbols

1. If the front legs are not attached correctly, the rear legs will not attach to the rear set of floor pins.

Close-up of a mechanical clamp or bracket component mounted on a metal surface (no visible text or symbols)

1. If the front latches are not attaching correctly, check that the seat is in the full rear position.
2. Firmly push the rear hooks onto the rear floor pins by pushing down on the rear of the seat.
3. Try to raise the seat to check that it is locked down.

CAUTION:

A seat that isn't locked into place properly can move around in a collision or sudden stop. People in the vehicle could be injured. Be sure to lock the seat into place properly when installing it.

1. Lift the seatback recliner lever or pull the nylon strap on the back of the seat and raise the seatback until it locks upright.
2. Push and pull on the seatback to check that it is locked into place.

CAUTION:

If the seatback isn't locked, it could move forward in a sudden stop or crash. That could cause injury to the person sitting there. Always press rearward on the seatback to be sure it is locked.

Captain's Chairs

The Captain's chairs adjust like the manual front passenger seats.

Close-up of a textured, circular object with a dark central feature, possibly a mechanical or electronic component (no visible text or symbols)

The seatback can be reclined or raised by turning the knob on the inboard side of the seat. It is easier to raise or lower the seatback if you lean forward and take the weight off the seatback.

The armrests can be lowered or raised for entering or exiting the vehicle.

Removing the Captain's Chairs

Line drawing of a mechanical assembly with clamps and a handle (no text or symbols)

1. Pull the nylon strap behind the chair to release the rear hooks from the floor pins.
2. The seat can then be lifted off the front floor pins and removed from the vehicle.

Technical line drawing of a mechanical component with a central bore and base plate (no text or symbols)

Replacing the Captain's Chairs

The left chair goes in the A and C sets of floor pins.

The right chair goes in the D and F sets of floor pins.

1. Hook the front latches over the front floor pins.

Line drawing of a mechanical component with three circular holes and a rectangular base (no text or symbols)

1. Push the rear of the seat down to lock the rear latches onto the rear set of floor pins.

Technical line drawing of a mechanical component with a central bolt and base plate (no text or symbols)

1. Push and pull on the seat to be sure it is properly attached.

CAUTION:

A seat that isn't locked into place properly can move around in a collision or sudden stop. People in the vehicle could be injured. Be sure to lock the seat into place properly when installing it.

Safety Belts: They're for Everyone

This part of the manual tells you how to use safety belts properly. It also tells you some things you should not do with safety belts.

And it explains the Supplemental Restraint System (SRS), or air bag system.

CAUTION:

Don't let anyone ride where he or she can't wear a safety belt properly. If you are in a crash and you're not wearing a safety belt, your injuries can be much worse. You can hit things inside the vehicle or be ejected from it. You can be seriously injured or killed. In the same crash, you might not be if you are buckled up. Always fasten your safety belt, and check that your passengers' belts are fastened properly too.

CAUTION:

It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo area, inside or outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people riding in these areas are more likely to be seriously injured or killed. Do not allow people to ride in any area of your vehicle that is not equipped with seats and safety belts. Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and using a safety belt properly.

Silhouette of a person sitting cross-legged with a diagonal stripe, no text or symbols present

Your vehicle has a light that comes on as a reminder to buckle up. (See "Safety Belt Reminder Light" in the Index.)

In most states and Canadian provinces, the law says to wear safety belts. Here's why: They work.

You never know if you'll be in a crash. If you do have a crash, you don't know if it will be a bad one.

A few crashes are mild, and some crashes can be so serious that even buckled up a person wouldn't survive. But most crashes are in between. In many of them, people who buckle up can survive and sometimes walk away. Without belts they could have been badly hurt or killed.

After more than 25 years of safety belts in vehicles, the facts are clear. In most crashes buckling up does matter ... a lot!

Why Safety Belts Work

When you ride in or on anything, you go as fast as it goes.

Illustration of a small electric vehicle with a flat seat and wheels, placed on a platform against a dark background (no text or symbols)

Take the simplest vehicle. Suppose it's just a seat on wheels.

Illustration of a person seated in a mobility vehicle on a platform (no text or symbols visible)

Put someone on it.

Illustration of a person sitting on a chair with a small vehicle nearby (no text or symbols)

Get it up to speed. Then stop the vehicle. The rider doesn't stop.

Black-and-white photo of a person seated in a vehicle, viewed from above (no visible text or symbols)

The person keeps going until stopped by something. In a real vehicle, it could be the windshield ...

Black-and-white historical photo showing two armored figures in a dynamic scene, one standing and one kneeling, with no visible text or symbols.

or the instrument panel ...

Black-and-white photo of a person seated in a car, wearing a helmet and checkered pattern (no visible text or symbols)

or the safety belts!

With safety belts, you slow down as the vehicle does. You get more time to stop. You stop over more distance, and your strongest bones take the forces. That's why safety belts make such good sense.

Here Are Questions Many People Ask About Safety Belts -- and the Answers

Q: Won't I be trapped in the vehicle after an accident if I'm wearing a safety belt?

A: You could be -- whether you're wearing a safety belt or not. But you can unbuckle a safety belt, even if you're upside down. And your chance of being conscious during and after an accident, so you can unbuckle and get out, is much greater if you are belted.

Q: If my vehicle has air bags, why should I have to wear safety belts?

A: Air bags are in many vehicles today and will be in most of them in the future. But they are supplemental systems only; so they work with safety belts -- not instead of them. Every air bag system ever offered for sale has required the use of safety belts. Even if you're in a vehicle that has air bags, you still have to buckle up to get the most protection. That's true not only in frontal collisions, but especially in side and other collisions.

Q: If I'm a good driver, and I never drive far from home, why should I wear safety belts?

A: You may be an excellent driver, but if you're in an accident -- even one that isn't your fault -- you and your passengers can be hurt. Being a good driver doesn't protect you from things beyond your control, such as bad drivers.

Most accidents occur within 25 miles (40 km) of home. And the greatest number of serious injuries and deaths occur at speeds of less than 40 mph (65 km/h).

Safety belts are for everyone.

How to Wear Safety Belts Properly

Adults

This part is only for people of adult size.

Be aware that there are special things to know about safety belts and children. And there are different rules for smaller children and babies. If a child will be riding in your Pontiac, see the part of this manual called "Children." Follow those rules for everyone's protection.

First, you'll want to know which restraint systems your vehicle has.

We'll start with the driver position.

Driver Position

This part describes the driver's restraint system.

Lap-Shoulder Belt

The driver has a lap-shoulder belt. Here's how to wear it properly.

1. Close and lock the door.

2. Adjust the seat (to see how, see "Seats" in the Index) so you can sit up straight.

Illustration of two hands adjusting a seatbelt on a vehicle (no text or symbols visible)

1. Pick up the latch plate and pull the belt across you. Don't let it get twisted.

The shoulder belt may lock if you pull the belt across you very quickly. If this happens, let the belt go back slightly to unlock it. Then pull the belt across you more slowly.

1. Push the latch plate into the buckle until it clicks.

Pull up on the latch plate to make sure it is secure. If the belt isn't long enough, see "Safety Belt Extender" at the end of this section.

Make sure the release button on the buckle is positioned so you would be able to unbuckle the safety belt quickly if you ever had to.

Illustration of a man sitting inside a car, wearing a seatbelt and driving a wheel (no text or symbols visible)

1. To make the lap part tight, pull down on the buckle end of the belt as you pull up on the shoulder belt.

Illustration of human torso and pelvis with surgical bandages, shown from front and side views (no text or labels)

The lap part of the belt should be worn low and snug on the hips, just touching the thighs. In a crash, this applies force to the strong pelvic bones. And you'd be less likely to slide under the lap belt. If you slid under it, the belt would apply force at your abdomen. This could cause serious or even fatal injuries. The shoulder belt should go over the shoulder and across the chest. These parts of the body are best able to take belt restraining forces.
The safety belt locks if there's a sudden stop or crash, or if you pull the belt very quickly out of the retractor.

Shoulder Belt Height Adjuster

Before you begin to drive, move the shoulder belt adjuster to the height that is right for you.

Illustration of a man sitting in a car seatbelt, holding a belt (no text or symbols visible)

To move it down, push down on the button and move the height adjuster to the desired position. You can move the adjuster up just by pushing up on the shoulder belt guide. After you move the adjuster to where you want it, try to move it down without pushing the button down to make sure it has locked into position.

Adjust the height so that the shoulder portion of the belt is centered on your shoulder. The belt should be away from your face and neck, but not falling off your shoulder.

Q: What's wrong with this?

A: The shoulder belt is too loose. It won't give nearly as much protection this way.

CAUTION:

You can be seriously hurt if your shoulder belt is too loose. In a crash, you would move forward too much, which could increase injury. The shoulder belt should fit against your body.

Q: What's wrong with this?

A: The belt is buckled in the wrong place.

CAUTION:

You can be seriously injured if your belt is buckled in the wrong place like this. In a crash, the belt would go up over your abdomen. The belt forces would be there, not at the pelvic bones. This could cause serious internal injuries. Always buckle your belt into the buckle nearest you.

Q: What's wrong with this?

A: The belt is over an armrest.

CAUTION:

You can be seriously injured if your belt goes over an armrest like this. The belt would be much too high. In a crash, you can slide under the belt. The belt force would then be applied at the abdomen, not at the pelvic bones, and that could cause serious or fatal injuries. Be sure the belt goes under the armrests.

Q: What's wrong with this?

A: The shoulder belt is worn under the arm. It should be worn over the shoulder at all times.

CAUTION:

You can be seriously injured if you wear the shoulder belt under your arm. In a crash, your body would move too far forward, which would increase the chance of head and neck injury. Also, the belt would apply too much force to the ribs, which aren't as strong as shoulder bones. You could also severely injure internal organs like your liver or spleen.

Q: What's wrong with this?

A: The belt is twisted across the body.

CAUTION:

You can be seriously injured by a twisted belt. In a crash, you wouldn't have the full width of the belt to spread impact forces. If a belt is twisted, make it straight so it can work properly, or ask your dealer to fix it.

Illustration of two hands adjusting a seatbelt on a car (no text or symbols visible)

To unlatch the belt, just push the button on the buckle. The belt should go back out of the way.

Before you close the door, be sure the belt is out of the way. If you slam the door on it, you can damage both the belt and your vehicle.

Safety Belt Use During Pregnancy

Safety belts work for everyone, including pregnant women. Like all occupants, they are more likely to be seriously injured if they don't wear safety belts.

Illustration of a person in traditional attire holding a sword, with another figure partially visible (no text or symbols)

A pregnant woman should wear a lap-shoulder belt, and the lap portion should be worn as low as possible, below the rounding, throughout the pregnancy.

The best way to protect the fetus is to protect the mother. When a safety belt is worn properly, it's more likely that the fetus won't be hurt in a crash. For pregnant women, as for anyone, the key to making safety belts effective is wearing them properly.

Right Front Passenger Position

The right front passenger's safety belt works the same way as the driver's safety belt. See "Driver Position" earlier in this section.

When the shoulder belt is pulled out all the way, it will lock. If it does, let it go back all the way and start again.

Supplemental Restraint System (SRS)

This part explains the Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) or air bag system.

Your Pontiac has two air bags -- one air bag for the driver and another air bag for the right front passenger.

Here are the most important things to know about the air bag system:

CAUTION:

You can be severely injured or killed in a crash if you aren't wearing your safety belt -- even if you have air bags. Wearing your safety belt during a crash helps reduce your chance of hitting things inside the vehicle or being ejected from it. Air bags are "supplemental restraints" to the safety belts. All air bags are designed to work with safety belts, but don't replace them. Air bags are designed to work only in moderate to severe crashes where the front of your vehicle hits something. They aren't designed to inflate at all in rollover, rear, side or low-speed frontal crashes. Everyone in your vehicle should wear a safety belt properly -- whether or not there's an air bag for that person.

CAUTION:

Air bags inflate with great force, faster than the blink of an eye. If you're too close to an inflating air bag, it could seriously injure you. Safety belts help keep you in position before and during a crash. Always wear your safety belt, even with air bags. The driver should sit as far back as possible while still maintaining control of the vehicle.

CAUTION:

An inflating air bag can seriously injure small children. Always secure children properly in your vehicle. To read how, see the part of this manual called “Children” and the caution label on the right front passenger’s safety belt.

AIRBAG

There is an air bag readiness light on the instrument panel, which shows the words AIR BAG.

The system checks the air bag electrical system for malfunctions. The light tells you if there is an electrical problem. See “Air Bag Readiness Light” in the Index for more information.

How the Air Bag System Works

Illustration of a man seated in a car, holding a large circular object (no text or symbols visible)

Where are the air bags?

The driver's air bag is in the middle of the steering wheel.

Black-and-white illustration of a person seated in a vehicle, viewed from inside (no text or symbols visible)

The right front passenger's air bag is in the instrument panel on the passenger's side.

CAUTION:

If something is between an occupant and an air bag, the bag might not inflate properly or it might force the object into you and cause injury. The path of an inflating air bag must be kept clear. Don't put anything between an occupant and an air bag, and don't attach or put anything on the steering wheel hub or on or near any air bag cover.

When should an air bag inflate?

An air bag is designed to inflate in a moderate to severe frontal or near-frontal crash. The air bag will inflate only if the impact speed is above the system's designed "threshold level." If your vehicle goes straight into a wall that doesn't move or deform, the threshold level is about 9 to 15mph (14 to 24km/h ). The threshold level can vary, however, with specific vehicle design, so that it can be somewhat above or below this range. If your vehicle strikes something that will move or deform, such as a parked car, the threshold level will be higher. The air bag is not designed to inflate in rollovers, side impacts or rear impacts, because inflation would not help the occupant.

In any particular crash, no one can say whether an air bag should have inflated simply because of the damage to a vehicle or because of what the repair costs were. Inflation is determined by the angle of the impact and how quickly the vehicle slows down in frontal or near-frontal impacts.

What makes an air bag inflate?

In an impact of sufficient severity, the air bag sensing system detects that the vehicle is in a crash. The sensing system triggers a release of gas from the inflator, which inflates the air bag. The inflator, air bag and related hardware are all part of the air bag modules inside the steering wheel and in the instrument panel in front of the right front passenger.

How does an air bag restrain?

In moderate to severe frontal or near-frontal collisions, even belted occupants can contact the steering wheel or the instrument panel. Air bags supplement the protection provided by safety belts. Air bags distribute the force of the impact more evenly over the occupant's upper body, stopping the occupant more gradually. But air bags would not help you in many types of collisions, including rollovers, rear impacts and side impacts, primarily because an occupant's motion is not toward those air bags. Air bags should never be regarded as anything more than a supplement to safety belts, and then only in moderate to severe frontal or near-frontal collisions.

What will you see after an air bag inflates?

After an air bag inflates, it quickly deflates, so quickly that some people may not even realize the air bag inflated. Some components of the air bag module -- the steering wheel hub for the driver's air bag, or the instrument panel for the right front passenger's bag -- will be hot for a short time. The parts of the bag that come into contact with you may be warm, but not too hot to touch. There will be some smoke and dust coming from vents in the deflated air bags. Air bag inflation doesn't prevent the driver from seeing or from being able to steer the vehicle, nor does it stop people from leaving the vehicle.

CAUTION:

When an air bag inflates, there is dust in the air. This dust could cause breathing problems for people with a history of asthma or other breathing trouble. To avoid this, everyone in the vehicle should get out as soon as it is safe to do so. If you have breathing problems but can't get out of the vehicle after an air bag inflates, then get fresh air by opening a window or door.

In many crashes severe enough to inflate an air bag, windshields are broken by vehicle deformation. Additional windshield breakage may also occur from the right front passenger air bag.

- Air bags are designed to inflate only once. After they inflate, you'll need some new parts for your air bag system. If you don't get them, the air bag system won't be there to help protect you in another crash. A new system will include air bag modules and possibly other parts. The service manual for your vehicle covers the need to replace other parts.

• Your vehicle is equipped with a crash sensing and diagnostic module, which records information about the air bag system. The module records information about the readiness of the system, when the sensors are activated and driver's safety belt usage at deployment.
• Let only qualified technicians work on your air bag system. Improper service can mean that your air bag system won't work properly. See your dealer for service.

NOTICE:

If you damage the cover for the driver's or the right front passenger's air bag, the bag may not work properly. You may have to replace the air bag module in the steering wheel or both the air bag module and the instrument panel for the passenger's air bag. Do not open or break the air bag covers.

Servicing Your Air Bag-Equipped Pontiac

Air bags affect how your Pontiac should be serviced. There are parts of the air bag system in several places around your vehicle. You don't want the system to inflate while someone is working on your vehicle. Your Pontiac dealer and the Trans Sport Service Manual have information about servicing your vehicle and the air bag system. To purchase a service manual, see "Service and Owner Publications" in the Index.

CAUTION:

For up to 10 minutes after the ignition key is turned off and the battery is disconnected, an air bag can still inflate during improper service. You can be injured if you are close to an air bag when it inflates. Avoid wires wrapped with yellow tape or yellow connectors. They are probably part of the air bag system. Be sure to follow proper service procedures, and make sure the person performing work for you is qualified to do so.

The air bag system does not need regular maintenance.

Rear Seat Passengers

It's very important for rear seat passengers to buckle up! Accident statistics show that unbelted people in the rear seat are hurt more often in crashes than those who are wearing safety belts.

Rear passengers who aren't safety belted can be thrown out of the vehicle in a crash. And they can strike others in the vehicle who are wearing safety belts.

Rear Seat Outside Passenger Positions

Top-down line drawing of a car with six windows and two cars, no text or symbols present

Top-down line drawing of a car with four vehicle windows and a traffic light (no text or symbols)

Lap-Shoulder Belt

The positions next to the windows have lap-shoulder belts. Here's how to wear one properly.

Illustration of two hands adjusting a car seatbelt, no text or symbols present

1. Pick up the latch plate and pull the belt across you. Don't let it get twisted.

The shoulder belt may lock if you pull the belt across you very quickly. If this happens, let the belt go back slightly to unlock it. Then pull the belt across you more slowly.

1. Push the latch plate into the buckle until it clicks.

Pull up on the latch plate to make sure it is secure.

When the shoulder belt is pulled out all the way, it will lock. If it does, let it go back all the way and start again. If the belt is not long enough, see "Safety Belt Extender" at the end of this section. Make sure the release button on the buckle is positioned so you would be able to unbuckle the safety belt quickly if you ever had to.

Illustration of a man sitting in a car, holding a stringed bag (no text or symbols visible)

1. To make the lap part tight, pull down on the buckle end of the belt as you pull up on the shoulder part.

Illustration of human skeletal anatomy showing full-body and sagittal views with a black band (no text or labels)

The lap part of the belt should be worn low and snug on the hips, just touching the thighs. In a crash, this applies force to the strong pelvic bones. And you'd be less likely to slide under the lap belt. If you slid under it, the belt would apply force at your abdomen. This could cause serious or even fatal injuries. The shoulder belt should go over the shoulder and across the chest. These parts of the body are best able to take belt restraining forces.

The safety belt locks if there's a sudden stop or a crash, or if you pull the belt very quickly out of the retractor.

CAUTION:

You can be seriously hurt if your shoulder belt is too loose. In a crash, you would move forward too much, which could increase injury. The shoulder belt should fit against your body.

Illustration of two hands adjusting a seatbelt, no text or symbols present

To unlatch the belt, just push the button on the buckle.

Rear Safety Belt Comfort Guides for Children and Small Adults

Your vehicle may have rear shoulder belt comfort guides. This feature will provide added safety belt comfort for children who have outgrown child restraints and for small adults. When installed on a shoulder belt, the comfort guide pulls the belt away from the neck and head.

If your vehicle has bucket seats in the second row, there is one guide for each outside passenger position. If your vehicle has a bench seat in the second row, there is one guide for the left-hand outside passenger position. If your vehicle has third-row seats, there is one guide for each outside passenger position. To provide added safety belt comfort for children who have outgrown child restraints and for smaller adults, the comfort guides may be installed on the shoulder belts. Here's how to install a comfort guide and use the safety belt:

1. The guide is located on the side of the seatback.

Illustration of two hands performing a finger-pulling technique on a striped curtain (no text or symbols)

1. Place the guide over the belt and insert the two edges of the belt into the slots of the guide.

Close-up of a car's side panel with a black handle and striped pattern (no visible text or symbols)

1. Be sure that the belt is not twisted and it lies flat. The guide must be on top of the belt.

Illustration of a person sitting on a vehicle seat with a bandage, viewed from the side (no text or symbols present)

1. Buckle, position and release the safety belt as described in "Rear Seat Outside Passenger Positions" earlier in this section. Make sure that the shoulder belt crosses the shoulder.

To remove and store the comfort guides, squeeze the belt edges together so that you can take them out from the guides. Then just let the guide hang from its elastic cord on the side of the seatback.

Center Passenger Position (Bench Seat)

Top-down line drawing of a car with multiple windows and seating arrangement (no text or symbols)

Lap Belt

If your vehicle has a third row rear bench seat, someone can sit in the center position.

Illustration of a person sitting on a chair holding a seatbelt, no text or symbols present

When you sit in the center position of the bench seat, you have a lap safety belt, which has no retractor. To make the belt longer, tilt the latch plate and pull it along the belt.

Illustration of a person wearing a seatbelt and handling a buckle (no text or symbols visible)

To make the belt shorter, pull its free end as shown until the belt is snug.

Buckle, position and release it the same way as the lap part of a lap-shoulder belt. If the belt isn't long enough, see "Safety Belt Extender" at the end of this section.

Make sure the release button on the buckle is positioned so you would be able to unbuckle the safety belt quickly if you ever had to.

Center Passenger Position (Bucket Seat)

Top-down line drawing of a car with six windows and one central oval (no text or symbols)

Lap Belt

If your vehicle has bucket seats, someone can sit in the center position bucket seat.

Illustration of a person sitting on a vehicle seat, wearing a collared shirt and pants (no text or symbols visible)

When you sit in the center position bucket seat, you have a lap safety belt which has a retractor.

1. Pick up the latch plate and, in a single motion, pull the belt across you. Don't let it get twisted.
2. Push the latch plate into the buckle until it clicks. If the belt stops before it reaches the buckle, let it go back all the way and start again. Pull up on the latch plate to make sure it is secure.
3. Feed the lap belt into the retractor to tighten it.

Illustration of a person sitting on a vehicle backseat, viewed from the side (no text or symbols visible)

1. Position and release it the same way as the lap part of a lap-shoulder belt.

If the belt isn't long enough, see "Safety Belt Extender" at the end of this section. Make sure the release button on the buckle is positioned so you would be able to unbuckle the safety belt quickly if you ever had to.

The center position bucket seat is a CENTER OR LEFT type seat. Because it is the only bucket seat with a lap belt, and has a buckle on only one side, there are certain places a CENTER OR LEFT type bucket seat should, and should not, be used. See "Seats" in the Index. If the CENTER OR LEFT bucket seat is used on the left side of the vehicle, the person sitting there should use the lap-shoulder belt. See "Rear Seat Outside Passenger Positions" in the Index.

Children

Everyone in a vehicle needs protection! That includes infants and all children smaller than adult size. In fact, the law in every state in the United States and in every Canadian province says children up to some age must be restrained while in a vehicle.

Smaller Children and Babies

CAUTION:

Smaller children and babies should always be restrained in a child or infant restraint. The instructions for the restraint will say whether it is the right type and size for your child. A very young child's hip bones are so small that a regular belt might not stay low on the hips, as it should. Instead, the belt will likely be over the child's abdomen. In a crash, the belt would apply force right on the child's abdomen, which could cause serious or fatal injuries. So, be sure that any child small enough for one is always properly restrained in a child or infant restraint.

Illustration of a woman in a car holding a baby, with a no-smoking symbol nearby (no text or symbols on the main image)

CAUTION:

Never hold a baby in your arms while riding in a vehicle. A baby doesn't weigh much -- until a crash. During a crash a baby will become so

CAUTION: (Continued)

CAUTION: (Continued)

heavy you can't hold it. For example, in a crash at only 25 mph (40 km/h), a 12-lb. (5.5 kg) baby will suddenly become a 240-lb. (110 kg) force on your arms. The baby would be almost impossible to hold.

Secure the baby in an infant restraint.

Illustration of a person sitting on a car seat with a belt, no text or symbols present

Built-in Child Restraint (Option)

Interior view of a car seat with a V-shaped seatbelt, showing no text or symbols

If your vehicle has this option in a bucket seat, each bucket seat that has the built-in child restraint fits in only one location in your vehicle. To find out where a bucket seat that has a built-in child restraint must be located in your vehicle, see “Removable Rear Bucket Seats” in the Index.

Interior view of a car seat with two rear seats and black safety harnesses (no text or symbols visible)

If your vehicle has this option in a 60/40 bench seat, there's a built-in child restraint at each outboard position of the 60/40 bench seat. This bench seat will only fit in the second row of your vehicle. In both types of seats, the built-in child restraint works the same way.

This child restraint system conforms to all applicable Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standards.

Each child restraint is designed for use only by children who weigh between 22 and 40 pounds (10 and 18 kg) and whose height is between 33.5 and 40 inches (850 and 1 016 km) and who are capable of sitting upright alone.

The child should also be at least one year old. It is important to use a rear-facing infant restraint until the child is about a year old. A rear-facing restraint gives the infant's head, neck and body the support they would need in a crash. See "Child Restraints" later in this section for more information.

Q: What if the top of my child's shoulders is above the shoulder belt slots for the five-point child restraint harness system?

A: A child whose shoulders are above the shoulder belt slots for the five-point child restraint harness system shouldn't use this child restraint. Instead, the child should sit on the vehicle's regular seat cushion and use the vehicle's adult safety belts.

CAUTION:

BEFORE YOU USE THIS CHILD RESTRAINT, BE SURE THE TOP OF THE CHILD'S SHOULDERS IS BELOW THE SLOTS THAT THE HARNESS GOES THROUGH. A CHILD WHOSE SHOULDERS ARE ABOVE THOSE SLOTS COULD BE INJURED DURING A SUDDEN STOP OR CRASH. IF THE TOP OF THE CHILD'S SHOULDERS IS ABOVE THE SLOTS, DON'T USE THIS CHILD RESTRAINT WHILE THE VEHICLE IS IN MOTION.

Securing a Child in the Built-In Child Restraint

Illustration of a person adjusting a car seat, no text or symbols present

1. Raise the head restraint until the lower edge of the head restraint is even with the top of the seatback.

Illustration of a person adjusting a car seat, no text or symbols present

1. Rotate the head restraint rearward until it touches the top of the seatback. Make sure there is no gap between the lower edge of the head restraint and the top of the seatback.

Illustration of a person standing beside a car seatbelt with a bag attached (no text or symbols visible)

1. Lower the child restraint cushion.

Interior view of a car seatbelt with labeled seat A (no text or symbols beyond the label)

You'll be using the child restraint's harness (A) to secure your child. Don't use the vehicle's safety belts.

CAUTION:

Using the vehicle's regular safety belts on a child seated on the child restraint cushion can cause serious injury to the child in a sudden stop or crash. If a child is the proper size for the built-in child restraint, secure the child using the child restraint's harness. But children who are too large for the built-in child restraint should sit on the vehicle's regular seat and use the vehicle's adult safety belts.

WARNING! FAILURE TO FOLLOW THE MANUFACTURER'S INSTRUCTIONS ON THE USE OF THIS CHILD RESTRAINT SYSTEM CAN RESULT IN YOUR CHILD STRIKING THE VEHICLE'S INTERIOR DURING A SUDDEN STOP OR CRASH. SNUGLY ADJUST THE BELTS PROVIDED WITH THIS CHILD RESTRAINT AROUND YOUR CHILD.

Illustration of a person adjusting a car seatbelt in a vehicle (no text or symbols visible)

1. Before placing the child in the child restraint, add slack to the shoulder harness. Pull the black shoulder harness release strap firmly. At the same time pull both shoulder harness straps through the slots in the seatback as shown.

2. Place the child on the child restraint cushion.

Illustration of a child wearing a car seatbelt with an inset showing a device labeled B (no text or symbols on the device itself)

1. Select only one side of the harness. Place the harness over the child's shoulder.
2. Push the latch plate (B) into the buckle until it clicks.

Be sure the buckle is free of any foreign objects that may prevent you from securing the latch plates. If you can't secure a latch plate, see your Pontiac dealer for service before using the child restraint.

1. Place the other side of the harness over the child's shoulder.
2. Push the latch plate into the buckle until it clicks.

Illustration of a child wearing a seatbelt and harness, seated inside an airplane (no text or symbols visible)

1. Pull up on both latch plates to make sure they are secure.

Illustration of a child wearing a car seatbelt, with an inset showing the same seatbelt detail (no text or symbols present)

1. Now fasten the left and right halves of the shoulder harness clip together. The purpose of this clip is to help keep the harness positioned on the child's shoulders.

CAUTION:

An unfastened shoulder harness clip won't help keep the harness in place on the child's shoulders. If the harness isn't on the child's shoulders, it won't be able to restrain the child's upper body in a sudden stop or crash. The child could be seriously injured. Make sure the harness clip is properly fastened.

Illustration of a child wearing a car seatbelt being assisted by an adult (no text or symbols visible)

1. Pull the shoulder harness adjustment strap (C) firmly until the harness is snugly adjusted around the child. You should not be able to put more than two fingers between the harness and the child's chest. Make sure the harness and buckle strap are not twisted.

Illustration of a child wearing a car seatbelt, seated in a vehicle (no text or symbols visible)

1. Adjust the position of the harness on the child's shoulder by moving the clip up or down along the harness. On each side of the harness, the shoulder part should be centered on the child's shoulder. The harness should be away from the child's face and neck, but not falling from the child's shoulders.
   If you expect that the child will sleep while riding, you can recline the seatback. See "Seats" in the Index.

Removing the Child from the Built-In Child Restraint

Illustration of a child wearing a car seatbelt being adjusted for a seatbelt (no text or symbols present)

1. Unfasten the shoulder harness clip.

Illustration of a child wearing a seatbelt, seated with a hand adjusting the seatbelt (no text or symbols visible)

1. Unlatch the harness by pushing the button on the buckle.
2. Move one side of the harness off the child's shoulder.
3. Move the other side of the harness off the child's shoulder.
4. Remove the child from the child restraint cushion.

Storing the Built-In Child Restraint

Always properly store the built-in child restraint before using the vehicle's lap-shoulder belt.

Illustration of a person adjusting a seatbelt in a workshop setting (no text or symbols visible)

1. Move both latch plates and both sides of the shoulder harness clip to the bottom of the harness straps.

Illustration of a person adjusting a car seatbelt, no text or symbols present

1. Fold the child restraint cushion and leg rest up into the seatback.

2. Press the child restraint cushion firmly into the seatback.

Illustration of a person seated in a car seat, holding one arm (no text or symbols visible)

1. Then press the leg rest firmly into the seatback, and secure it by pressing the upper corners against the fastener strips on the seatback.

Illustration of a person pressing down on a wooden chair (no text or symbols visible)

1. Rotate the head restraint forward and push it all the way down.

Just like the other restraint systems in your vehicle, your built-in child restraint needs to be periodically checked and may need to have parts replaced after a crash. See "Checking Your Restraint Systems" and "Replacing Seat and Restraint System Parts After a Crash" in the Index.

Child Restraints

Be sure the child restraint is designed to be used in a vehicle. If it is, it will have a label saying that it meets Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standards.

Then follow the instructions for the restraint. You may find these instructions on the restraint itself or in a booklet, or both. These restraints use the belt system in your vehicle, but the child also has to be secured within the restraint to help reduce the chance of personal injury. The instructions that come with the infant or child restraint will show you how to do that.

Where to Put the Restraint

Accident statistics show that children are safer if they are restrained in the rear rather than the front seat. We at General Motors therefore recommend that you put your child restraint in a rear seat. Never put a rear-facing child restraint in the front passenger seat. Here's why:

CAUTION:

A child in a rear-facing child restraint can be seriously injured if the right front passenger's air bag inflates. This is because the back of a rear-facing child restraint would be very close to the inflating air bag. Always secure a rear-facing child restraint in a rear seat.

You may, however, secure a forward-facing child restraint in the right front seat. Before you secure a forward-facing child restraint, always move the front passenger seat as far back as it will go. Or, secure the child restraint in a rear seat.

Wherever you install it, be sure to secure the child restraint properly.

Keep in mind that an unsecured child restraint can move around in a collision or sudden stop and injure people in the vehicle. Be sure to properly secure any child restraint in your vehicle -- even when no child is in it.

Top Strap

Illustration of a car seat with a belt bearing a key inserted, showing internal components and safety wires (no text or symbols)

If your child restraint has a top strap, it should be anchored. A child restraint with a top strap should only be used in the second row. If your vehicle has third row seats, anchor brackets for the second row outside positions are located just above the place where the third row lap-shoulder belts meet the floor.

Monochrome sketch of a hand pressing down on a surface, with no visible text or symbols

There's a vinyl sleeve there; to get to the bracket, push this vinyl sleeve aside slightly. Anchor the top strap to the bracket. If your vehicle does not have third row seats and belts, or if you need to have an anchor bracket installed for the center bucket seat in the second row, or for the right-hand side of a 60/40 bench seat, you can ask your Pontiac dealer to put it in for you. If you want to install an anchor bracket yourself, your dealer can tell you how to do it.
Once you have the top strap anchored, you'll be ready to secure the child restraint itself.

Securing a Child Restraint in a Rear Outside Seat Position

Top-down line drawing of two identical car seats with multiple windows and side-mounted units (no text or symbols)

You'll be using the lap-shoulder belt. See the earlier part about the top strap if the child restraint has one.

1. Put the restraint on the seat. Follow the instructions for the child restraint.

2. Secure the child in the child restraint as the instructions say.

3. Pick up the latch plate, and run the lap and shoulder portions of the vehicle's safety belt through or around the restraint. The child restraint instructions will show you how. Tilt the latch plate to adjust the belt if needed.

If the shoulder belt goes in front of the child's face or neck, put it behind the child restraint.

Illustration of hands adjusting a seatbelt buckle (no text or symbols visible)

1. Buckle the belt. Make sure the release button is positioned so you would be able to unbuckle the safety belt quickly if you ever had to.

Illustration of a woman seated in a car steering wheel, no text or symbols visible

1. Pull the rest of the shoulder belt all the way out of the retractor to set the lock.

Illustration of a person seated in a car seatbelt, holding a guitar (no text or symbols visible)

1. To tighten the belt, feed the shoulder belt back into the retractor while you push down on the child restraint.
2. Push and pull the child restraint in different directions to be sure it is secure.

To remove the child restraint, just unbuckle the vehicle's safety belt and let it go back all the way. The safety belt will move freely again and be ready to work for an adult or larger child passenger.

Securing a Child Restraint in the Center Seat Position (Third Row Bench Seat)

Top-down line drawing of a car with multiple windows and a central black oval (no text or symbols)

You'll be using the lap belt.

See the earlier part about the top strap if the child restraint has one.

Illustration of a person using a cable to switch a car seatbelt (no text or symbols visible)

1. Make the belt as long as possible by tilting the latch plate and pulling it along the belt.
2. Put the restraint on the seat. Follow the instructions for the child restraint.
3. Secure the child in the child restraint as the instructions say.
4. Run the vehicle's safety belt through or around the restraint. The child restraint instructions will show you how.

Illustration of a person's arm in a car seatbelt, showing hands and torso (no text or symbols)

1. Buckle the belt. Make sure the release button is positioned so you would be able to unbuckle the safety belt quickly if you ever had to.

2. To tighten the belt, pull its free end while you push down on the child restraint.

3. Push and pull the child restraint in different directions to be sure it is secure. If it isn't, secure the restraint in a different place in the vehicle and contact the child restraint maker for their advice about how to attach the child restraint properly.

To remove the child restraint, just unbuckle the vehicle's safety belt. It will be ready to work for an adult or larger child passenger.

Securing a Child Restraint in the Center Seat Position (Bucket Seat)

Top-down line drawing of a car with multiple windows and a central oval object (no text or symbols)

You'll be using the lap belt. See the earlier part about the top strap if the child restraint has one.

1. Put the restraint on the seat. Follow the instructions for the child restraint.
2. Secure the child in the child restraint as the instructions say.

Black-and-white illustration of a person sitting in a car seatbelt, adjusting the seat (no text or symbols visible)

1. Pull the lap belt all the way out without stopping.

2. While holding it out, run the belt through or around the child restraint. The child restraint instructions will show you how.

Illustration of a person's seatbelt being lifted by hand, showing seatbelt and seat (no text or symbols)

1. Buckle the belt. Make sure the release button is positioned so you would be able to unbuckle the safety belt quickly if you ever had to.

Illustration of a person seated in a car seatbelt, no text or symbols visible

1. To tighten the belt, feed it back into the retractor while you push down on the child restraint.
2. Push and pull the child restraint in different directions to be sure it is secure.

To remove the child restraint, just unbuckle the vehicle's safety belt and let it go back all the way. The safety belt will move freely again and be ready to work for an adult or larger child passenger.

Securing a Child Restraint in the Right Front Seat Position

Top-down line drawing of a car with multiple windows and a central oval object (no text or symbols)

Your vehicle has a front passenger air bag. Never put a rear-facing child restraint in this seat. Here's why:

CAUTION:

A child in a rear-facing child restraint can be seriously injured if the front passenger's air bag inflates. This is because the back of a rear-facing child restraint would be very close to the inflating air bag. If your vehicle is a passenger van, always secure a rear-facing child restraint in a rear seat. If your vehicle is a cargo van, do not use a rear-facing child restraint in this vehicle. If a forward-facing child restraint is suitable for your child, always move the passenger seat as far back as it will go.

You'll be using the lap-shoulder belt. See the earlier part about the top strap if the child restraint has one.

1. Because your vehicle has a front passenger air bag, always move the seat as far back as it will go before securing a forward-facing child restraint. (See "Seats" in the Index.)
2. Put the restraint on the seat. Follow the instructions for the child restraint.
3. Secure the child in the child restraint as the instructions say.
4. Pick up the latch plate, and run the lap and shoulder portions of the vehicle's safety belt through or around the restraint. The child restraint instructions will show you how.

If the shoulder belt goes in front of the child's face or neck, put it behind the child restraint.

Illustration of a person adjusting a seatbelt (no text or symbols visible)

1. Buckle the belt. Make sure the release button is positioned so you would be able to unbuckle the safety belt quickly if you ever had to.

Illustration of a man adjusting a seatbelt inside an airplane seat (no text or symbols visible)

1. Pull the rest of the shoulder belt all the way out of the retractor to set the lock.

Illustration of hands installing or adjusting a car seatbelt (no text or symbols visible)

1. To tighten the belt, feed the shoulder belt back into the retractor while you push down on the child restraint.
2. Push and pull the child restraint in different directions to be sure it is secure.

To remove the child restraint, just unbuckle the vehicle's safety belt and let it go back all the way. The safety belt will move freely again and be ready to work for an adult or larger child passenger.

Larger Children

Illustration of two people seated in a car seat, viewed from the side (no text or symbols visible)

Children who have outgrown child restraints should wear the vehicle's safety belts.

If you have the choice, a child should sit next to a window so the child can wear a lap-shoulder belt and get the additional restraint a shoulder belt can provide.

Accident statistics show that children are safer if they are restrained in the rear seat. But they need to use the safety belts properly.

• Children who aren't buckled up can be thrown out in a crash.
• Children who aren't buckled up can strike other people who are.

Illustration of three people seated in a car, one wearing a seatbelt, with a no-smoking symbol overlaid (no text or symbols on the figures)

CAUTION:

Never do this.

Here two children are wearing the same belt. The belt can't properly spread the impact forces. In a crash, the two children can be crushed together and seriously injured. A belt must be used by only one person at a time.

Q: What if a child is wearing a lap-shoulder belt, but the child is so small that the shoulder belt is very close to the child's face or neck?

A: Move the child toward the center of the vehicle, but be sure that the shoulder belt still is on the child's shoulder, so that in a crash the child's upper body would have the restraint that belts provide. If the child is sitting in a rear seat outside position, see "Rear Safety Belt Comfort Guides" in the Index. If the child is so small that the shoulder belt is still very close to the child's face or neck, you might want to place the child in a seat that has a lap belt, if your vehicle has one.

Illustration of a person sitting in a car seat with a no-smoking symbol above (no text or numbers present)

CAUTION:

Never do this.

Here a child is sitting in a seat that has a lap-shoulder belt, but the shoulder part is behind the child. If the child wears the belt in this way, in a crash the child might slide under the belt. The belt's force would then be applied right on the child's abdomen. That could cause serious or fatal injuries.

Wherever the child sits, the lap portion of the belt should be worn low and snug on the hips, just touching the child's thighs. This applies belt force to the child's pelvic bones in a crash.

Safety Belt Extender

If the vehicle's safety belt will fasten around you, you should use it.

But if a safety belt isn't long enough to fasten, your dealer will order you an extender. It's free. When you go in to order it, take the heaviest coat you will wear, so the extender will be long enough for you. The extender will be just for you, and just for the seat in your vehicle that you choose. Don't let someone else use it, and use it only for the seat it is made to fit. To wear it, just attach it to the regular safety belt.

Checking Your Restraint Systems

Now and then, make sure the safety belt reminder light and all your belts, buckles, latch plates, retractors and anchorages are working properly. If your vehicle has a built-in child restraint, also periodically make sure the harness straps, latch plates, buckle, clip, child head restraint and anchorages are working properly. Look for any other loose or damaged safety belt and built-in child restraint system parts. If you see anything that might keep a safety belt or built-in child restraint system from doing its job, have it repaired.

Torn or frayed safety belts may not protect you in a crash. They can rip apart under impact forces. If a belt is torn or frayed, get a new one right away. If your vehicle has the built-in child restraint, torn or frayed harness straps can rip apart under impact forces just like torn or frayed safety belts can. They may not protect a child in a crash. If a harness strap is torn or frayed, get a new harness right away.

Also look for any opened or broken air bag covers, and have them repaired or replaced. (The air bag system does not need regular maintenance.)

Replacing Restraint System Parts After a Crash

If you've had a crash, do you need new safety belts or built-in child restraint parts?

After a very minor collision, nothing may be necessary. But if the safety belts or built-in child restraint harness straps were stretched, as they would be if worn during a more severe crash, then you need new safety belts or harness straps.

If safety belts or built-in child restraint harness straps are cut or damaged, replace them. Collision damage also may mean you will need to have safety belt, built-in child restraint or seat parts repaired or replaced. New parts and repairs may be necessary even if the safety belt or built-in child restraint wasn't being used at the time of the collision.

If an air bag inflates, you'll need to replace air bag system parts. See the part on the air bag system earlier in this section.

NOTES

NOTES

Section 2 Features and Controls

Here you can learn about the many standard and optional features on your Pontiac, and information on starting, shifting and braking. Also explained are the instrument panel and the warning systems that tell you if everything is working properly -- and what to do if you have a problem.

2-2 Important Information About Keys
2-4 Door Locks
2-8 Keyless Entry
2-11 Battery Replacement for RKE
2-13 Switchbanks
2-14 Sliding Door
2-15 Power Sliding Door
2-20 Operation of Sliding Door Security Locks
2-24 Preventing Theft of Your Vehicle
2-27 New Vehicle "Break-In"
2-27 Ignition Positions
2-29 Tips on Starting Your Engine
2-30 Using the Engine Coolant Heater
2-32 Automatic Transaxle Operation
2-36 Parking Brake Guidelines
2-38 Important Information on Engine Exhaust
2-42 Locks and Lighting Choices
2-50 Windows

2-52 Adjusting the Tilt Steering Wheel
2-53 Functions of the Multifunction Lever
2-54 How to Use the High/Low Beam Headlamp Changer
2-54 Windshield Wipers and Fluid
2-56 Using Cruise Control
2-59 Exterior Lamps
2-60 Daytime Running Lamps (DRL)
2-61 Interior Lamps
2-66 Rearview Mirrors
2-68 Storage Compartments
2-71 Driver Information Center
2-85 Accessory Power Outlets
2-87 Sunroof
2-88 Air Inflator System
2-90 Instrument Panel Overview
2-94 All About Your Warning Lights and Gages

Keys

CAUTION:

Leaving young children in a vehicle with the ignition key is dangerous for many reasons.

A child or others could be badly injured or even killed.

They could operate power windows or other controls or even make the vehicle move. Don't leave the keys in a vehicle with young children.

Illustration of a car with two people inside, showing a stop sign (no text or symbols on the car itself)

Close-up of a black key with a white handle, isolated on a plain background (no text or symbols visible)

The master key can be used for the ignition as well as all door locks, the liftgate lock and the storage compartments.

If you need a new key, contact your Pontiac dealer, who can obtain the correct key code. Remember to carry the pre-cut emergency door key which Pontiac sends after delivery. In an emergency, call Pontiac Roadside Assistance at 1-800-ROADSIDE or 1-800-762-3743. (In Canada, call 1-800-268-6800.)

NOTICE:

Your Pontiac has a number of new features that can help prevent theft. But you can have a lot of trouble getting into your vehicle if you ever lock your key inside. You may even have to damage your vehicle to get in. So be sure you have an extra key.

Door Locks

CAUTION:

Unlocked doors can be dangerous.

Passengers -- especially children -- can easily open the doors and fall out. When a door is locked, the inside handle won't open it.

Outsiders can easily enter through an unlocked door when you slow down or stop your vehicle.

This may not be so obvious: You increase the chance of being thrown out of the vehicle in a crash if the doors aren't locked. Wear safety belts properly, lock your doors, and you will be far better off whenever you drive your vehicle.

There are several ways to lock and unlock your vehicle.

From the outside, use your key or the Remote Keyless Entry transmitter (if your vehicle has this option).

Front Doors

Close-up of a metallic door handle with a handle and handle, no visible text or symbols

To unlock either front door from the outside with the key, insert the key and turn it toward the front of the vehicle.

You can lock either front door from the outside with your key by inserting and turning it toward the rear of the vehicle.

Close-up of a car seatbelt with a metallic buckle (no text or symbols visible)

To lock either front door from the inside, push the locking lever forward.

To unlock either front door from the inside, pull back on the locking lever.

Power Door Locks

Close-up of a black Lock button on a textured fabric surface (no text or symbols visible)

From the inside, press the front of the power door lock switch (on either front door) to unlock all doors and the liftgate. If your vehicle is equipped with the Content Theft Deterrent system, the power door lock switch will not unlock the doors until the system is disarmed. See "Content Theft Deterrent" in the Index for more details.

You can lock all doors and the liftgate from the inside by pressing the rear of the power lock switch on either front door. If your vehicle is equipped with the Content Theft Deterrent system, the power door lock switch may cause the system to arm. See "Content Theft Deterrent" in the Index for more details.

To unlock any door or the liftgate from the outside with your key, turn the key to the unlock position and release. This will only unlock that door or the liftgate. You can unlock all the doors and the liftgate by holding the key cylinder in the unlock position for one second.

With power door locks, you can lock all the doors from the outside by inserting the key and turning the key cylinder to the lock position.

With power locks, when the doors are locked, the inside as well as the outside door latch release cannot open the doors. This safety feature prevents a door from being accidentally opened from the inside by moving the handle.

To override this safety feature, move the locking lever to the unlock position on the door you want to open.

When the liftgate has been unlocked with the power door locks, you won't need the key to open it. Simply squeeze the handle above the license plate. This is also true if you use the optional Remote Keyless Entry transmitter. See "Remote Keyless Entry" later in this section.

Automatic Door Locks (Option)

All of the doors will lock automatically when you move your shift lever out of PARK (P). All doors will unlock automatically when the ignition is turned off while the shift lever is in PARK (P).

You can program the Automatic Door Locks to operate with the Remote Keyless system and to lock and unlock automatically to suit your needs. See “Locks and Lighting Choices” in the Index.

With the automatic door locks feature, you can still lock or unlock the doors at any time, either manually or with the power door lock switches.

Last Door Closed Locking

The Last Door Closed Locking feature makes it easier to use your power door locks to lock all the doors and the liftgate when leaving your vehicle.

When any door or the liftgate is open, the first time you attempt to lock the doors using the power lock switch or the key chain transmitter (if equipped), will result in three chimes to signal that Last Door Closed Locking is being used. All doors and the liftgate can be opened for five seconds from the time the last door is closed.

Five seconds after the last door is closed, all the doors will lock. You can lock the doors immediately by using the power door lock switch or the key chain transmitter.

If the ignition is in the RUN or ACCESSORY position, this feature will not lock the doors.

To turn the Last Door Closed Locking feature off or on, see "Locks and Lighting Choices" in the Index.

Sliding Door Delayed Locking

If the sliding door is open when you use your power door locks to lock the vehicle, the sliding door is not locked. Normally the Last Door Closed Locking Feature will be used to lock the sliding door after it has been closed.

When the ignition is on or if the Last Door Closed Locking Feature has been overridden or programmed off, the Sliding Door Delayed Locking feature will lock your sliding door for you. Three seconds after the sliding door is closed, all the doors will lock. If you have the dual sliding doors, all doors will lock three seconds after both sliding doors are closed.

Lockout Deterrent

The Lockout Deterrent feature makes it difficult for you to lock your keys in your vehicle. If the driver's door is open while the keys are in the ignition, you will not be able to use your power door lock to lock the vehicle.

If you don't leave the keys in the ignition or if you use the manual door lock, you could still lock your keys in your vehicle. Always remember to take your keys with you.

To turn this feature off or on, see "Locks and Lighting Choices" in the Index.

Leaving Your Vehicle

If you are leaving the vehicle, take your keys, open your door and set the locks from the inside. Then get out and close the door.

Keyless Entry System (Option)

If your Pontiac has this option, you can lock and unlock your doors and the liftgate from about 3 feet (1 m) up to 30 feet (9 m) away using the remote keyless entry transmitter supplied with your vehicle.

Your Keyless Entry System operates on a radio frequency subject to Federal Communications Commission (FCC) Rules and with Industry and Science Canada.

This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.

This device complies with RSS-210 of Industry and Science Canada. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device.

Changes or modifications to this system by other than an authorized service facility could void authorization to use this equipment.

This system has a range of about 3 feet (1 m) up to 30 feet (9 m). At times you may notice a decrease in range. This is normal for any remote lock control system. If the transmitter does not work or if you have to stand closer to your vehicle for the transmitter to work, try this:

• Check to determine if battery replacement or synchronization is necessary. See the instructions that follow.
• Check the distance. You may be too far from your vehicle. You may need to stand closer during rainy or snowy weather.
• Check the location. Other vehicles or objects may be blocking the signal. Take a few steps to the left or right, hold the transmitter higher, and try again.
• If you're still having trouble, see your Pontiac dealer or a qualified technician for service.

Operation

Remote Driver's Door and All Door Unlock

When you press UNLOCK on the key chain transmitter, only the driver's door will unlock. If you press UNLOCK again within five seconds, all the doors and the liftgate will unlock. If you would like all the doors to unlock the first time you press UNLOCK, see "Locks and Lighting Choices" in the Index.

If your vehicle is equipped with the Content Theft Deterrent system, The UNLOCK button on the key chain transmitter will disarm the system (see "Content Theft Deterrent" in the Index for more details).

Remote All Door Lock

To lock all doors, press LOCK on the key chain transmitter (see "Power Door Locks" in the Index for more details on the power door lock features). If your vehicle is equipped with the Content Theft Deterrent system, the LOCK button may arm the system (see "Content Theft Deterrent" in the Index for more details).

Remote Lock Confirmation

When you use the key chain transmitter to lock your vehicle, your park lamps will flash briefly to let you know the command has been received. If you press the LOCK button again, within five seconds, the horn will sound briefly and the park lamps will flash to let you know the vehicle is already locked.

If you would like to change the way the park lamps and horn operate with Remote Lock Confirmation, see "Locks and Lighting Choices" in the Index.

Remote Unlock Confirmation

When you use your key chain transmitter to unlock your vehicle or to operate the power sliding door (if equipped), your park lamps will flash briefly to let you know the command was received.

If you would like to change the way the park lamps operate with Remote Unlock Confirmation, see "Locks and Lighting Choices" in the Index.

Remote Alarm

When you press the horn button on the key chain transmitter, your vehicle's park lamps will flash and the horn will sound. This will allow you to attract attention, if needed.

Remote Power Sliding Door Operation (Option)

If you have the optional power sliding door (see "Power Sliding Door" later in this section), your remote transmitter will have a button that has a van symbol on it. Press it to open or close the sliding door.

If the sliding door is locked, first unlock all doors (see "Remote Driver's Door and All Door Unlock" earlier in this section), then press the van symbol to open the sliding door. Press the van symbol again to close the sliding door.

You can operate the power sliding door with the remote transmitter only when the power sliding door override switch on the overhead console is disabled.

Matching Transmitter(s) To Your Vehicle

Each remote keyless entry transmitter is coded to prevent another transmitter from unlocking your vehicle. If a transmitter is lost or stolen, a replacement can be purchased through your dealer. Remember to bring any remaining transmitters with you when you go to your dealer. When the dealer matches the replacement transmitter to your vehicle, any remaining transmitters must also be matched. Once your dealer has coded the new transmitter, the lost transmitter will not unlock your vehicle. Each vehicle can have only four transmitters matched to it.

See your dealer to match transmitters to another vehicle.

Battery Replacement

Under normal use, the battery in your remote keyless entry transmitter should last about two years.

You can tell the battery is weak if the transmitter won't work at the normal range in any location. If you have to get close to your vehicle before the transmitter works, it's probably time to change the battery.

NOTICE:

When replacing the battery, use care not to touch any of the circuitry. Static from your body transferred to these surfaces may damage the transmitter.

Replacing the Battery in the Remote Transmitter

1. Insert a flat object like a dime into the slot on the side of the transmitter and twist to separate the halves.

Two black electronic key holders with exposed internal circuit boards, one open and one closed (no text or symbols visible)

1. Gently pry the battery out of the transmitter. Do not use the metal flanges to "pop out" the battery.
2. Reassemble the transmitter. Make sure the halves are snapped together tightly so water will not get in.
3. Check the transmitter operation. If needed, follow the instructions on resynchronizing your remote transmitter.

Resynchronizing Your Remote Transmitter

Your Remote Keyless Entry System uses a continually changing code for increased security. Normally, the receiver in your vehicle will keep track of this changing code.

• Loss of synchronization will occur if the transmitter is activated more than 256 times while out of range of the vehicle.
  ● Loss of synchronization will occur after the battery replacement if the transmitter is immediately activated more than 16 times while out of range of the vehicle.

If your key chain transmitter has stopped working, you may need to resynchronize the transmitter to the vehicle receiver. To do this, press the LOCK and UNLOCK buttons together and hold for at least seven seconds or until the horn sounds if equipped with Content Theft Deterrent. Check the transmitter operation.

Switchbanks

There are two sets of switchbanks located in the front of the vehicle. The switches will vary with the options that are on your vehicle. It is useful to become familiar with them since they are used frequently while operating the vehicle.

Overhead Console Switchbank

This switchbank is located in the overhead console. The switches that you may find in this switchbank are the Interior Lights Override, Power Sliding Door Override, Power Sliding Door, Power Rear Quarter Windows and Sunroof. If your vehicle does not have some of the options controlled by these switches, there will be a blank button in its place.

For more information, please see each of these features in the Index.

Instrument Panel Switchbank

This switchbank is located in the instrument panel below the Comfort Controls. The switches and controls that you may find in this switchbank are the Rear Fan Knob, Rear Window Wiper/Washer, Fog Lamps and Traction Control. If your vehicle does not have some of the options controlled by these switches, there will be a blank button in its place.

For more information, please see each of these features in the Index.

If your vehicle is not equipped with the Optional Rear Climate Control system, there will be a storage space in this switchbank. The rubber mat can be removed for cleaning. Snap the mat into place after cleaning.

Sliding Door

To open the sliding door from outside the vehicle, pull the handle out and then pull the door toward the rear. If you slide the door all the way back, the door will rest in a detent position. The door must overcome this detent when closing.

To move the door forward, you must first pull the door past the open detent position.

Does your Pontiac have a sliding door on the left side? If it does, this door is designed to open only a little if the fuel door is open. If this ever happens, don't try to force the sliding door. Just close the left-side sliding door. Then when the fuel filler door is closed, the left-side sliding door can be opened normally.

Sliding Door Lock

Close-up of a metallic door handle with handle and handle, no visible text or symbols

To unlock either sliding door from the outside using your key, insert the key and turn it toward the rear of the vehicle. To lock the sliding door from the outside, turn the key toward the front of the vehicle.

Close-up of a door handle and side panel with a small square button (no visible text or symbols)

Lock the sliding door from inside the vehicle by moving the manual locking lever down. Unlock it by moving the lever up.

If you have the optional power door locks, the sliding door lock has a delay feature. See "Power Door Locks" or "Locks and Lighting Choices" in the Index.

Power Sliding Door (Option)

With this option, you can open and close the power sliding door with switches inside your vehicle. If you have the optional Remote Keyless Entry system, you can also operate the power sliding door with your remote transmitter. See "Remote Keyless Entry" in the Index.

CAUTION:

Leaving young children or pets unattended in your vehicle can be dangerous. They could operate the power sliding door. A child or others could be injured. Do not leave children or pets unattended in your vehicle.

Simple line drawing of a device panel with a speech bubble and control buttons (no text or symbols)

To operate the power sliding door, the power sliding door override switch must be disabled. This switch is located in the overhead console switchbank.

Pushing the bottom of the button will disable the power sliding door; it will not operate when either of the power door switches or the power sliding door button on the Remote Transmitter is pressed.

The power sliding door override switch will also stop the door immediately, while the door is opening or closing, when the override feature is enabled.

When your vehicle goes through an automatic car wash, be sure the power sliding door override feature is enabled.

To open or close the sliding door, press and release one of two power door switches.

Line drawing of a server rack with a car icon on the front panel (no text or symbols)

Simple line drawing of a door with a small rectangular object on the wall (no text or symbols)

One is mounted on the wall, just in front of the right side sliding door. The other switch is located in the overhead console switchbank.

The sliding door must be unlocked for it to operate. The key does not have to be in the ignition. To help avoid accidental operation of the sliding door, disable the power sliding door by pushing the power sliding door override switch.

When the key is in the ignition in the RUN position, the power sliding door will only open if the transaxle is in PARK (P). The transaxle does not have to be in PARK (P) to close the door.

If the override feature is not enabled and the power sliding door is open or in the process of closing when you shift out of PARK (P), a buzzer will sound. This is a warning that the sliding door is not completely closed.

CAUTION:

If you shift the transaxle out of PARK (P) and accelerate before the power sliding door latches closed, the door may reverse to the open position. A child or others could fall out of the vehicle and be injured. Always make sure the power sliding door is closed and latched before you drive away.

Side view of a car with a large 'no' symbol on the side panel, no readable text or symbols present.

If anything obstructs the power sliding door while it is closing, the door will automatically reverse to the open position, provided it meets sufficient resistance. Resistance must be as strong as the force of the closing door, or stronger. The force of the closing door increases significantly as the door approaches the latch position.

CAUTION:

You or others could be injured if caught in the path of the sliding door. Make sure the door path is clear before closing the door.

To manually open the power sliding door when the power sliding door override feature is disabled, pull the inside or outside latch release and let go; the door will open fully.

To manually open the power sliding door when the power sliding door override feature is enabled, pull the inside or outside latch release and slide the door all the way back.

Line drawing of a car on a road with a no-smoking symbol (no text or labels)

CAUTION:

If your vehicle is facing downward on a steep grade (15 percent or more), the door may not stay open and could slam shut, possibly injuring

CAUTION: (Continued)

CAUTION: (Continued)

someone. To make sure the door does not slam shut, enable the power sliding door feature. Then if the door closes, it will close under the control of the power door system.

To manually close the power sliding door when the override feature is disabled, pull the inside or outside latch release or the edge of the door. Move the door about 4 inches (10 cm) toward the closed position and release. The door will close completely and latch for you.

To manually close the power sliding door when the override feature is enabled, pull the inside or outside latch release and slide the door all the way forward to the latch position.

Resetting the Power Sliding Door

The power sliding door may operate incorrectly or not all because of the following conditions:

• A low voltage or dead battery,
- Disconnecting the battery or
- If the IGN 1, B/U LAMP, RADIO or PWR SEAT/PSD fuse is removed or blown.

See "Fuse Panel" in the Index for more information about your fuse panel.

If any of these conditions occur, the power sliding door will need to be reset. To do this, follow the directions listed here. It will be easier if you read through them once before beginning this procedure.

1. Check to be sure the power sliding door is unlocked and securely closed.
2. Turn the ignition switch to the OFF position.
3. Enable the power sliding door override feature.
4. Remove the RADIO fuse from the underhood fuse and relay center. Leave it out for 30 seconds.
5. Reinstall the fuse and wait 10 seconds.
6. Disable the power sliding door override feature.
7. Push either of the power door buttons to open the power sliding door.
8. Wait five seconds and close the door by pushing either power door button.
9. Wait five seconds and repeat Steps 7 and 8.

If the door does not rest in the fully open position after repeating Step 7, repeat Steps 7 and 8 again. If the door still does not operate correctly, see your dealer for service.

Sliding Door Child Security Lock

Your Pontiac is equipped with a sliding door child security lock that helps prevent young children or other passengers from opening the sliding door from the inside. This lock is on both doors if your vehicle has the dual sliding doors.

If you have the optional power sliding door, you can override the security lock by pressing either power door switch when the power sliding door override feature is disabled. See "Power Sliding Door" earlier in the section.

The security lock lever is located on the inside of the sliding door, on the front edge of the door. To access the lever, open the sliding door. Use the security lock label on the edge of the door as a guide.

To use the security lock, move the security lock lever all the way up and close the door from the outside.

If you have the optional power sliding door, disable the power sliding door by pushing the override switch on the overhead console. The power sliding door cannot be opened from the inside when this feature is in use.

Close-up of a white refrigerator door with a black handle and a small square button, no visible text or symbols.

If you want to open the sliding door when the security lock is on, unlock the sliding door and open the door from the outside.

If you have the optional power sliding door, disable the power sliding door override feature. Press either power door switch.

You should let adults and older children know how the security lock works, and how to cancel the lock. If you don't, adults or older children who ride in the rear won't be able to open the sliding door from the inside when the security lock feature is in use.

Canceling the Sliding Door Security Lock

1. Unlock the sliding door and open the door from the outside.
2. Move the security lock lever all the way down.

The sliding door lock will now work normally.

Liftgate

Close-up of a metallic switch or knob on a white surface (no visible text or symbols)

To unlock the liftgate from the outside, turn the key in the cylinder clockwise. To lock the liftgate using the key, turn the key counterclockwise.

Open the liftgate using the handle recessed above the license plate. Once slightly opened, the liftgate will rise by itself. Lamps in the rear of the vehicle will come on, illuminating the rear cargo area (see “Interior Lamps” in the Index).

NOTICE:

Be sure there are no overhead obstructions, such as a garage door, before you open the liftgate. You could slam the liftgate into something and break the glass.

Close-up of a hand adjusting a wooden door handle (no text or symbols visible)

To close the liftgate, pull down on the handle, then firmly shut the liftgate. Don't drive with the liftgate open, even slightly. See "Engine Exhaust" in the Index.

A light on your instrument panel will warn you if the liftgate is not completely closed (see "Door Ajar Warning Light" in the Index).

CAUTION:

It can be dangerous to drive with the liftgate open because carbon monoxide (CO) gas can come into your vehicle. You can't see or smell CO. It can cause unconsciousness and even death.

If you must drive with the liftgate open or if electrical wiring or other cable connections must pass through the seal between the body and the liftgate:

● Make sure all windows are shut.
- Turn the fan on your heating or cooling system to its highest speed with the setting on bi-level (outside air button is pressed). That will force outside air into your vehicle. See “Comfort Controls” in the Index.
- If you have air outlets on or under the instrument panel, open them all the way.

See "Engine Exhaust" in the Index.

Content Theft-Deterrent (Option)

If your vehicle has this option, it has a theft-deterrent alarm system.

Close-up of a metallic surface with parallel grooves and small holes (no text or symbols visible)

A light located on top of your instrument panel (near the center of the vehicle, next to the windshield) will flash slowly to let everyone know that the system has been armed.

While armed, the doors will not unlock with the power lock switch.

Once armed, the alarm will go off if someone tries to enter the vehicle (without using the key chain transmitter or a key), breaks a window, tries to damage the vehicle or turns the ignition on. The horn will sound and your vehicle's park lamps will flash for up to two minutes. The system will also cut off the fuel supply, preventing the vehicle from being driven.

When the alarm is armed, the liftgate may be opened with the key chain transmitter or with a key.

Arming with the Power Lock Switch

Your alarm system will arm when you use either power lock switch to lock the doors while any door or the liftgate is open and the key is removed from the ignition (if you would like to turn off power lock switch arming, see "Locks and Lighting Choices" in the Index).

The security light flashes quickly to let you know when the system is ready to arm with the power door lock switches. The security light will stop flashing and stay on, when you press the rear of the power lock switch, to let you know the system is arming. After all doors and the liftgate are closed and locked, the security light will begin flashing at a very slow rate to let you know the system is armed.

Arming with the Key Chain Transmitter

Your alarm system will arm when you use your key chain transmitter to lock the doors if the key is not in the ignition. The security light will turn on to let you know the system is arming. After all doors and the liftgate are closed and locked, the security light will begin flashing at a very slow rate to let you know the system is armed.

Arming with Your Key

Your alarm system will arm when you use your key to lock the doors. The security light will turn on to let you know the system is arming. After all doors and the liftgate are closed and locked, the security light will begin flashing at a very slow rate to let you know the system is armed. If you would like your key not to arm the system, see “Locks and Lighting Choices” in the Index.

Arming Confirmation

If remote unlock confirmation is on (see "Locks and Lighting Choices" in the Index), your park lamps will flash briefly to let you know when your alarm system has armed.

Disarming with the Key Chain Transmitter

Your alarm system will disarm when you use your key chain transmitter to unlock the doors. The security light will stop flashing to let you know the system is no longer armed.

Disarming with Your Key

Your alarm system will disarm when you use your key to unlock the doors. The security light will stop flashing to let you know the system is no longer armed. If you would like your key not to disarm the alarm system, see "Locks and Lighting Choices" in the Index.

Nuisance Alarms

If you experience nuisance alarms (alarms which are not caused by the opening of a door or the liftgate and are not desirable), you may need to reduce the damage detection sensitivity. Try programming the Content Theft Deterrent to Mode 1. See “Locks and Lighting Choices” in the Index.

If you continue to experience nuisance alarms, you may want to try turning off damage detection by programming your Content Theft Deterrent to Mode 2. See “Locks and Lighting Choices” in the Index.

If you are still having trouble with nuisance alarms, you can turn off the Content Theft Deterrent system by programming your Content Theft Deterrent to Mode 3. See "Locks and Lighting Choices" in the Index. See your Dealer or qualified technician for service.

Theft

Vehicle theft is big business, especially in some cities. Although your Pontiac has a number of theft-deterrent features, we know that nothing we put on it can make it impossible to steal. However, there are ways you can help.

Key in the Ignition

If you leave your vehicle with the keys inside, it's an easy target for joy riders or professional thieves -- so don't do it.

When you park your Pontiac and open the driver's door, you'll hear a chime reminding you to remove your key from the ignition and take it with you. Always do this. Your steering wheel will be locked, and so will your ignition and transaxle. And remember to lock the doors.

Parking at Night

Park in a lighted spot, close all windows and lock your vehicle. Remember to keep your valuables out of sight. Put them in a storage area, or take them with you.

Parking Lots

If you park in a lot where someone will be watching your vehicle, it's best to lock it up and take your key. But what if you have to leave your key? What if you have to leave something valuable in your vehicle?

- Put your valuables in a storage area, like your glove box.

- Lock all the doors except the driver's.

New Vehicle "Break-In"

NOTICE:

Your modern Pontiac doesn't need an elaborate "break-in." But it will perform better in the long run if you follow these guidelines:

• Don't drive at any one speed -- fast or slow -- for the first 500 miles (805 km). Don't make full-throttle starts.
• Avoid making hard stops for the first 200 miles (322 km) or so. During this time your new brake linings aren't yet broken in. Hard stops with new linings can mean premature wear and earlier replacement. Follow this breaking-in guideline every time you get new brake linings.
• Don't tow a trailer during break-in. See "Towing a Trailer" in the Index for more information.

Ignition Positions

With the key in the ignition switch, you can turn the switch to five positions.

ACCESSORY (A): An on position in which you can operate your electrical power accessories. Press in the ignition switch as you turn the top of it toward you.

LOCK (B): This is the only position in which you can remove the key. This locks your steering wheel, ignition and transaxle.

OFF (C): This position unlocks the steering wheel, ignition and transaxle, but does not send electrical power to any accessories. Use this position if your vehicle must be pushed or towed, but never try to push-start your vehicle. A warning chime will sound if you open the driver's door when the ignition is off and the key is in the ignition.

RUN (D): This is an on position to which the switch returns after you start your engine and release the switch. The switch stays in the RUN position when the engine is running. But even when the engine is not running, you can use the RUN position to operate your electrical power accessories, and to display some instrument panel warning lights.

START (E): This position starts the engine. When the engine starts, release the key. The ignition switch will return to the RUN position for normal driving.

Note that even if the engine is not running, the positions ACCESSORY and RUN are on positions that allow you to operate your electrical accessories, such as the radio.

NOTICE:

If your key seems stuck in LOCK and you can't turn it, be sure you are using the correct key; if so, is it all the way in? If it is, then turn the steering wheel left and right while you turn the key hard. But turn the key only with your hand. Using a tool to force it could break the key or the ignition switch. If none of this works, then your vehicle needs service.

Starting Your Engine

Move your shift lever to PARK (P) or NEUTRAL (N). Your engine won't start in any other position -- that's a safety feature. To restart when you're already moving, use NEUTRAL (N) only.

NOTICE:

Don't try to shift to PARK (P) if your Pontiac is moving. If you do, you could damage the transaxle. Shift to PARK (P) only when your vehicle is stopped.

1. Without pushing the accelerator pedal, turn your ignition key to START. When the engine starts, let go of the key. The idle speed will go down as your engine gets warm.

NOTICE:

Holding your key in START for longer than 15 seconds at a time will cause your battery to be drained much sooner. And the excessive heat can damage your starter motor.

1. If it doesn't start right away, hold your key in START. If it doesn't start in three seconds (or starts but then stops), push the accelerator pedal about one-quarter of the way down for 12 more seconds, or until it starts.

2. If your engine still won't start (or starts but then stops), it could be flooded with too much gasoline. Try this:

Wait 15 seconds to let the starter motor cool down. Then push your accelerator pedal all the way to the floor. Hold it there. Then hold the key in START. This clears the extra gasoline from the engine. When the engine starts, let go of the key and the accelerator pedal. If the engine still doesn't start, wait another 15 seconds and repeat this step.

NOTICE:

Your engine is designed to work with the electronics in your vehicle. If you add electrical parts or accessories, you could change the way the engine operates. Before adding electrical equipment, check with your dealer. If you don't, your engine might not perform properly. If you ever have to have your vehicle towed, see the part of this manual that tells how to do it without damaging your vehicle. See "Towing Your Vehicle" in the Index.

Engine Coolant Heater (Option)

Technical illustration of a mechanical assembly with coiled cable and connectors (no text or symbols)

In very cold weather, 0^ F ( -18^ C) or colder, the engine coolant heater can help. You'll get easier starting and better fuel economy during engine warm-up. Usually, the coolant heater should be plugged in a minimum of four hours prior to starting your vehicle.

To Use the Coolant Heater

1. Turn off the engine.
2. Open the hood, and unwrap the electrical cord.
3. Plug it into a normal, grounded 110-volt AC outlet.

CAUTION:

Plugging the cord into an ungrounded outlet could cause an electrical shock. Also, the wrong kind of extension cord could overheat and cause a fire. You could be seriously injured. Plug the cord into a properly grounded three-prong 110-volt AC outlet. If the cord won't reach, use a heavy-duty three-prong extension cord rated for at least 15 amps.

1. Before starting the engine, be sure to unplug and store the cord as it was before to keep it away from moving engine parts. If you don't, it could be damaged.

How long should you keep the coolant heater plugged in? The answer depends on the outside temperature, the kind of oil you have, and some other things. Instead of trying to list everything here, we ask that you contact your Pontiac dealer in the area where you'll be parking your vehicle. The dealer can give you the best advice for that particular area.

Automatic Transaxle Operation

There are several different positions for your shift lever.

PARK (P): This locks your front wheels. It's the best position to use when you start your engine because your vehicle can't move easily.

Ensure the shift lever is fully in PARK (P) before starting the engine. Your Pontiac has a Brake-Transaxle Shift Interlock (BTSI). You have to fully apply your regular brakes before you can shift from PARK (P) when the ignition key is in the RUN position. As you step on the brake pedal, while in PARK (P), you may hear a click from the solenoid of the BTSI. This ensures that the BTSI is operating properly.

If you cannot shift out of PARK (P), ease pressure on the shift lever -- push the shift lever all the way into PARK (P) as you maintain brake application. Then move the shift lever into the gear you wish. See "Shifting Out of PARK (P)" in this section.

CAUTION:

It is dangerous to get out of your vehicle if the shift lever is not fully in PARK (P) with the parking brake firmly set. Your vehicle can roll.

Don't leave your vehicle when the engine is running unless you have to. If you have left the engine running, the vehicle can move suddenly. You or others could be injured. To be sure your vehicle won't move, even when you're on fairly level ground, always set your parking brake and move the shift lever to PARK (P).

See “Shifting Into PARK (P)” in the Index. If you’re pulling a trailer, see “Towing a Trailer” in the Index.

REVERSE (R): Use this gear to back up.

NOTICE:

Shifting to REVERSE (R) while your vehicle is moving forward could damage your transaxle. Shift to REVERSE (R) only after your vehicle is stopped.

To rock your vehicle back and forth to get out of snow, ice or sand without damaging your transaxle, see "Stuck: In Sand, Mud, Ice or Snow" in the Index.

NEUTRAL (N): In this position, your engine doesn't connect with the wheels. To restart when you're already moving, use NEUTRAL (N) only. Also, use NEUTRAL (N) when your vehicle is being towed.

CAUTION:

Shifting out of PARK (P) or NEUTRAL (N) while your engine is “racing” (running at high speed) is dangerous. Unless your foot is firmly on the brake pedal, your vehicle could move very rapidly. You could lose control and hit people or objects. Don’t shift out of PARK (P) or NEUTRAL (N) while your engine is racing.

NOTICE:

Damage to your transaxle caused by shifting out of PARK (P) or NEUTRAL (N) with the engine racing isn't covered by your warranty.

AUTOMATIC OVERDRIVE (D): This position is for normal driving. If you need more power for passing, and you're:

• Going less than 35 mph (56 km/h), push your accelerator pedal about halfway down.
• Going about 35 mph (56 km/h) or more, push the accelerator all the way down.

You'll shift down to the next gear and have more power.

THIRD (3): This position is also used for normal driving, but it offers more power and lower fuel economy than AUTOMATIC OVERDRIVE (D).

Here are some times you might choose THIRD (3) instead of AUTOMATIC OVERDRIVE (D):

• When driving on hilly, winding roads.
• When towing a trailer (so there is less shifting between gears).
  ● When going down a steep hill.

SECOND (2): This position gives you more power, but lower fuel economy. You can use SECOND (2) on hills. It can help control your speed as you go down steep mountain roads, but then you would also want to use your brakes off and on.

NOTICE:

Don't drive in SECOND (2) for more than 25 miles (41 km), or at speeds over 55 mph (88 km/h), or you can damage your transaxle. Use THIRD (3) or AUTOMATIC OVERDRIVE (D) as much as possible. Don't shift into SECOND (2) unless you are going slower than 65 mph (105 km/h) or you can damage your engine.

NOTICE:

If your vehicle seems to start up rather slowly, or if it seems not to shift gears as you go faster, something may be wrong with a transaxle system sensor. If you drive very far that way, your vehicle can be damaged. So, if this happens, have your vehicle serviced right away. Until then, you can use SECOND (2) when you are driving less than 35 mph (55 km/h) and THIRD (3) for higher speeds.

FIRST (1): This position gives you even more power (but lower fuel economy) than SECOND (2). You can use it on very steep hills, or in deep snow or mud. If the

selector lever is put in FIRST (1), the transaxle won't downshift into first gear until the vehicle is going slow enough.

NOTICE:

If your front wheels can't rotate, don't try to drive. This might happen if you were stuck in very deep sand or mud or were up against a solid object. You could damage your transaxle. Also, if you stop when going uphill, don't hold your vehicle there with only the accelerator pedal. This could overheat and damage the transaxle. Use your brakes or shift into PARK (P) to hold your vehicle in position on a hill.

Parking Brake

To set the parking brake, hold the regular brake pedal down with your right foot and push down the parking brake pedal with your left foot.

If the ignition is on, the brake system warning light will come on. See "Brake System Warning Light" in the Index.

To release the parking brake, hold the regular brake pedal down with your right foot while you push down on the parking brake pedal with your left foot. (To release the tension on the parking brake cable, you will need to apply about the same amount of pressure to the parking brake pedal as you did when you set the parking brake.) When you remove your foot from the parking brake pedal, it will pop up to the release position.

NOTICE:

Driving with the parking brake on can cause your rear brakes to overheat. You may have to replace them, and you could also damage other parts of your vehicle.

If you are towing a trailer and are parking on any hill, see "Towing a Trailer" in the Index. That section shows what to do first to keep the trailer from moving.

Shifting Into PARK (P)

CAUTION:

It can be dangerous to get out of your vehicle if the shift lever is not fully in PARK (P) with the parking brake firmly set. Your vehicle can roll. If you have left the engine running, the vehicle can move suddenly. You or others could be injured. To be sure your vehicle won't move, even when you're on fairly level ground, use the steps that follow. If you're pulling a trailer, see "Towing a Trailer" in the Index.

1. Hold the brake pedal down with your right foot and set the parking brake with your left foot.

Line drawing of a person's arm and hand with a black arrow pointing to the wrist area (no text or symbols)

1. Move the shift lever into the PARK (P) position like this:

- Pull the lever toward you.

Line drawing of a hand holding a cable with a black arrow pointing to it, against a plain background (no text or symbols)

- Move the lever up as far as it will go.

1. Move the key to the LOCK position.
2. Remove the key and take it with you. If you can leave your vehicle with the key in your hand, your vehicle is in PARK (P).

Leaving Your Vehicle With the Engine Running

CAUTION:

It can be dangerous to leave your vehicle with the engine running. Your vehicle could move suddenly if the shift lever is not fully in PARK (P) with the parking brake firmly set. And, if you leave the vehicle with the engine running, it could overheat and even catch fire. You or others could be injured. Don't leave your vehicle with the engine running unless you have to.

If you have to leave your vehicle with the engine running, be sure your vehicle is in PARK (P) and your parking brake is firmly set before you leave it. After you've moved the shift lever into the PARK (P) position, hold the regular brake pedal down. Then, see if you can move the shift lever away from PARK (P) without first pulling it toward you. If you can, it means that the shift lever wasn't fully locked into PARK (P).

Torque Lock

If you are parking on a hill and you don't shift your transaxle into PARK (P) properly, the weight of the vehicle may put too much force on the parking pawl in the transaxle. You may find it difficult to pull the shift lever out of PARK (P). This is called "torque lock." To prevent torque lock, set the parking brake and then shift into PARK (P) properly before you leave the driver's seat. To find out how, see "Shifting Into PARK (P)" in the Index.

When you are ready to drive, move the shift lever out of PARK (P) before you release the parking brake.

If torque lock does occur, you may need to have another vehicle push yours a little uphill to take some of the pressure from the parking pawl in the transaxle, so you can pull the shift lever out of PARK (P).

Shifting Out of PARK (P)

Your Pontiac has Brake-Transaxle Shift Interlock (BTSI). You have to fully apply your regular brakes before you can shift from PARK (P), when the ignition is in the RUN position. See “Automatic Transaxle Operation” in the Index.

As you step on the brake pedal, while in PARK (P), you may hear a click from the solenoid of the BTSI. This ensures that the BTSI is operating properly.

If you cannot shift out of PARK (P), ease pressure on the shift lever -- push the shift lever all the way into PARK (P) as you maintain brake application. Then move the shift lever into the gear you want. If you ever hold the brake pedal down but still can't shift out of PARK (P), try this:

1. Turn the ignition key to OFF.
2. Apply and hold the brake until the end of Step 4.
3. Shift to NEUTRAL (N).
4. Start the engine and then shift to the drive gear you want.
5. Have the vehicle fixed as soon as you can.

Parking Over Things That Burn

Black-and-white illustration of a parked SUV parked in front of a garage, with debris and foliage on the ground (no text or symbols visible)

CAUTION:

Things that can burn could touch hot exhaust parts under your vehicle and ignite. Don't park over papers, leaves, dry grass or other things that can burn.

Engine Exhaust

CAUTION:

Engine exhaust can kill. It contains the gas carbon monoxide (CO), which you can't see or smell. It can cause unconsciousness and death.

You might have exhaust coming in if:

• Your exhaust system sounds strange or different.
• Your vehicle gets rusty underneath.
• Your vehicle was damaged in a collision.
• Your vehicle was damaged when driving over high points on the road or over road debris.
• Repairs weren't done correctly.
• Your vehicle or exhaust system had been modified improperly.

If you ever suspect exhaust is coming into your vehicle:

• Drive it only with all the windows down to blow out any CO; and
  ● Have your vehicle fixed immediately.

Running Your Engine While You're Parked

It's better not to park with the engine running. But if you ever have to, here are some things to know.

CAUTION:

Idling the engine with the air system control off could allow dangerous exhaust into your vehicle (see the earlier Caution under “Engine Exhaust”).

Also, idling in a closed-in place can let deadly carbon monoxide (CO) into your vehicle even if the fan switch is at the highest setting. One place this can happen is a garage. Exhaust -- with CO -- can come in easily. NEVER park in a garage with the engine running.

Another closed-in place can be a blizzard. (See "Blizzard" in the Index.)

CAUTION:

It can be dangerous to get out of your vehicle if the shift lever is not fully in PARK (P) with the parking brake firmly set. Your vehicle can roll. Don't leave your vehicle when the engine is running unless you have to. If you've left the engine running, the vehicle can move suddenly. You or others could be injured. To be sure your vehicle won't move, even when you're on fairly level ground, always set your parking brake and move the shift lever to PARK (P).

Follow the proper steps to be sure your vehicle won't move. See "Shifting Into PARK (P)" in the Index.

If you're pulling a trailer, see "Towing a Trailer" in the Index.

Locks and Lighting Choices

Your Pontiac's locks and lighting systems can be programmed with several different features. The features you can program depend on the options that came with your vehicle. The following chart shows the features that can be programmed and which options you need to have to program them.

Feature
Number of Chimes Sounded	Delayed Illumina-tion/Exit Lighting	Automatic Door Locks	Last Door Closed Locking/ Lockout Deterrent	Remote Driver's Door Unlock Control	Remote Lock/ Unlock Confirma-tion	Content Theft
1	X	X
2	X	X	X
3	X	X	X	X
4	X	X	X	X	X	X

To program features, your vehicle must be in the programming mode. Follow these steps:

1. The Content Theft Deterrent system (if equipped) must be disarmed.
2. Remove the BCM PRGRM fuse from the instrument panel fuse block, located to the right of the glove box.
3. Turn the ignition switch to ACCESSORY.
4. You will hear two to four chimes, depending upon the features that you have.

You can now program your choices.

Leaving Programming Mode

To get out of programming mode, just turn the key from the ACCESSORY position to OFF and put the BCM PRGRM fuse back into the instrument panel fuse block.

Delayed Illumination and Exit Lighting

Your vehicle comes with this feature set in Mode 4. This means that:

● The interior lamps will stay on for a while after all the doors and the liftgate are closed.
● The interior lamps will come on and stay on for a while whenever you remove the key from the ignition.

To change the factory setting, while in programming mode, do the following:

1. Turn the interior lamps dial all the way to the right and then back slightly to the left.
2. Count the number of chimes you hear. The number of chimes tells you which mode your vehicle is set for. You change the mode by turning the interior lamps dial all the way to the right and then back slightly to the left.
3. Repeat Step 2 until you hear the number of chimes that matches the mode you want.

Mode 1: Both Off (The interior lamps will turn on or off at the same instant that a door is opened or closed).

Mode 2: Delayed Illumination Only (The interior lamps will stay on for about 25 seconds after all the doors and liftgate are closed, or until you lock the doors.)

Mode 3: Exit Lighting Only (The interior lamps will come on whenever you remove the key from the ignition and stay on for about 25 seconds, or until you lock the doors.)

Mode 4: Both On (This combines modes 2 and 3).

Automatic Door Locks

Your vehicle comes with this feature set in Mode 3. This means that:

● All doors will automatically lock when you shift out of PARK (P).
- All doors will automatically unlock when the ignition is turned to OFF.

To change the factory setting, while in programming mode, do the following:

1. Press LOCK on the power door lock switch.

2. Count the number of chimes you hear. The number of chimes tells you which mode your vehicle is set for. You change the mode by pressing LOCK again.

3. Repeat Step 2 until you hear the number of chimes that matches the mode you want.

Mode 1: Off (Automatic door locking and unlocking is disabled. You will always need to lock you doors manually before driving to increase occupant safety.)

Mode 2: Automatic Locking Only

● Automatic Door Unlocking: Off
- Automatic Door Locking: Shift out of PARK (P) with the ignition on and the driver's door closed, and all doors will lock automatically.

Mode 3: Automatic Unlocking With Ignition Off

● Automatic Door Unlocking: Turn off the ignition with the transaxle in PARK (P) and all doors will unlock automatically.
- Automatic Door Locking: Shift out of PARK (P) with the ignition on and the driver's door closed, and all doors will lock automatically.

Mode 4: Automatic Unlocking With Transaxle in PARK (P)

● Automatic Door Unlocking: Shift into PARK (P) with the ignition on and all doors will unlock automatically.
- Automatic Door Locking: Shift out of PARK (P) with the ignition on and the driver's door closed, and all doors will lock automatically.

Last Door Closed Locking and Lockout Deterrent

Your vehicle comes with this feature set in Mode 4. This means that:

• If you leave your key in the ignition and leave the driver's door open, you won't be able to lock the doors using the power door lock switch.
• When you press LOCK on the power locks switch or key chain transmitter (if equipped) while any door or the liftgate is open, the doors will not lock. Instead you will hear three chimes which let you know that Last Door Closed Locking is in operation. Five seconds after all the doors and liftgate are closed, all the doors and liftgate will lock.

To change the factory setting, while in programming mode, do the following:

1. Press UNLOCK on the power door lock switch.
2. Count the number of chimes you hear. The number of chimes tells you which mode your vehicle is set for. You change the mode by pressing UNLOCK again.
3. Repeat Step 2 until you hear the number of chimes that matches the mode you want.

Mode 1: Both Off (Doors will always lock immediately when you press LOCK on the the power door lock switch or the key chain transmitter, if equipped).

Mode 2: Lockout Deterrent Only (If you leave your key in the ignition with the driver's door open, you won't be able to lock the doors with the power door locks).

Mode 3: Last Door Closed Locking Only (If the power door lock switch or key chain transmitter (if equipped) is used to lock the vehicle while any door or the liftgate is open, you will hear three chimes. The doors will not lock. Five seconds after the last door is closed, all doors and liftgate will lock).

Mode 4: Both On (This combines modes 2 and 3).

Remote Driver's Unlock Control

Your vehicle comes with this feature set in Mode 2. This means that:

• When you press UNLOCK on your Remote Keyless Entry transmitter, the driver's door will unlock.
• When you press UNLOCK on your Remote Keyless Entry transmitter again, all doors and the liftgate will unlock.

To change the factory setting, while in the programming mode, do the following:

1. Press UNLOCK on the key chain transmitter.
2. Count the number of chimes you hear. The number of chimes tells you which mode your vehicle is set for. You change the mode by pressing UNLOCK again.
3. Repeat Step 2 until you hear the number of chimes that matches the mode you want.

Mode 1: Remote All Doors Unlock (When you press UNLOCK on your key chain transmitter, all doors and the liftgate will unlock).

Mode 2: Remote Driver's Door Unlock Only (When you press UNLOCK on your key chain transmitter once, the driver's door will unlock. When you press UNLOCK on your key chain transmitter again, within five seconds, all doors and the liftgate will unlock.)

Remote Lock and Unlock Confirmation

Your vehicle comes with this feature set in Mode 4. This means that:

• When you use the Remote Keyless Entry transmitter to lock your vehicle, your park lamps will flash briefly to let you know the command has been received. If you press LOCK on the key chain transmitter again, the horn will sound briefly and the park lamps will flash briefly to let you know your vehicle is locked.
• When you use the key chain transmitter to unlock your vehicle or operate your power sliding door (if equipped), your park lamps will flash briefly.

To change the factory setting, while in programming mode, do the following:

1. Press the LOCK button on the key chain transmitter.
2. Count the number of chimes you hear. The number of chimes tells you which mode your vehicle is set for. You change the mode by pressing the LOCK button again.
3. Repeat Step 2 until you hear the number of chimes that matches the mode you want.

Mode 1: Off (Remote lock and unlock confirmation are disabled.)

Mode 2: Remote Lock Confirmation with Exterior Lamps Flashing Only

• Remote Lock Confirmation: When you use the key chain transmitter to lock your vehicle, your park lamps will flash briefly to let you know the command has been received.
• Remote Unlock Confirmation: When you use the key chain transmitter to unlock your vehicle or operate your power sliding door (if equipped), your park lamps will flash briefly to let you know the command has been received.

Mode 3: Remote Lock Confirmation with Exterior Lamps Flashing and Horn Sounding

- Remote Lock Confirmation: When you use the key chain transmitter to lock your vehicle, the horn will sound briefly and your park lamps will flash briefly to let you know the command has been received.

- Remote Unlock Confirmation: When you use the key chain transmitter to unlock your vehicle or operate your power sliding door (if equipped), your park lamps will flash briefly to let you know the command has been received.

Mode 4: Remote Lock Confirmation with Exterior Lamps Flashing and Horn Sounding (On Second LOCK Press)

- Remote Lock Confirmation: When you use the key chain transmitter to lock your vehicle, your park lamps will flash briefly to let you know the command has been received. The horn will sound briefly and your park lamps will flash briefly if you press the LOCK button again within five seconds.

- Remote Unlock Confirmation: When you use the key chain transmitter to unlock your vehicle or operate your power sliding door (if equipped), your park lamps will flash briefly to let you know the command has been received.

Content Theft

Your vehicle comes with this feature set in Mode 4. This means that:

- If anyone damages or enters your vehicle while your Content Theft Deterrent system is armed, an alarm will sound and your park lamps will flash for two minutes if anyone tries to damage or enter your vehicle.

To change the factory setting, while in the programming mode, do the following:

1. Turn the park lamps on, then off.
2. Count the number of chimes you hear. The number of chimes tells you which mode your vehicle is set for. You change the mode by turning the park lamps on, then off again.
3. Repeat Step 2 until you hear the number of chimes that matches the mode you want.

Mode 1: Damage Detection with Reduced Sensitivity (If anyone seriously damages your vehicle or opens a door or the liftgate while your Content Theft Deterrent system is armed, an alarm will sound and your park lamps will flash for up to two minutes.)

Mode 2: Damage Detection Off (If anyone opens a door or the liftgate while your Content Theft Deterrent system is armed, an alarm will sound and your park lamps will flash for up to two minutes.)

Mode 3: Off (Your content theft system is always disarmed.)

Mode 4: Damage Detection with Normal Sensitivity (If anyone damages or enters your vehicle while your Content Theft Deterrent system is armed, an alarm will sound and your park lamps will flash for up to two minutes.)

Content Theft Deterrent Arming and Disarming

Your vehicle comes with this feature set in Mode 3. This means that:

• Your Content Theft Deterrent system will arm when you lock the doors using either power door lock switch while any door or the liftgate is open and the key is removed from the ignition.
• Your Content Theft Deterrent system will arm when you lock the doors with your key or key chain transmitter and the key is removed from the ignition.
• Your Content Theft Deterrent system will disarm when you unlock the doors with your key or key chain transmitter.

To change the factory setting, while in the programming mode, do the following:

1. Insert your second key fully into any door key cylinder and turn it to the unlock position. This step is inconvenient, but necessary to prevent accidental programming of this feature to Mode 2. Do not program this feature to Mode 2 without first reading the special note contained in the description for that mode. The door key cylinder must remain in the unlock position during Steps 2-4.

2. Press the horn symbol on the key chain transmitter.

3. Count the number of chimes you hear. The number of chimes tells you which mode your vehicle is set for. You change the mode by pressing the horn symbol on the key chain transmitter again.
4. Repeat Step 3 until you hear the number of chimes that matches the mode you want.
5. Remove your key from the door key cylinder.

Mode 1: Power Door Lock Switch Arming Off

• Your Content Theft Deterrent system will arm when you lock the doors with your key or key chain transmitter. The key must be removed from the ignition when you lock the doors or the Content Theft Deterrent system will not arm.
• Your Content Theft Deterrent system will disarm when you unlock the doors with your key or key chain transmitter.

Mode 2: Key Chain Transmitter Arm/Disarm Only

• Your Content Theft Deterrent system will arm when you lock the doors with your key chain transmitter. The key must be removed from the ignition when you lock the doors or the Content Theft Deterrent system will not arm.
• Your Content Theft Deterrent system will disarm when you unlock the doors with your key chain transmitter.

Special Note: While this mode provides increased security, it can be a problem if your key chain transmitter is damaged, lost or if it fails to operate for any reason while the Content Theft Deterrent system is armed. The Content Theft Deterrent system must be disarmed for the engine to run while in Mode 2; your key can no longer disarm the system.

Mode 3: Standard Arming and Disarming

- Your Content Theft Deterrent system will arm when you lock the doors using either power door lock switch while any door or the liftgate is open and the key is removed from the ignition.

• Your Content Theft Deterrent system will arm when you lock the doors with your key or key chain transmitter and the key is removed from the ignition.
• Your Content Theft Deterrent system will disarm when you unlock the doors with your key or key chain transmitter.

Leaving Programming Mode

To get out of programming mode, just turn the key from the ACCESSORY ignition position to OFF and put the BCM PRGRM fuse back into the instrument panel fuse block.

Windows

Manual Windows

Use the manual crank to open and close the front windows.

Power Windows (Option)

If you have power windows, the switches on the driver's door armrest control the front windows (when the ignition is on). The left switch controls the driver's window. The right switch controls the passenger's window.

The driver's power window switch has two down positions. Push the switch to the first position to lower the window normally.

To activate the auto-down feature, push the switch all the way down, then release. The window will lower completely. To stop the window from lowering all the way, pull up the front of the switch.

To raise the window, pull up the front of the switch.

Side Window Latches

The rear of the side windows swings open.

Close-up of a hand holding a black mechanical component (no visible text or symbols)

To open, pull the latch forward to release it, then swing the window outward. Press the center of the latch to secure the window in the open position.

To close, pull the center of the latch forward and then close the latch. Press the center of the latch to secure the window in the closed position.

Power Rear Quarter Windows

Line drawing of a server tower with a car icon on the front panel (no text or symbols)

This button, located in the Overhead Console switchbank, is used for opening and closing the rear quarter windows.

Press the top ribbed side of the button to open the windows; both windows will open. The windows can be opened fully or only a portion depending on how long the button is pushed.

Press the bottom symbol side of the button to close both windows.

Horn

You can sound the horn by pressing the horn symbols on your steering wheel.

Tilt Steering Wheel

A tilt steering wheel allows you to adjust the steering wheel before you drive. You can also raise it to the highest level to give your legs more room when you exit and enter the vehicle.

Close-up of a gloved hand pressing a button on a vehicle (no visible text or symbols)

To tilt the wheel, hold the steering wheel and pull the lever. Move the steering wheel to a comfortable level, then release the lever to lock the wheel in place.

Turn Signal/Multifunction Lever

The lever on the left side of the steering column includes your:

• Turn Signal and Lane Change Indicator,
  • Headlamp High/Low Beam Changer,
  ● Windshield Wiper and Washer Control and
  • Cruise Control (Option).

Turn Signal and Lane Change Indicator

The turn signal has two upward (for right) and two downward (for left) positions. These positions allow you to signal a turn or a lane change.

To signal a turn, move the lever all the way up or down. When the turn is finished, the lever will return automatically.

Two black arrows pointing in opposite directions on a white background (no text or symbols)

An arrow on the instrument panel will flash in the direction of the turn or lane change.

To signal a lane change, just raise or lower the lever until the arrow starts to flash. Hold it there until you complete your lane change. The lever will return by itself when you release it.

As you signal a turn or a lane change, if the arrow flashes faster than normal, a signal bulb may be burned out and other drivers won't see your turn signal.

If a bulb is burned out, replace it to help avoid an accident. If the arrows don't go on at all when you signal a turn, check for burned-out bulbs and check the fuse (see "Fuses and Circuit Breakers" in the Index).

If you have a trailer towing option with added wiring for the trailer lamps, the signal indicator will flash at a normal rate even if a turn signal bulb is burned out. Check the front and rear turn signal lamps regularly to make sure they are working.

Turn Signal Reminder Chime

If either turn signal is left on for more than 3/4 of a mile, a chime will sound to let the driver know to turn it off.

If you need to leave the signal on for more than 3/4 of a mile, turn off the signal and then turn it back on.

Headlamp High/Low Beam Changer

To change the headlamps from high to low beam, or low to high, simply pull the turn signal lever all the way toward you. Then release it.

Simple line drawing of a light bulb with three rays (no text or symbols)

When the high beams are on, this light on the instrument cluster will also be on.

Windshield Wipers

You control the windshield wipers by turning the band marked WIPER.

For a single wiper cycle: Turn the band to MIST. Hold it there until the wipers start, then let go. The wipers will stop after one cycle. If you want more cycles, hold the band on mist longer.

For delayed wiper cycles: You can set the wiper speed for a long or short delay between wipes. This can be very useful in light rain or snow. Turn the band to choose the delay time. The closer to LOW, the shorter the delay time.

For steady wiper cycles: For steady wiping at low speed, turn the band away from you to the LOW position. For high-speed wiping, turn the band further to HIGH. To stop the wipers, move the band to OFF.

Remember that damaged wiper blades may prevent you from seeing well enough to drive safely. To avoid damage, be sure to clear ice and snow from the wiper blades before using them. If they're frozen to the windshield, carefully loosen or thaw them. If your blades do become damaged, get new blades or blade inserts.

Heavy snow or ice can overload your wipers. A circuit breaker will stop them until the motor cools. Clear away snow or ice to prevent an overload.

Windshield Washer

To wash your windshield, press and hold the windshield washer paddle. The washers and wipers will operate. When you release the paddle, the washers will stop, and the wipers will continue to operate for two cycles, unless your wipers had already been on. In that case, the wipers will resume the wiper speed you had selected earlier.

CAUTION:

In freezing weather, don't use your washer until the windshield is warmed. Otherwise the washer fluid can form ice on the windshield, blocking your vision.

Driving without washer fluid can be dangerous. A bad mud splash can block your vision. You could hit another vehicle or go off the road. Check your washer fluid level often.

Rear Window Wiper and Washer

Pure electrical circuit lines without any symbols

The rear window wiper switch is located in the Instrument Panel switchbank.

Push the wiper symbol on the bottom of the button to turn on the intermittent wiper. To turn off the wiper, gently push the top of the button.

To wash and wipe the rear window, push in the washer symbol on the top of the button. Washer fluid will spray as long as the button is held in. When the top of the button is released, the wiper will continue to cycle three more times.

To wash the rear window when the rear wiper is already on, push on the top of the button with the wash symbol on it. Push in the bottom of the button to continue the intermittent wiper cycle after the washing cycle is completed.

Cruise Control (Option)

With cruise control, you can maintain a speed of about 25 mph (40 km/h) or more without keeping your foot on the accelerator. This can really help on long trips.

Cruise control does not work at speeds below about 25 mph (40 km/h).

When you apply your brakes, the cruise control shuts off.

CAUTION:

• Cruise control can be dangerous where you can't drive safely at a steady speed. So, don't use your cruise control on winding roads or in heavy traffic.
• Cruise control can be dangerous on slippery roads. On such roads, fast changes in tire traction can cause needless wheel spinning, and you could lose control. Don't use cruise control on slippery roads.

If your vehicle is in cruise control when the optional traction control system begins to limit wheel spin, the cruise control will automatically disengage. (See "Traction Control System" in the Index.) When road conditions allow you to safely use it again, you may turn the cruise control back on.

Setting Cruise Control

CAUTION:

If you leave your cruise control switch on when you're not using cruise, you might hit a button and go into cruise when you don't want to. You could be startled and even lose control. Keep the cruise control switch OFF until you want to use it.

1. Move the cruise control switch to ON.
2. Get up to the speed you want.

1. Push in the SET button at the end of the lever and release it.
2. Take your foot off the accelerator pedal.

Resuming a Set Speed

Suppose you set your cruise control at a desired speed and then you apply the brake. This, of course, shuts off the cruise control. But you don't need to reset it. Once you're going about 25 mph (40 km/h) or more, you can move the cruise control switch from ON to RESUME/ACCEL (R/A) for about half a second.

You'll go right back up to your chosen speed and stay there.

Use the SET button to reset cruise (see "Setting Cruise Control" earlier in this section).

If you hold the switch at R/A longer than half a second, the vehicle will keep going faster until you release the switch or apply the brake. So unless you want to go faster, don't hold the switch at R/A.

Increasing Speed While Using Cruise Control

There are two ways to go to a higher speed:

• Use the accelerator pedal to get to the higher speed. Push the SET button at the end of the lever, then release the button and the accelerator pedal. You'll now cruise at the higher speed.
• Move the cruise switch from ON to R/A. Hold it there until you get up to the speed you want, and then release the switch. (To increase your speed in very small amounts, move the switch to R/A for less than half a second and then release it. Each time you do this, your vehicle will go about 1 mph (1.6 km/h) faster.)

The accelerate feature will work whether or not you have set an initial cruise control speed.

Reducing Speed While Using Cruise Control

● Push in the SET button at the end of the lever until you reach the lower speed you want, then release it.
- To slow down in very small amounts, push the button for less than half a second. Each time you do this, you'll go 1 mph (1.6 km/h) slower.

Passing Another Vehicle While Using Cruise Control

Use the accelerator pedal to increase your speed. When you take your foot off the pedal, your vehicle will slow down to the cruise control speed you set earlier.

Using Cruise Control on Hills

How well your cruise control will work on hills depends upon your speed, load and the steepness of the hills. When going up steep hills, you may have to step on the accelerator pedal to maintain your speed. When going downhill, you may have to brake or shift to a lower gear to keep your speed down. Of course, applying the brake takes you out of cruise control. Many drivers find this to be too much trouble and don't use cruise control on steep hills.

Ending Cruise Control

There are two ways to turn off the cruise control:

• Step lightly on the brake pedal; OR
• Move the cruise switch to OFF.

Erasing Speed Memory

When you turn off the cruise control or the ignition, your cruise control set speed memory is erased.

Exterior Lamps

Simple line drawing of a solar panel with sun, wind, and battery symbols (no text or labels)

≡00: Turning the dial to this setting turns on:

• Parking Lamps,
• Sidemarker Lamps,
• Taillamps and
• Instrument Panel Lights.

≡D : Turning the dial to this setting turns on the headlamps, together with:

• Parking Lamps,
• Sidemarker Lamps,
• Taillamps and
• Instrument Panel Lights.

○ : Turning the dial to this setting turns off all the lights.

Lamps On Reminder

If the driver's door is opened and you turn the ignition to the OFF or LOCK position while leaving the lamps on, you will hear a warning chime.

Daytime Running Lamps/Automatic Headlamp Control (If Equipped)

Daytime Running Lamps (DRL) can make it easier for others to see the front of your vehicle during the day. DRL can be helpful in many different driving conditions, but they can be especially helpful in the short periods after dawn and before sunset.

A light sensor on top of the instrument panel makes the DRL work, so be sure it isn't covered. The DRL system will make your front park/turn signal lamps come on in daylight when:

• The ignition is on,
• the headlamp switch is off, and
• the parking brake is released.

When the DRL are on, only your front park/turn signal lamps will be on. Your instrument panel won't be lit up.

When it's dark enough outside, the exterior lamps will come on automatically. When it's bright enough outside, the exterior lamps will go out and the DRL will turn on. Of course, you may still turn on the headlamps any time you need to.

To idle your vehicle with the DRL or exterior lamps off, set the parking brake while the ignition is in the OFF or LOCK position. Then start the vehicle. The DRL will stay off until you release the parking brake.

As with any vehicle, you should turn on the regular headlamp system when you need it.

Fog Lamps

The fog lamps switch is located in the Instrument Panel switchbank.

Push the fog lamp symbol on the rocker button to turn on the lights.

The green indicator light will glow. Push the ribbed part of the switch to turn them off. The indicator light will go off.

Your parking lamps or headlamps must be on for your fog lamps to go on.

When your DRL are on, the headlamps switch must first be turned from the off position before the fog lamps can be turned on. At night, when the DRL automatically turns on your headlamps, the fog lamps can be turned on when the headlamps switch is in any position.

Your fog lamps will go off when you switch to highbeams. Using your highbeams in fog is not recommended.

Interior Lamps

Battery Saver

Your vehicle has a feature to help prevent you from draining the battery, in case you accidentally leave the interior or underhood lamps on. If you leave any of these lamps on while the ignition is in the LOCK or OFF position, they will automatically turn off after 10 minutes. The lamps won't come back on again until you:

• turn the ignition to the RUN or ACCESSORY position,
  ● turn the interior lamps dial all the way to the right, then slightly back to the left; or
• open (or close and reopen) a door that is closed.

Note that if your vehicle has less than 15 miles (25 km) on the odometer, the battery saver will turn off the lamps after only three minutes.

Instrument Panel Intensity Control

Turn the lights control, located below the headlamps switch, to the right to increase the brightness of the instrument panel lights, and to the left to decrease the brightness. Turn the control all the way to the left to turn them off.

Interior Lamps Control

Turn the dial all the way to the right to turn on the interior lamps, if the interior lamps override switch is off. Turn the dial to the left to turn the lights off.

Interior Lamps Override Switch

Simple line drawing of two rectangular compartments with circular symbols, no text or labels present

This switch is located in the overhead console switchbank. Press the symbol on the bottom of the rocker switch to override control of the interior lights and turn off power to the courtesy lamps, reading lamps, and glove box lamp.

Press the top of the interior lamps override rocker switch to turn power back on to the interior lamps. This will allow the lamps to stay on when any door is open.

Illuminated Entry

With illuminated entry, the interior of your vehicle is illuminated so you can see inside before you enter your vehicle. The lamps will come on for 40 seconds if you unlock your door using your key or the Remote Keyless Entry key chain transmitter (if equipped) and the ignition is in the LOCK or OFF position. After 40 seconds have passed, the interior lamps will slowly fade out. The lamps will turn off before the 40 seconds if you:

• lock all the doors using the key,
• press LOCK on the power door lock switch or
• press LOCK on the key chain transmitter (if equipped).

When any door is opened, illuminated entry is cancelled. The interior lamps will stay on while any door or the liftgate is open, and slowly fade out when all doors and the liftgate are closed.

The interior lamps may stay on for up to 25 seconds after all doors have been closed if they have not been locked. See “Delayed Illumination” later in this section.

Delayed Illumination

The delayed illumination feature will continue to illuminate the interior for 25 seconds after all doors have been closed so that you can find your ignition and buckle your seatbelt at night. Delayed illumination will not occur while the ignition is in the RUN or ACCESSORY position. After 25 seconds have passed, the interior lamps will slowly fade out. The lights will fade out before the 25 seconds have passed if you:

● turn the ignition to the RUN or ACCESSORY position,
- lock all doors using the key chain transmitter (if equipped) or
- lock all the doors using the power door lock switch or the key.

To turn the Delayed Illumination feature off or on, see "Locks and Lighting Choices" in the Index.

Exit Lighting

With exit lighting, the interior lamps will come on for about 25 seconds whenever you remove the key from the ignition switch. If you turn the ignition switch to RUN or ACCESSORY, the lamps will fade out. The lamps will also fade out if you lock the doors with the power door lock switch or the key chain transmitter (if equipped).

When any door is opened, exit lighting is cancelled. The interior lamps will stay on while any door or liftgate is open, and slowly fade out when all doors and the liftgate are closed.

The interior lamps may stay on for up to 25 seconds after all doors have been closed if they have not been locked, see "Delayed Illumination" earlier in this section.

To turn the Exit Lighting feature off or on, see "Locks and Lighting Choices" in the Index.

Center Dome Lamp

Close-up of a white rectangular object with a mesh pattern, possibly a vent or cover (no text or symbols visible)

This lamp is located in the center of your vehicle and has no switch of its own. It will go on each time you open the doors, unless you enable the interior lights override.

Rear Cargo Lamp

Top-down view of a transparent plastic tray with internal grid pattern (no text or symbols)

This lamp is located in the rear of your vehicle, above the liftgate opening, and has no switch of its own. It will go on each time you open the doors, unless you enable the interior lights override.

Rear Reading Lamps

Close-up of a small electronic device with a transparent handle and internal components, mounted on a wooden surface (no visible text or symbols)

There are two reading lamps in the third row headliner, above the outboard seating positions. If your vehicle does not have dual sliding doors, there is also a reading lamp in the second row on the left side.

To turn on or off either reading lamp, press the lamp lens.

Front Reading Lamps

Close-up of a car's front panel with black buttons and glossy surface (no visible text or symbols)

There are two reading lamps in the overhead console.

To turn on either reading lamp, press the lens of the lamp. To turn off the lamp, press the lens again.

Mirrors

Inside Day/Night Rearview Mirror

Illustration of a hand pressing down on a textured surface with a circular object above (no text or symbols)

To reduce glare from lights behind you, pull the lever toward you (to the night position). To return the mirror to the day position, push the lever away from you.

Power Remote Control Mirrors

Close-up of a metallic mechanical component with a circular base and central hub (no visible text or symbols)

The control on the driver's door controls both outside rearview mirrors.
Turn the control to the left to select the driver's side rearview mirror, or to the right to select the passenger's side rearview mirror. Then use the control to adjust each mirror so that you can just see the side of your vehicle when you are sitting in a comfortable driving position.

If you are not adjusting either mirror, leave the control in the center off position. This prevents moving the mirrors accidentally once you have them adjusted.

Both outside mirrors can be folded forward or rearward. In the rearward position, they will fold almost flush with the vehicle. This feature is particularly useful in automatic car washes and when maneuvering your vehicle in narrow spaces.

Your mirrors have a blue tint to reduce glare while driving at night.

Convex Outside Mirror

Your passenger's side mirror is convex. A convex mirror's surface is curved so you can see more from the driver's seat.

CAUTION:

A convex mirror can make things (like other vehicles) look farther away than they really are. If you cut too sharply into the right lane, you could hit a vehicle on your right. Check your inside mirror or glance over your shoulder before changing lanes.

Storage Compartments

Your Trans Sport's large carrying capacity can store many items. If you have the extended wheelbase version, you can carry things as large as a 4' x 8' piece of plywood. You can also use the floor pins that are used to attach the seats, to secure larger loads. This section also describes storage areas for specific items like sunglasses and cups.

Glove Box

Your vehicle has a glove box below the instrument panel. To open the glove box, lift the latch release. Use the key to lock or unlock the glove box.

Technical line drawing of a mechanical assembly with no visible text or symbols

The glove box door has a detent to prevent the door from lowering too far. Open the glove box until the door is partway open, then pull the door down if you need it fully open. To close the glove box, the door must be pushed up past the detent.

In the door of the glove box, you will find a tissue pack holder and clip for a pen or pencil.

Compact Overhead Console

Close-up of a white airplane cabin interior with a closed door and control panel (no text or symbols visible)

The front overhead console includes two reading lamps, a storage compartment and a switchbank.

To turn either reading lamp on or off, press the lamp lens.

The switchbank has switches for the Optional Power Sliding Door, Power Sliding Door Enable, Interior Lights Override, Power Quarter Windows and the Power Sunroof.

Overhead Console, If Equipped

Line drawing of a car interior compartment showing dashboard, seat, and dashboard controls (no text or symbols)

The optional front overhead console has reading lamps, a switchbank, storage compartments, including one for your garage door opener and one for your sunglasses, and a Driver Information Center (DIC). The features of the optional overhead console are explained on the following pages.

The switchbank has switches for the Optional Power Sliding Door, Interior Lights Override, Power Quarter Windows and the Power Sunroof.

Reading Lamps

To turn on or off either reading lamp, press the lamp lens.

Garage Door Opener Compartment

You can store your garage door opener in the rear compartment of your overhead console, and operate it from this position. To install your garage door opener, follow these instructions:

1. Open the compartment by pressing the latch forward. Remove the piece of self-sticking Velcro ^® .

2. Peel the protective backing from the Velcro and press it firmly to the back of your garage door opener.

Cross-sectional diagram of a mechanical assembly with no visible text or symbols

1. Line up the button of the garage door opener with one of the four buttons on the compartment door. Make sure the garage door opener button is facing down and press the opener firmly into place.
2. Once the opener is installed, use the black pegs inside the compartment door to make sure the lined area on the compartment door will contact the control button on your garage door opener when pressed.

Technical line drawing of a mechanical assembly with no visible text or symbols

1. Add one peg at a time until your garage door opener operates with the compartment door closed when you press the button.

Sunglasses Storage Compartment

Line drawing of a car seatbelt buckle and seatbelt (no text or symbols)

To open the sunglasses storage compartment in the overhead console, press the release button. Then pull the compartment down to the full open position.

Driver Information Center

The DIC will show information about the vehicle and the surroundings.
- English/Metric Button (E/M) - You can change the display to a metric or English reading at any time by pressing E/M.

- Mode Button (MODE) - Press this button to cycle through three modes of operation -- Off, Compass/Temperature mode and Trip Computer mode.

In the Trip Computer mode, pressing the MODE button cycles through the five displays. Press the MODE button after the last Trip Computer display to return the DIC to the OFF mode.

Off- No driver information is displayed in this mode of operation.

Temperature/Compass Mode- One of eight compass readings and the outside temperature are displayed. If the temperature is below 38^ F ( 3^ C), the temperature reading will toggle between displaying the outside temperature and the word “ICE” for two minutes.

Compass Variance

Compass variance is the difference between magnetic north and geographic north. In some areas of the country, the difference is great enough to cause the compass to give false readings. If this occurs, the compass variance must be set.

Setting the Variance

Turn the ignition on and cycle the DIC to the Compass/Temperature mode. Press both the E/M and MODE buttons for approximately five seconds. The last entered variance zone number will be displayed. Press the E/M button until the proper variance number, as shown on the map, is showing. Press the MODE button to set the new variance zone and resume normal operation.

The display will show all the display segments for half a second to acknowledge the change in zone number.

Automatic Compass Calibration

The compass is self-calibrating which eliminates the need to manually set the compass. When the vehicle is new, the calibration process may not be complete. In these cases the calibration symbol, C, will be displayed where the compass reading is normally displayed.

To calibrate the compass: In an area free from large metal objects, make three 360° turns. The calibration symbol will turn off and the compass reading will be displayed.

Manual Compass Calibration

If the compass appears erratic and the calibration symbol does not appear, you must manually put the compass into the calibration mode.

Turn the ignition on and cycle the DIC to the Compass/Temperature mode. Press both the E/M and MODE buttons for at least 10 seconds until the calibration symbol appears. Release both buttons and complete three 360° turns in an area free from large metal objects. The calibration symbol will turn off and the compass reading will be displayed.

Trip Computer

There are five trip computer displays which may be stepped through by pushing the MODE button. The information will appear in the following order:

● Average Fuel Economy (AVG ECON) - This shows the average fuel economy since the last reset.
- Instantaneous Fuel Economy (INST ECON) - This shows fuel economy for the most recent second of driving.
- Trip Range (RANGE) - This shows the estimated distance that can be traveled with the remaining fuel. The fuel economy used to calculate range is based on the last few hours of driving.
- Trip Fuel Used (FUEL USED) - This shows the accumulated fuel used since the last reset.
● Average Speed (AVG SPEED) - This shows the average speed since the last reset.

Resetting the Trip Computer

Press and hold the MODE and E/M buttons for at least two seconds. The reset is acknowledged with the display showing all segments on for a period of half a second. A reset can only be done in AVG ECON, FUEL USED and AVG SPEED displays. Resetting affects all three displays regardless of what display you are in.

Error Displays

• An error of the vehicle's speed sensor or fuel sender will cause -E- to be displayed.
• In the absence of vehicle communications, a double dash, --, is displayed.

Cupholders

Close-up of a mechanical component with two circular cutouts and a rectangular housing (no visible text or symbols)

There are cupholders on the inboard side of the front passenger seat and the right side of the second row bench seat.

To use the cupholders, simply pull down the tray. Keep the trays up when not in use.

Your vehicle has storage compartments and cupholders on either side of the vehicle, next to the third row seats. The back of the seats have cupholders that can be used when the seatbacks are folded down.

Storage Bin

At the base of the center instrument panel console, there is a storage bin. To open the bin, lift the latch release and the door will fold down.

Inside the bin, you will find a tray that slides out. Slide the tray all the way toward the rear of the vehicle until the tray locks onto the plastic tabs at the end of the guide rails. The tray holds CDs or cassettes in the center area. You can also store cassettes in the left side area. The right side area can hold either the coinholder, which lifts out, or another cassette. The tray can be removed for cleaning or when you want to replace the selection of CDs or cassettes. Slide the tray back into the storage bin before closing the bin door. The tray can also be placed in the glove box for locked storage if desired.

Removing and Replacing the Tray

Technical line drawing of a mechanical device with internal components and labeled section A (no text or symbols beyond label)

To remove the tray, slide it almost all the way out. Don't let the tray lock over the plastic tabs at the end of the guide rails (A). Lift the tray out of the guide rails. The rubber mat under the tray also lifts out for cleaning. When the rubber mat is replaced, be sure the tabs at the back of the mat are seated in the slots at the back of the storage bin.

The dividers in the tray can be removed by squeezing the plastic tabs on the bottom of the dividers, while pulling up. Replace the dividers by sliding them down until the tabs click into place.

To replace the tray, line up the guides on the bottom of the tray with the guide rails in the storage bin door. Slide the tray back in.

Front Seat Storage Bin

Line drawing of a mechanical device with a handle and internal compartments (no text or symbols)

The storage bin is under the manual front passenger's seat. To open the bin, lift the handle and slide the drawer out.

Front Seat Storage Net

Close-up of a hand using a tool to wire meshing a car interior (no visible text or symbols)

There is a storage net that stretches between the front seats. Pull the hooks towards the passenger's seat and insert them into the holes next to the cupholder.

To store the net, lift the hooks up and out of the holes. The net does not detach from the driver's seat.

When not in use, we recommend that you unhook the net to extend its life and retain its elasticity.

Saddlebag (Option)

The optional saddlebag provides extra storage space. It is found in the rear of your vehicle. It is designed to be stored in the side convenience nets.

Rear Storage Compartments and Cupholders

Your Trans Sport has a storage compartment and cupholder on either side of the vehicle, next to the third row seat(s).

Convenience Net (Option)

Interior view of a vehicle showing a mesh fence and cargo bags (no visible text or symbols)

The optional convenience net is designed to help keep small loads, like grocery bags, from falling over during sharp turns or quick stops and starts. Install the convenience net at the rear of your vehicle, just inside the liftgate.

Close-up of a metal mesh net attached to a white wall, with no visible text or symbols.

Attach the upper loops to the posts on either side of the liftgate opening (the label on the net should be in the upper left-hand corner).

Attach the lower hooks to the metal rings on the floor.

Close-up of a mechanical component with textured surface and metallic clamping (no visible text or symbols)

The side of the convenience net closest to the front of the vehicle is higher than the side closest to the liftgate. Once you've loaded items into the net, stretch the higher side of the net up and over the top of the load to hold it firmly in place.

The convenience net has a maximum capacity of 100 lbs. (45 kg). It is not designed to holder larger, heavier loads. Store such loads on the floor of your vehicle, as far forward as you can.

When not in use, we recommend that you take down the convenience net to extend its life and retain its elasticity, and to keep the rear exit clear. Store the net in the pouch behind either front seat, in the optional saddlebag or in one of the side convenience nets.

Side Convenience Nets

The side convenience nets are designed to hold smaller items (about 8 lbs.) than the large convenience net. Attach the loops to the posts on the rear side panels, near the jack storage area.

Interior view of a vehicle showing a mesh net and car door (no visible text or symbols)

When not in use, we recommend that you take down the convenience nets to extend their life and retain their elasticity.

Luggage Carrier (Option)

CAUTION:

If you try to carry something on top of your vehicle that is longer or wider than the luggage carrier -- like paneling, plywood, a mattress, and so forth -- the wind can catch it as you drive along. This can cause you to lose control. What you are carrying could be violently torn off, and this could cause you or other drivers to have a collision, and of course damage your vehicle. You may be able to carry something like this inside. But, never carry something longer or wider than the luggage carrier on top of your vehicle.

Line drawing of a van with roof rack and no visible text or symbols

If you have the optional luggage carrier, you can load things on top of your vehicle. The luggage carrier has slats and side rails attached to the roof, as well as sliding crossrails and places to use for tying things down. These let you load some things on top of your vehicle, as long as they are not wider or longer than the luggage carrier.

Close-up of a mechanical conveyor belt system with rollers and a roller (no visible text or symbols)

NOTICE:

Loading cargo that weighs more than 150 lbs. (68 kg) on the luggage carrier may damage your vehicle.

When you carry cargo on the luggage carrier of a proper size and weight, put it on the slats, as far forward as you can. Then slide the crossrail up against the rear of the load, to help keep it from moving. You can then tie it down.

Don't exceed the maximum vehicle capacity when loading your vehicle. For more information on vehicle capacity and loading, see "Loading Your Vehicle" in the Index.

To prevent damage or loss of cargo as you're driving, check now and then to make sure the luggage carrier and cargo are still securely fastened.

Close-up of a mechanical component with a downward arrow indicating compression or disassembly (no text or symbols visible)

Your luggage carrier has release knobs set in the ends of each crossrail.

Turn the release knobs counterclockwise to unlock the crossrails. Slide the crossrails forward or back, as needed, to accommodate loads of varying size.

After repositioning the crossrails, be sure to tighten the release knobs by turning them clockwise. This will lock the crossrails in place.

Close-up of a mechanical component with a downward arrow indicating motion or force (no visible text or symbols)

Use the adjustable tiedown loops in the side rails to help secure large loads.

Reposition the tiedowns by turning them counterclockwise, then slide them along the side rail. Turn the tiedowns clockwise to tighten them in place.

Bumper strips on the luggage carrier crossrails help to ensure a quieter ride.

If you wish to attach the luggage tiedowns or other compatible bicycle or ski accessory racks to the crossrail, use the adjustable tapped plates under the bumper strips.

Close-up of a hand using a tool to adjust or install a mechanical component (no visible text or symbols)

Lift the end of the bumper strip with a flathead screw driver and cut off enough of the strip to access the tapped plates.

Close-up of a hand using a tool to cut or trim a metal sheet (no text or symbols visible)

After removing the tiedowns or other equipment, be sure to install the the piece of bumper strip that was cut.

Ashtray and Cigarette Lighter

The ashtray and cigarette lighter are located in the middle section of the instrument panel, below the switchbank. Pull out the drawer to use the ashtray.

To remove the ashtray for cleaning, grasp the edge of the ashtray with your fingertips and pull up and out, in a rocking motion.

To use the lighter, push it in all the way and let go. When it's ready, it will pop back by itself.

NOTICE:

Don't hold a cigarette lighter in with your hand while it is heating. If you do, it won't be able to back away from the heating element when it's ready. That can make it overheat, damaging the lighter and the heating element.

NOTICE:

Don't put papers and other things that burn into your ashtrays. If you do, cigarettes or other smoking materials could set them on fire, causing damage.

Side Ashtrays

To open the ashtray, press the left side and turn it open.

To remove the ashtray for cleaning, press the snuffer as you lift up the bottom of the ashtray.

Sun Visors

To block out glare, you can swing down the visors. You can also remove them from the center mount and swing them to the side.

Visor Vanity Mirrors

Diagram of a car interior showing dashboard, rearview mirror, and front view (no text or symbols)

Flip up the cover to expose the vanity mirror.

Illuminated Visor Vanity Mirrors (if Equipped)

Close-up of a car interior panel with a rectangular door and circular button (no visible text or symbols)

Flip up the cover to expose the vanity mirror. The lamps will come on when you open the cover.

Accessory Power Outlets

Close-up of a mechanical component with a white arrow pointing to a feature, no visible text or symbols

The rear power outlet is located in the rear compartment on the driver's side. To remove the cover, pull the tab on the cover and pull it off.

Close-up of a car interior showing dashboard and steering wheel (no visible text or symbols)

The front power outlet is located next to the ashtray and lighter. Pull the cover down to use the power outlet.

The power outlets can be used to plug in electrical equipment such as a cellular telephone, CB radio, etc. Follow the proper installation instructions that are included with any electrical equipment you install.

When not in use, always cover the rear outlet with the protective cap.

NOTICE:

When using the accessory power outlets:

- Maximum load of any electrical equipment should not exceed 20 amps.

- Be sure to turn off any electrical equipment when not in use. Leaving electrical equipment on for extended periods can drain your battery.

To replace the cover on the rear outlet, line up the tabs at the back of the cover and put the cover in place. Push down the tab to secure the cover.

Power Sunroof (Option)

The sunroof has a sun shade to let in light without opening the sunroof. Slide the shade back to open.

Line drawing of a server tower with a car icon on the front panel (no text or symbols)

The power sunroof button is on the far right of the overhead console switchbank. The sunroof has two positions, vent and full open.

Press and release the ribbed side of the rocker button to open the sunroof to the initial vent position. To open the sunroof from the initial position to the full open position, press and release the ribbed side of the rocker button a second time. This will automatically open the sunroof to the full open position. (The open cycle can be stopped anywhere in its travel by quickly pressing the ribbed side of the rocker button a third time.)

To fully close the sunroof press and hold the symbol side of the button until the sunroof slides back to a closed position. (The sunroof can be stopped in a partial closed position by releasing the symbol side of the rocker button any time during the close cycle.)

NOTICE:

The optional sunroof panel is not designed to be removed. It is made to open and close but to remain attached to the vehicle.

Air Inflator System (Option)

Your vehicle may be equipped with an air inflator. With it, you can inflate things like air mattresses and basketballs, and you can also use it to bring your tires up to the proper pressure.

The air inflator is located in the rear compartment on the driver's side. To remove the cover, pull the tab on the cover and pull it off.

Illustration of a medical device with a coiled tube and pressure gauge (no text or symbols)

The air inflator kit is stored in the glove box or in the rear saddlebag, if your vehicle has this option. It includes a 20-foot (6 m) hose with an air pressure gage and nozzle adapters.

CAUTION:

Inflating something too much can make it explode, and you or others could be injured. Be sure to read the inflator instructions, and inflate any object only to its recommended pressure.

Close-up of a mechanical component with a white arrow pointing to a specific part, no visible text or symbols.

To use your air inflator system, attach the appropriate nozzle adapter, if required, to the end of the hose that has the pressure gage. Then attach that end of the hose to the object you wish to inflate. Remove the protective cap covering the outlet. Attach the other end of the hose to the outlet. Press the ON switch. The ON switch will work even with the ignition off.

If the air inflator system does not turn on, the fuse may be blown or installed incorrectly. See "Fuses and Circuit Breakers" in the Index or see your dealer for service.

Your air inflator will automatically shut off after about 10 minutes. To reset, press the ON switch again.

Don't run your air inflator for longer than 30 minutes at one time. If you do, you may damage the system. After 30 minutes, wait at least 10 minutes before restarting the air inflator.

To turn off the inflator, press OFF and detach the hose, first from the inflated object, then from the outlet. Replace the protective cap. Place the inflator kit tools in the pouch, and store in the glove box.

To replace the cover, line up the tabs at the back of the cover and put it in place. Push down the tab to secure the cover.

The Instrument Panel -- Your Information System

Your instrument panel is designed to let you know at a glance how your vehicle is running. You'll know how fast you're going, how much fuel you're using, and many other things you'll need to drive safely and economically. Refer to the accompanying diagram of your instrument panel to locate the components listed below.

A. Side Vents
B. Front Vent
C. Turn Signal/Multifunction Lever
D. Hazard Warning Flashers Switch
E. Instrument Cluster
F. Center Vents
G. Audio System
H. Side Vents
I. Lamps Switch
J. Hood Release
K. Steering Wheel Touch Controls (Option)
L. Horn
M. Ignition Switch
O. Climate Controls
P. Rear Fan Controls
Q. Accessory Power Outlet
R. Storage Bin
S. Remote CD Player (Option)
T. Instrument Panel Switchbank
U. Lighter/Ashtray
V. Glove Box
W. Front Vents
X. Fuse Panel

N. Steering Wheel Touch Controls (Option)

Instrument Panel Cluster

Your cluster includes indicator warning lights and gages that are explained on the following pages.

Speedometer and Tamper Resistant Odometer

Your speedometer lets you see your speed in both miles per hour (mph) and kilometers per hour (km/h). Your odometer shows how far your vehicle has been driven, in either miles (used in the United States) or kilometers (used in Canada).

Your Pontiac has a tamper-resistant odometer. If you see silver lines between the numbers, you'll know that someone has probably tried to turn it back, so the numbers may not be true.

You may wonder what happens if your vehicle needs a new odometer installed. If the new one can be set to the mileage total of the old odometer, then that will be done. If it can't, then it's set at zero and a label must be put on the driver's door to show the old mileage reading when the new odometer was installed.

Trip Odometer

The trip odometer can tell you how far your vehicle has been driven since you last set it to zero. To set it to zero, push the reset button, which is located above and to the right of the temperature gage.

Tachometer

The tachometer displays the engine speed in revolutions per minute (rpm).

NOTICE:

Do not operate the engine with the tachometer in the red area, or engine damage may occur.

Warning Lights, Gages and Indicators

This part describes the warning lights and gages that may be on your vehicle. The pictures will help you locate them.

Warning lights and gages can signal that something is wrong before it becomes serious enough to cause an expensive repair or replacement. Paying attention to your warning lights and gages could also save you or others from injury.

Warning lights come on when there may be or is a problem with one of your vehicle's functions. As you will see in the details on the next few pages, some warning lights come on briefly when you start the engine just to let you know they're working. If you are familiar with this section, you should not be alarmed when this happens.

Gages can indicate when there may be or is a problem with one of your vehicle's functions. Often gages and warning lights work together to let you know when there's a problem with your vehicle.

When one of the warning lights comes on and stays on when you are driving, or when one of the gages shows there may be a problem, check the section that tells you what to do about it. Please follow this manual's advice. Waiting to do repairs can be costly -- and even dangerous. So please get to know your warning lights and gages. They're a big help.

Safety Belt Reminder Light

When the key is turned to RUN or START, a chime will come on for about eight seconds to remind people to fasten their safety belts, unless the driver's safety belt is already buckled.

Silhouette of a person sitting cross-legged with a diagonal stripe, no text or symbols present

The safety belt light will also come on and stay on until the driver's belt is buckled.

Air Bag Readiness Light

There is an air bag readiness light on the instrument panel, which shows the words AIR BAG. The system checks the air bag's electrical system for malfunctions. The light tells you if there is an electrical problem. The system check includes the air bag sensors, the air bag module, the wiring and the diagnostic module. For more information on the air bag system, see "Air Bag" in the Index.

Domestic

Simple black icon of a person running with a stick (no text or symbols)

Canadian

This light will come on when you start your engine, and it will flash for a few seconds. Then the light should go out. This means the system is ready.

If the air bag readiness light stays on after you start the engine or comes on when you are driving, your air bag system may not work properly. Have your vehicle serviced right away.

The air bag readiness light should flash for a few seconds when you turn the ignition key to RUN. If the light doesn't come on then, have it fixed so it will be ready to warn you if there is a problem.

Charging System Indicator Light

Simple diagram of a battery with two terminals and polarity indicators (no text or symbols)

The charging system light will come on when you turn on the ignition as a check to show you it is working. It will remain on as long as the engine is not running.

It should go out once the engine is running. If it stays on, or comes on while you are driving, you may have a problem with the charging system. It could indicate that you have problems with a generator drive belt, or another electrical problem. Have it checked right away. Driving while this light is on could drain your battery.

If you must drive a short distance with the light on, be certain to turn off all your accessories, such as the radio and air conditioner.

Brake System Warning Light

Your Pontiac's hydraulic brake system is divided into two parts. If one part isn't working, the other part can still work and stop you. For good braking, though, you need both parts working well.

If the warning light comes on, there could be a brake problem. Have your brake system inspected right away.

Domestic

Canadian

This light should come on briefly when you turn the ignition key to RUN. If it doesn't come on then, have it fixed so it will be ready to warn you if there's a problem.

If the light comes on while you are driving, pull off the road and stop carefully. You may notice that the pedal is harder to push. Or, the pedal may go closer to the floor. It may take longer to stop. If the light is still on, or if the anti-lock brake system warning light is flashing, have the vehicle towed for service. (See “Anti-Lock Brake System Warning Light” and “Towing Your Vehicle” in the Index.)

CAUTION:

Your brake system may not be working properly if the brake system warning light is on. Driving with the brake system warning light on can lead to an accident. If the light is still on or if the anti-lock brake system warning light is flashing after you've pulled off the road and stopped carefully, have the vehicle towed for service.

When the ignition is on, the brake system warning light will also come on when you set your parking brake. The light will stay on if your parking brake doesn't release fully. If it stays on after your parking brake is fully released, it means you have a brake problem.

Anti-Lock Brake System Warning Light

With the anti-lock brake system, this light will come on when you start your engine and it will stay on for three seconds. That's normal.

If the light flashes when you're driving, you don't have anti-lock brakes and there could be a problem with your regular brakes. Pull off the road and stop carefully. You may notice that the pedal is harder to push. Or, the pedal may go closer to the floor. It may take longer to stop. Have the vehicle towed for service. (See "Towing Your Vehicle" in the Index.)

CAUTION:

Your regular brake system may not be working properly if the anti-lock brake system warning light is flashing. Driving with the anti-lock brake system warning light flashing can lead to an accident. After you've pulled off the road and stopped carefully, have the vehicle towed for service.

If the anti-lock brake system warning light stays on longer than normal after you've started your engine, turn the ignition off. Or, if the light comes on and stays on when you're driving, stop as soon as possible and turn the ignition off. Then start the engine again to reset the system. If the light still stays on, or comes on again while you're driving, your Pontiac needs service. If the light is on but not flashing and the regular brake system warning light isn't on, you still have brakes, but you don't have anti-lock brakes.

The anti-lock brake system warning light should come on briefly when you turn the ignition key to RUN. If the light doesn't come on then, have it fixed so it will be ready to warn you if there is a problem.

Traction Control System Warning Light (Option)

This warning light should come on briefly as you start the engine. If the warning light doesn't come on then, have it fixed so it will be ready to warn you if there's a problem.

If it stays on, or comes on when you're driving, there may be a problem with your traction control system and your vehicle may need service. When this warning light is on, the system will not limit wheel spin. Adjust your driving accordingly.

The traction control system warning light may come on for the following reasons:

• If you turn the system off by pressing the traction control button located in the instrument panel switchbank, the warning light will come on and stay on. To turn the system back on, press the button again. The warning light should go off. (See "Traction Control System" in the Index for more information.)
• If there's a brake system problem that is specifically related to traction control, the traction control system will turn off and the warning light will come on. If your brakes begin to overheat, the traction control system will turn off and the warning light will come on until your brakes cool down.
• If the traction control system is affected by an engine-related problem, the system will turn off and the warning light will come on.

If the traction control system warning light comes on and stays on for an extended period of time when the system is turned on, your vehicle needs service.

Low Traction Light (Option)

LOW TRACTION

If your vehicle has the traction control system, there will be a LOW TRACTION light on the instrument panel.

When your anti-lock system is adjusting brake pressure to help avoid a braking skid, or when your traction control system is limiting wheel spin, the LOW

TRACTION light will come on. Slippery road conditions may exist if this light comes on, so adjust your driving accordingly. The light will come on and stay on for four seconds when your anti-lock system adjusts brake pressure for less than four seconds or when your traction control system limits wheel spin for less than four seconds. Otherwise, the light will go out as soon as the anti-lock system stops adjusting brake pressure or the traction control system stops limiting wheel spin.

The LOW TRACTION light also comes on briefly, as a bulb check, when the engine is started. If the light doesn't come on then, have it fixed so it will be there to tell you when the system is active.

Engine Coolant Temperature Gage

Domestic

Canadian

This gage shows the engine coolant temperature. If the gage pointer moves into the red area, your engine is too hot!

It means that your engine coolant has overheated. If you have been operating your vehicle under normal driving conditions, you should pull off the road, stop your vehicle and turn off the engine as soon as possible.

In "Problems on the Road," this manual shows what to do. See "Engine Overheating" in the Index.

Engine Temperature Warning Light

Simple thermometer icon with water level indicator (no text or symbols)

This light will come on when your engine gets too hot.

If this light comes on, it means that your engine coolant has overheated. If you have been operating your vehicle under normal driving conditions, you should pull off the road, stop your vehicle and turn off the engine as soon as possible.

In "Problems on the Road," this manual shows what to do. See "Engine Overheating" in the Index.

Low Coolant Light

Simple diagram of a container with a downward arrow and wavy bottom line inside, no text or symbols present.

If this light comes on, your system is low on coolant and the engine may overheat.

To prevent damage to your engine, immediate action is required.

See "Engine Coolant" in the Index and have your vehicle serviced as soon as possible.

Malfunction Indicator Lamp (Service Engine Soon Light)

Domestic

Canadian

Your Pontiac is equipped with a computer which monitors operation of the fuel, ignition and emission control systems.

This system is called OBD II (On-Board Diagnostics-Second Generation) and is intended to assure that emissions are at acceptable levels for the life of the vehicle, helping to produce a cleaner

environment. (In Canada, OBD II is replaced by Enhanced Diagnostics.) The SERVICE ENGINE SOON light comes on and a chime will sound to indicate that there is a problem and service is required. Malfunctions often will be indicated by the system before any problem is apparent. This may prevent more serious damage to your vehicle. This system is also designed to assist your service technician in correctly diagnosing any malfunction.

NOTICE:

If you keep driving your vehicle with this light on, after a while, your emission controls may not work as well, your fuel economy may not be as good and your engine may not run as smoothly. This could lead to costly repairs that may not be covered by your warranty.

This light should come on, as a check to show you it is working, when the ignition is on and the engine is not running. If the light doesn't come on, have it repaired. This light will also come on during a malfunction in one of two ways:

● Light Flashing -- A misfire condition has been detected. A misfire increases vehicle emissions and may damage the emission control system on your vehicle. Dealer or qualified service center diagnosis and service is required.
● Light On Steady -- An emission control system malfunction has been detected on your vehicle. Dealer or qualified service center diagnosis and service may be required.

If the Light Is Flashing

The following may prevent more serious damage to your vehicle:

• Reducing vehicle speed.
  ● Avoiding hard accelerations.
• Avoiding steep uphill grades.
• If you are towing a trailer, reduce the amount of cargo being hauled as soon as it is possible.

If the light stops flashing and remains on steady, see "If the Light Is On Steady" following.

If the light continues to flash, when it is safe to do so, stop the vehicle. Find a safe place to park your vehicle. Turn the key off, wait at least 10 seconds and restart the engine. If the light remains on steady, see "If the Light Is On Steady" following. If the light is still flashing, follow the previous steps, and drive the vehicle to your dealer or qualified service center for service.

If the Light Is On Steady

You may be able to correct the emission system malfunction by considering the following:

Did you recently put fuel into your vehicle?

If so, reinstall the fuel cap, making sure to fully install the cap. The diagnostic system can determine if the fuel cap has been left off or improperly installed. A loose or missing fuel cap will allow fuel to evaporate into the atmosphere. A few driving trips with the cap properly installed should turn the light off.

Did you just drive through a deep puddle of water?

If so, your electrical system may be wet. The condition will usually be corrected when the electrical system dries out. A few driving trips should turn the light off.

Are you low on fuel?

As your engine starts to run out of fuel, your engine may not run as efficiently as designed since small amounts of air are sucked into the fuel line causing a misfire. The system can detect this. Adding fuel should correct this condition. Make sure to install the fuel cap properly. It will take a few driving trips to turn the light off.

Have you recently changed brands of fuel?

If so, be sure to fuel your vehicle with quality fuel (see "Fuel" in the Index). Poor fuel quality will cause your engine not to run as efficiently as designed. You may notice this as stalling after start-up, stalling when you put the vehicle into gear, misfiring, hesitation on acceleration or stumbling on acceleration. (These conditions may go away once the engine is warmed up.) This will be detected by the system and cause the light to turn on.

If you experience one or more of these conditions, change the fuel brand you use. It will require at least one full tank of the proper fuel to turn the light off.

If none of the above steps have made the light turn off, have your dealer or qualified service center check the vehicle. Your dealer has the proper test equipment and diagnostic tools to fix any mechanical or electrical problems that may have developed.

Oil Pressure Light

Simple line drawing of a boat with a handle and water droplet (no text or symbols)

Your vehicle is equipped with an oil pressure warning light. Your oil pressure indicator lets you know when you may have a problem with your engine oil pressure.

When the engine is running, this light may come on to indicate that the engine's oil level may be dangerously low, or there may be another problem causing low oil pressure.

Driving your vehicle with low oil pressure can cause extensive engine damage. Have your vehicle serviced immediately.

CAUTION:

Don't keep driving if the oil pressure is low. If you do, your engine can become so hot that it catches fire. You or others could be burned. Check your oil as soon as possible and have your vehicle serviced.

NOTICE:

Damage to your engine from neglected oil problems can be costly and is not covered by your warranty.

Low Oil Level Light

OIL LEVEL

Domestic

Canadian

If this light comes on, it means your engine is low on oil.

You need to check the oil level right away. Driving your vehicle without enough oil can cause extensive engine damage. Have your vehicle serviced immediately.

Door Ajar Light

Simple black-and-white line drawing of a car viewed from the top (no text or symbols)

This light will come on if any of the doors or the liftgate are not completely closed and the ignition is turned to RUN or START.

If you shift the transaxle out of PARK (P) while the power sliding door is open or in the process of closing, and the power sliding door override feature is disabled, a buzzer will sound. This is a warning that the power sliding door is not completely closed.

CAUTION:

If you shift the transaxle out of PARK (P) and accelerate before the power sliding door latches closed, the door may reverse to the open position.

CAUTION: (Continued)

CAUTION: (Continued)

A child or others could fall out of the vehicle and be injured. Always make sure the power sliding door is closed and latched before you drive away.

Fuel Gage

Domestic

Canadian

Your fuel gage tells you about how much fuel you have left, when the ignition is on. When the gage first indicates EMPTY (E), you still have a little fuel left, but you should get more soon.

After filling the fuel tank, the gage will not read FULL (F) until the ignition is turned on.

Here are four things that some owners ask about. None of these show a problem with your fuel gage:

• At the service station, the gas pump shuts off before the gage reads FULL (F).
• It takes a little more or less fuel to fill up than the gage indicated. For example, the gage may have indicated the tank was half full, but it actually took a little more or less than half the tank's capacity to fill the tank.
• The gage moves a little when you turn a corner, brake or speed up.
• The gage doesn't go back to EMPTY (E) when you turn off the ignition.

Low Fuel Warning Light

When there is between 4 gallons (15 L) and 2 gallons (7.6 L) of fuel left in the tank, the warning light next to the fuel symbol will go on.

This light will also come on when you turn on the ignition, but the engine is not running, to show you it is working. If it doesn't come on as you start your vehicle, have it fixed right away.

NOTES

2-109

NOTES

2-110

Section 3 Comfort Controls and Audio Systems

In this section, you'll find out how to operate the comfort control and audio systems offered with your Pontiac. Be sure to read about the particular systems supplied with your vehicle.

3-2 Comfort Controls

3-4 Air Conditioning

3-4 Heating

3-5 Ventilation System and Tips

3-6 Rear Climate Control

3-8 Tips for Defogging and Defrosting

3-9 Rear Window Defogger

3-10 Setting the Clock

3-10 Radios

3-15 CD Adapter Kit

3-24 Remote Compact Disc Player

3-26 Rear Seat Audio

3-27 Theft-Deterrent Feature

3-30 Steering Wheel Controls

3-31 Adding Sound Equipment to Your Vehicle

3-31 Understanding Radio Reception

3-31 Tips About Your Audio System

3-32 Care of Your Cassette Tape Player

3-33 Care of Your Compact Discs

3-33 Antenna

Comfort Controls

This section tells you how to make your air system work for you. Your comfort control system uses ozone-friendly R-134a refrigerant.

With these systems you can control the heating, cooling and ventilation in your Pontiac. Your vehicle also has a flow-through ventilation system described later in this section.

Close-up of a car air conditioner front panel with dials, buttons, and control icons (no readable text or symbols)

Fan Knob

The left knob is the fan knob and selects the force of air you want. Turn the knob clockwise to increase fan speed and counterclockwise to decrease fan speed. The fan must be turned on for the air conditioning compressor to operate.

Temperature Knob

The center knob controls the temperature of the air coming through the system. Turn it counterclockwise (toward the blue area) for cooler air. Turn it clockwise (toward the red area) for warmer air.

Mode Knob

This knob selects the direction of where the air will enter the vehicle.

UPPER: This setting directs outside air through the instrument panel outlets.

BI-LEV: This setting directs outside air into your vehicle in two ways. Cooler air is directed toward your upper body through the front instrument panel outlets, while warmed air is directed through the heater ducts at your feet.

LOWER: This setting brings in most of the air through the floor ducts. This setting is also used to send air to the rear of the vehicle. Keep the area under the front seats free of objects that could obstruct airflow to the rear of the vehicle.

DEFOG: This setting directs air to the windshield and through the floor ducts. This mode is particularly useful during cold or inclement weather because of your Pontiac Trans Sport's larger windshield area.

DEFROST: This setting directs most of the air to the windshield and side window vents.

Mode Buttons

RECIRC: Press this button (the light will glow) to limit the amount of fresh air entering your vehicle by recirculating much of the air inside your vehicle. You may use this setting to limit odors entering your vehicle. Press the OUTSIDE AIR button (the light on the RECIRC button will go off) to let outside air circulate into the vehicle.

OUTSIDE AIR: Press this button (the light will glow) to send outside air into your vehicle. Using this setting while trying to defrost or defog the windows will help clear the vents of moisture. Press the RECIRC button (the light on the OUTSIDE AIR button will go off) to limit outside air entering the vehicle.

Air Conditioning

On very hot days, your vehicle will cool down more quickly and economically if you open the windows long enough to let hot, inside air escape. For all settings, adjust the temperature control knob and fan speed as desired.

To get maximum cooling or a quick cool-down on very hot days, press the A/C and RECIRC buttons (the lights will glow) and turn the temperature knob to the left (toward the blue area). Adjust the mode knob to direct the air to the desired location. This setting should not be used for long periods of time because the air may become too cold and dry. Push the A/C button again (the light will go off) to turn off the air conditioning.

When the air conditioner compressor is on, you may sometimes notice slight changes in your vehicle's engine performance and power. This is normal. The system is designed to help fuel economy while it maintains the desired cooling level.

The air conditioner removes moisture from the air, so you may sometimes notice water dripping from under your vehicle when it is idling or after it has been turned off. This is normal.

Heating

Turn the temperature knob to the right (toward the red area) to warm the air.

In the LOWER mode, outside air will be brought in and sent through the floor outlets. The heater works best if you keep your windows closed while using it.

The BI-LEV setting is designed for use on sunny days when the air is only moderately warm or cool. On days like these, the sun may adequately warm your upper body, but your lower body may not be warm enough. For the best results, turn the temperature control knob to the middle position, and then adjust it for comfort.

If you have the optional engine coolant heater and use it during cold weather, 0^ F ( -18^ C) or lower, your heating system will provide heat more quickly because the engine coolant is already warmed. See “Engine Coolant Heater” in the Index.

Ventilation System

Your vehicle's flow-through ventilation system supplies outside air into the vehicle when it is moving. Outside air will also enter the vehicle when the fan is running.

Your vehicle has air outlets that allow you to adjust the direction and amount of airflow inside the vehicle. Push the outlet up or down to direct airflow to your preference. Increase or reduce the amount of airflow by opening and closing the louvers. Opening and closing the louvers will also direct airflow from side to side.

The air-flow through the vents can be shut off completely by turning the thumb-wheel next to each outlet all the way down. You can also stop outside air from entering by turning the fan to OFF and pushing the RECIRC button.

Close-up of a car's front air vent grille (no text or symbols visible)

Ventilation Tips

- Keep the hood and front air inlet free of ice, snow or any other obstruction (such as leaves). This will allow the heater and defroster to work much better, reducing the chance of fogging the inside of your windows.

- When you enter a vehicle in cold weather, turn the blower fan to 5 for a few moments before driving off. This helps clear the intake ducts of snow and moisture, and reduces the chance of fogging the inside of your windows.

- Keep the area around the base of the center instrument panel console and the air path under the front seats clear of objects. This helps air to circulate throughout your vehicle.

Rear Climate Control (If Equipped)

If you have the optional rear climate control, the rear seat passengers can control the temperature and the amount of air directed to the rear of the vehicle. The amount of air directed to the rear of the vehicle can also be adjusted using the front control for the rear fan.

Set the main climate control mode knob to BI-LEV, LOWER or DEFOG, when outside temperatures are cold or moderate, to send air to the rear of the vehicle through the lower vents.

Set the main climate control mode knob to UPPER to send air to the rear of the vehicle through the headliner outlets.

To send conditioned air to the rear of the vehicle, press the A/C button (the light will glow) on the main Climate Controls. If you do not select A/C, air directed to the rear of the vehicle will be cabin temperature.

Rear Fan Control

This option comes with the Rear Climate Controls.

Please keep the area around the base of the center instrument panel console and the area between and under the front seats free of objects that would obstruct airflow to the rear of the vehicle.

The rear fan control is located below the Climate Control system, in the switchbank.

Turn the fan to the desired setting for the amount of air to be directed to the rear of the vehicle. The temperature of the air will be the same as the air in the front of the vehicle. The rear fan control in the instrument panel switchbank has an R setting which allows the rear passengers to use the rear Climate Control knobs to adjust the air through the rear air outlets.

Rear Comfort Controls

The rear climate control knobs are in a panel next to the second row seat. If your vehicle has the optional dual sliding doors, the panel is above the driver's seat.

Turn the temperature knob counterclockwise (to the blue area) for cooler air, or clockwise (to the red area) for warmer air.

To maintain a comfortable temperature in the rear, use either rear fan control to adjust the force of air coming through the rear outlets.

Select the desired climate control mode using the directional controls on the instrument panel (see "Mode Knob" earlier in the section). The mode you choose will regulate both the front and rear climate control systems.

Rear Air Vents: To maximize airflow through the rear heater outlet, place the left bucket seat in the second row in the forward position (see "Adjusting Rear Seats" in the Index).

Simple line drawing of a hand holding a small object, possibly a vehicle or tool, with motion lines indicating movement (no text or symbols)

The vent behind the left rear seat is the cold air return vent. Be sure to keep it free of obstructions.

Please keep the area around the base of the center instrument panel console and between and under the front seats free of objects that could obstruct airflow to the rear.

Defogging and Defrosting

To rapidly defrost the windshield, turn the temperature control knob all the way clockwise (to the red area) and turn the mode knob to DEFROST.

Adjust the fan to the highest speed.

To keep the windshield clear and bring in heated air through the heater ducts, turn the mode knob to DEFOG.

When the temperature outside is above freezing, the air conditioner compressor will run in these settings to help remove moisture from the air.

Your vehicle is equipped with side window defogger vents located on the top of the instrument panel. For additional side window defogging, turn the mode knob to the BI-LEVEL setting and adjust the fan to the highest speed. Aim the side vents on the instrument panel toward the side windows. For increased airflow to the side vents, close the center vents.

Rear Window Defogger

Press REAR (the light will glow) to warm the defogger grid on the rear window.

The rear window defogger will turn off automatically after about 10 minutes of use. If you turn it on again, the defogger will operate for about five minutes. You can also turn the defogger off by turning off the ignition or pressing the switch again.

Do not attach a temporary vehicle license across the defogger grid on the rear window.

NOTICE:

Don't use a razor blade or something else sharp on the inside of the rear window. If you do, you could cut or damage the warming grid, and the repairs wouldn't be covered by your warranty.

Audio Systems

Your Delco ^® audio system has been designed to operate easily and give years of listening pleasure. You will get the most enjoyment out of it if you acquaint yourself with it first. Find out what your Delco system can do and how to operate all its controls, to be sure you're getting the most out of the advanced engineering that went into it.

Setting the Clock for AM-FM Stereo

Press SET. Within five seconds, press and hold the SEEK down arrow until the correct hour appears on the display. Press and hold the SEEK up arrow until the correct minute appears on the display.

Setting the Clock for All Systems Except AM-FM Stereo

Press and hold HR until the correct hour appears. Press and hold MIN until the correct minute appears. There will be a two-second delay before the clock goes into time-set mode, and the colon on the display will blink while in this mode.

AM-FM Stereo

Playing the Radio

VOLUME: Push this knob to turn the system on and off. To increase volume, turn the knob clockwise. Turn it counterclockwise to decrease volume.

RCL/PROG: Press this button to recall the station being played or to display the clock.

Finding a Station

AM-FM: Press this button to switch between AM and FM. The display shows your selection.

TUNE: Turn the lower knob to choose radio stations.

SEEK: Press the up or down arrow to go to the next higher or lower station and stay there.

PUSHBUTTONS: The four numbered pushbuttons let you return to your favorite stations. You can set up to 14 stations (seven AM and seven FM). Just:

1. Press AM-FM to select the band.
2. Tune in the desired station.
3. Press SET. (SET will appear on the display.)
4. Press one of the four numbered pushbuttons, within five seconds. Whenever you press that numbered pushbutton, the station you set will return.
5. Repeat the steps for each pushbutton.

In addition to the four stations already set, up to three more stations may be preset on each band by pressing two adjoining buttons at the same time. Just:

1. Tune in the desired station.

2. Press SET. (SET will appear on the display.)

3. Press any two adjoining pushbuttons at the same time, within five seconds. Whenever you press the same buttons, the station you set will return.

4. Repeat the steps for each pair of pushbuttons.

Setting the Tone

BASS: Slide the lever up or down to increase or decrease bass.

TREB: Slide the lever up or down to increase or decrease treble. If a station is weak or noisy, you may want to decrease the treble.

Adjusting the Speakers

BALANCE: Turn the control behind the upper knob to move the sound to the left or right speakers. The middle position balances the sound between the speakers.

FADE: Turn the control behind the lower knob to move the sound to the front or rear speakers. The middle position balances the sound between the speakers.

AM-FM Stereo with Cassette Tape Player (If Equipped)

Playing the Radio

VOL: Push this knob to turn the system on and off. To increase volume, turn the knob clockwise. Turn it counterclockwise to decrease volume.

RECALL: Display the time with the ignition off by pressing this knob. When the radio is playing, press this knob to recall the station frequency.

Finding a Station

AM-FM: Press this button to switch between AM, FM1 and FM2. The display shows your selection.

TUNE: Press this knob lightly so it extends. Turn it to choose radio stations. Push the knob back into its stored position when you're not using it.

SEEK: Press the up or down arrow to go to the next higher or lower station and stay there.

PUSHBUTTONS: The six numbered pushbuttons let you return to your favorite stations. You can set up to 18 stations (six AM, six FM1 and six FM2). Just:

1. Press AM-FM to select the band.
2. Tune in the desired station.
3. Press and hold one of the six numbered buttons until SET appears on the display. Whenever you press that numbered button, the station you set will return.
4. Repeat the steps for each pushbutton.

Setting the Tone

BASS: Slide the lever to the right or left to increase or decrease bass.

TREBLE: Slide the lever to the right or left to increase or decrease treble. If a station is weak or noisy, you may want to decrease the treble.

Adjusting the Speakers

BAL: Press this knob lightly so it extends. Turn this knob to move the sound to the left or right speakers. The middle position balances the sound between the speakers.

FADE: Press this knob lightly so it extends. Turn this knob to move the sound to the front or rear speakers. The middle position balances the sound between the speakers.

Push these knobs back into their stored positions when you're not using them.

Playing a Cassette Tape

Your tape player is built to work best with tapes that are 30 to 45 minutes long on each side. Tapes longer than that are so thin they may not work well in this player.

While the tape is playing, use the VOL, FADE, BAL, BASS and TREB controls just as you do for the radio. The display will show an arrow to show which side of the tape is playing. When the down indicator arrow is lit, selections listed on the bottom side of the cassette are playing. When the up arrow is lit, selections listed on the top side of the cassette are playing. The tape player automatically begins playing the other side when it reaches the end of the tape.

If E and a number appear on the radio display, the tape won't play because of an error.

- E10: The tape is tight and the player can't turn the tape hubs. Remove the tape. Hold the tape with the open end down and try to turn the right hub counterclockwise with a pencil. Turn the tape over and repeat. If the hubs do not turn easily, your tape may be damaged and should not be used in the player. Try a new tape to make sure your player is working properly.

E11: The tape is broken. Try a new tape.

If any error occurs repeatedly or if an error can't be corrected, please contact your dealer. If your radio displays an error number, write it down and provide it to your dealer when reporting the problem.

PREV (1): Press this button or the SEEK down arrow to search for the previous selection on the tape. Your tape must have at least three seconds of silence between each selection for PREV or SEEK to work. The tape direction arrow blinks during PREV or SEEK operation. Press PREV or the SEEK down arrow to stop searching. The sound will mute during PREV or SEEK operation.

NEXT (2): Press this button or the SEEK up arrow to search for the next selection on the tape. If you hold the button, the player will continue moving forward through the tape. Your tape must have at least three seconds of silence between each selection for NEXT or SEEK to work. The tape direction arrow blinks during NEXT or SEEK operation. Press NEXT or the SEEK up arrow to stop searching. The sound will mute during NEXT or SEEK operation.

PROG (3): Press this button to play the other side of the tape.

☐☐ (4): Press this button to reduce background noise. Note that the double-D symbol will appear on the display.

Dolby ^® Noise Reduction is manufactured under a license from Dolby Laboratories Licensing Corporation. Dolby and the double-D symbol are trademarks of Dolby Laboratories Licensing Corporation.

REV (5): Press this button to reverse the tape rapidly. Press it again to return to playing speed. The radio will play the last-selected station while the tape reverses. You may select stations during REV operation by using SEEK or TUNE.

FWD (6): Press this button to advance quickly to another part of the tape. Press the button again to return to playing speed. The radio will play the last-selected station while the tape advances. You may select stations during FWD operation by using SEEK or TUNE.

AM-FM: Press this button to play the radio when a tape is in the player.

TAPE/PLAY: Press this button to change to the tape function when the radio is on. The tape symbol with an arrow will appear on the display when the tape is active. To return to playing the radio, press the AM-FM button.

EJECT: Press this button to remove the tape. The radio will play. EJECT may be activated with either the ignition or radio off. Cassettes may be loaded with the radio and ignition off if this button is pressed first.

CLN: If this message appears on the display, the cassette tape player needs to be cleaned. It will still play tapes, but you should clean it as soon as possible to prevent damage to the tapes and player. See “Care of Your Cassette Tape Player” in the Index. After you clean the player, press and hold EJECT for five seconds to reset the CLN indicator. The radio will display --- to show the indicator was reset.

CD Adapter Kits

It is possible to use a CD adapter kit with your cassette tape player after activating the bypass feature on your tape player.

To activate the bypass feature, the ignition must be on. Turn your radio off. Press TAPE/PLAY and hold for three seconds. After three seconds, the tape symbol in the display will flash for two seconds indicating the feature is active. Turn the radio on and insert the adapter.

This override feature will remain active until EJECT is pressed.

AM-FM Stereo with Cassette Tape Player and Equalizer (If Equipped)

Playing the Radio

VOL: Push this knob to turn the system on and off. To increase volume, turn the knob clockwise. Turn it counterclockwise to decrease volume.

RECALL: Display the time with the ignition off by pressing this knob. When the radio is playing, press this knob to recall the station frequency.

Finding a Station

AM-FM: Press this button to switch between AM, FM1 and FM2. The display shows your selection.

TUNE: Press this knob lightly so it extends. Turn it to choose radio stations. Push the knob back into its stored position when you're not using it.

SEEK: Press the up or down arrow to go to the next higher or lower station and stay there.

PUSHBUTTONS: The six numbered pushbuttons let you return to your favorite stations. You can set up to 18 stations (six AM, six FM1 and six FM2). Just:

1. Press AM-FM to select the band.
2. Tune in the desired station.
3. Press and hold one of the six numbered buttons until SET appears on the display. Whenever you press that numbered button, the station you set will return.
4. Repeat the steps for each pushbutton.

Setting the Tone

EQUALIZER: A seven band equalizer is part of your audio system. Slide the levers up to boost or down to reduce frequency range.

Adjusting the Speakers

BAL: Press this knob lightly so it extends. Turn it to move the sound to the left or right speakers. The middle position balances the sound between the speakers.

FADE: Press this knob lightly so it extends. Turn it to move the sound to the front or rear speakers. The middle position balances the sound between the speakers.

Push these knobs back into their stored positions when you're not using them.

Playing a Cassette Tape

Your tape player is built to work best with tapes that are 30 to 45 minutes long on each side. Tapes longer than that are so thin they may not work well in this player.

While the tape is playing, use the VOL, FADE and BAL controls just as you do for the radio. The display will show an arrow to show which side of the tape is playing. When the down indicator arrow is lit, selections listed on the bottom side of the cassette are playing. When the up arrow is lit, selections listed on the top side of the cassette are playing. The tape player automatically begins playing the other side when it reaches the end of the tape.

If E and a number appear on the radio display, the tape won't play because of an error.

• E10: The tape is tight and the player can't turn the tape hubs. Remove the tape. Hold the tape with the open end down and try to turn the right hub counterclockwise with a pencil. Turn the tape over and repeat. If the hubs do not turn easily, your tape may be damaged and should not be used in the player. Try a new tape to make sure your player is working properly.
  E11: The tape is broken. Try a new tape.

If any error occurs repeatedly or if an error can't be corrected, please contact your dealer. If your radio displays an error number, write it down and provide it to your dealer when reporting the problem.

PREV (1): Press this button or the SEEK down arrow to search for the previous selection on the tape. Your tape must have at least three seconds of silence between each selection for PREV or SEEK to work. The tape direction arrow blinks during PREV or SEEK operation. Press PREV or the SEEK down arrow to stop searching. The sound will mute during PREV or SEEK operation.

NEXT (2): Press this button or the SEEK up arrow to search for the next selection on the tape. If you hold the button, the player will continue moving forward through the tape. Your tape must have at least three seconds of silence between each selection for NEXT or SEEK to work. The tape direction arrow blinks during NEXT or SEEK operation. Press NEXT or the SEEK up arrow to stop searching. The sound will mute during NEXT or SEEK operation.

PROG (3): Press this button to play the other side of the tape.

☐☐ (4): Press this button to reduce background noise. Note that the double-D symbol will appear on the display.

Dolby® Noise Reduction is manufactured under a license from Dolby Laboratories Licensing Corporation. Dolby and the double-D symbol are trademarks of Dolby Laboratories Licensing Corporation.

REV (5): Press this button to reverse the tape rapidly. Press it again to return to playing speed. The radio will play the last-selected station while the tape reverses. You may select stations during REV operation by using SEEK or TUNE.

FWD (6): Press this button to advance quickly to another part of the tape. Press the button again to return to playing speed. The radio will play the last-selected station while the tape advances. You may select stations during FWD operation by using SEEK or TUNE.

AM-FM: Press this button to play the radio when a tape is in the player.

TAPE/PLAY: Press this button to change to the tape function when the radio is on. The tape symbol with an arrow will appear on the display when the tape is active. To return to playing the radio, press the AM-FM button.

EJECT: Press this button to remove the tape. The radio will play. EJECT may be activated with either the ignition or radio off. Cassettes may be loaded with the radio off if this button is pressed first.

CLN: If this message appears on the display, the cassette tape player needs to be cleaned. It will still play tapes, but you should clean it as soon as possible to prevent damage to the tapes and player. See “Care of Your Cassette Tape Player” in the Index. After you clean the player, press and hold EJECT for five seconds to reset the CLN indicator. The radio will display --- to show the indicator was reset.

CD Adapter Kits

It is possible to use a CD adapter kit with your cassette tape player after activating the bypass feature on your tape player.

To activate the bypass feature, the ignition must be on. Turn your radio off. Press TAPE/PLAY and hold for three seconds. After three seconds, the tape symbol in the display will flash for two seconds indicating the feature is active. Turn the radio on and insert the adapter.

This override feature will remain active until EJECT is pressed.

AM-FM Stereo with Compact Disc Player (If Equipped)

Playing the Radio

VOL: Push this knob to turn the system on and off. To increase volume, turn the knob clockwise. Turn it counterclockwise to decrease volume.

RECALL: Display the time with the ignition off by pressing this knob. When the radio is playing, press this knob to recall the station frequency.

Finding a Station

AM-FM: Press this button to switch between AM, FM1 and FM2. The display shows your selection.

TUNE: Press this knob lightly so it extends. Turn it to choose radio stations. Push the knob back into its stored position when you're not using it.

SEEK: Press the up or down arrow to go to the next higher or lower station and stay there.

PUSHBUTTONS: The six numbered pushbuttons let you return to your favorite stations. You can set up to 18 stations (six AM, six FM1 and six FM2). Just:

1. Press AM-FM to select the band.

2. Tune in the desired station.

3. Press and hold one of the six numbered buttons until SET appears on the display. Whenever you press that numbered button, the station you set will return.

4. Repeat the steps for each pushbutton.

Setting the Tone

BASS: Slide the lever to the right or left to increase or decrease bass.

TREBLE: Slide the lever to the right or left to increase or decrease treble. If a station is weak or noisy, you may want to decrease the treble.

Adjusting the Speakers

BAL: Press this knob lightly so it extends. Turn it to move the sound to the left or right speakers. The middle position balances the sound between the speakers.

FADE: Press this knob lightly so it extends. Turn it to move the sound to the front or rear speakers. The middle position balances the sound between the speakers.

Push these knobs back into their stored positions when you're not using them.

Playing a Compact Disc

The integral CD player can play 8 cm "single" mini-discs. Full-size compact discs and mini-discs are loaded in the same manner.

Insert a disc partway into the slot, label side up. The player will pull it in. The compact disc symbol will appear on the display. If the ignition and the radio are on, the disc will begin playing. CD will appear on the display next to the compact disc symbol. If you want to insert a disc when the ignition is off, first press EJECT.

If you're driving on a very rough road or if it's very hot, the disc may not play and E (error) and a number may appear on the radio display. If the disc comes out, it could be that:

• The disc is upside down.
It is dirty, scratched or wet.
- The air is very humid. (If so, wait about an hour and try again.)

If any error occurs repeatedly or if an error can't be corrected, please contact your dealer. If your radio displays an error number, write it down and provide it to your dealer when reporting the problem.

PREV (1): Press this button or the SEEK down arrow to go to the start of the current track if more than eight seconds have played. If you hold the button or press it more than once, the player will continue moving back through the disc.

NEXT (2): Press this button or the SEEK up arrow to go to the start of the next track if more than eight seconds have played. If you hold the button or press it more than once, the player will continue moving forward through the disc.

RDM (3): Press this button to hear the tracks in random, rather than sequential, order. The display will show RDM. Press RDM again to turn off random play.

REV (5): Press and hold this button to quickly reverse within a track. Release it to play the passage. You will hear sound at a reduced volume. The display will show elapsed time.

FWD (6): Press and hold this button to quickly advance within a track. You will hear sound at a reduced volume. The display will show elapsed time.

RECALL: Press this button to see what track is currently playing. Press RECALL again within five seconds to see how long the track has been playing. When a new track starts to play, the track number will also appear. Press RECALL a third time and the time of day will be displayed.

AM-FM: Press this button to play the radio when a disc is playing. The disc will stop but remain in the player.

CD/PLAY: Press this button to change to the disc function when the radio is on.

EJECT: Press this button to remove the disc or stop the disc and switch to the radio. EJECT will work with the radio off.

AM-FM Stereo with Compact Disc Player and Equalizer (If Equipped)

Playing the Radio

VOL: Push this knob to turn the system on and off. To increase volume, turn the knob clockwise. Turn it counterclockwise to decrease volume.

RECALL: Press this button briefly to recall the station being played or to display the clock. If you press the knob when the ignition is off, the clock will show for a few seconds.

Finding a Station

AM-FM: Press this button to switch between AM, FM1 and FM2. The display shows your selection.

TUNE: Press this knob lightly so it extends. Turn it to choose radio stations. Push the knob back into its stored position when you're not using it.

SEEK: Press the up or down arrow to go to the next higher or lower station and stay there.

PUSHBUTTONS: The six numbered pushbuttons let you return to your favorite stations. You can set up to 18 stations (six AM, six FM1 and six FM2). Just:

1. Press AM-FM to select the band.
2. Tune in the desired station.
3. Press and hold one of the six numbered buttons until SET appears on the display. Whenever you press that numbered button, the station you set will return.
4. Repeat the steps for each pushbutton.

Setting the Tone

EQUALIZER: A seven band equalizer is part of your audio system. Slide the levers up to boost or down to reduce frequency range.

Adjusting the Speakers

BAL: Press this knob lightly so it extends. Turn it to move the sound to the left or right speakers. The middle position balances the sound between the speakers.

FADE: Press this knob lightly so it extends. Turn it to move the sound to the front or rear speakers. The middle position balances the sound between the speakers.

Push these knobs back into their stored positions when you're not using them.

Playing a Compact Disc

The integral CD player can play 8 cm "single" mini-discs. Full-size compact discs and mini-discs are loaded in the same manner.

Insert a disc partway into the slot, label side up. The player will pull it in. If the ignition and the radio are on, the disc will begin playing. If you want to insert a disc when the ignition is off, first press EJECT.

If you're driving on a very rough road or if it's very hot, the disc may not play and E (error) and a number may appear on the radio display. If the disc comes out, it could be that:

• The disc is upside down.
- It is dirty, scratched or wet.
- The air is very humid. (If so, wait about an hour and try again.)

If any error occurs repeatedly or if an error can't be corrected, please contact your dealer. If your radio displays an error number, write it down and provide it to your dealer when reporting the problem.

PREV (1): Press this button or the SEEK down arrow to go to the start of the current track if more than eight seconds have played. If you hold the button or press it more than once, the player will continue moving back through the disc.

NEXT (2): Press this button or the SEEK up arrow to go to the start of the next track if more than eight seconds have played. If you hold the button or press it more than once, the player will continue moving forward through the disc.

RDM (3): Press this button to hear the tracks in random, rather than sequential, order. The display will show RDM. Press RDM again to turn off random play.

REV (5): Press and hold this button to quickly reverse within a track. Release it to play the passage. You will hear sound at a reduced volume. The display will show elapsed time.

FWD (6): Press and hold this button to quickly advance within a track. You will hear sound at a reduced volume. The display will show elapsed time.

RECALL: Press this button to see what track is currently playing. Press RECALL again within five seconds to see how long the track has been playing. When a new track starts to play, the track number will also appear. Press RECALL a third time and the time of day will be displayed.

AM-FM: Press this button to play the radio when a disc is playing. The disc will stop but remain in the player.

CD/PLAY: Press this button to change to the disc function when the radio is on.

EJECT: Press this button to remove the disc or stop the disc and switch to the radio. EJECT will work with the radio off.

Remote Compact Disc Player (If Equipped)

If you have this option, you can play one compact disc (CD) at a time.

To load a CD into the player, hold the disc with the label side up and insert it carefully into the player (approximately half way). The disc will automatically be pulled into the player. It is possible to load and unload CDs with the ignition off. To load a disc with the ignition off, press the EJECT button on the remote player and then insert the disc. To remove the disc, press the EJECT button and remove the disc from the player.

A disc that has been ejected but is still sitting in the remote CD player will be pulled back into the player after approximately 30 seconds. This protects the disc and player from damage. The disc will not start playing. To remove the disc, press the EJECT button and remove the disc from the player.

All of the compact disc functions are controlled by the radio buttons except for EJECT. When a disc is in the player, a CD symbol will appear on the display. When a disc is playing, the letters CD will appear next to the CD symbol in the bottom left corner. The track number will also be displayed.

If the disc comes back out and E and a number appears on the display, it could be that:

• The disc is upside down.
- It is dirty, scratched or wet.
There's too much moisture in the air. (Wait about an hour and try again.)
- You are driving on a very rough road.

Please contact your dealership if any error recurs or cannot be corrected.

PREV (1): Press this button to go back to the start of the current track if more than eight seconds have played. Press PREV again to go to the previous track on the disc.

NEXT (3): Press this button to advance to the next track on the disc.

REV (4): Press and hold this button to quickly reverse within a track. As the CD reverses, elapsed time will be displayed to help you find the correct passage.

FWD (6): Press and hold this button to quickly advance within a track. As the CD advances, elapsed time will be displayed to help you find the correct passage.

SEEK: Press the down arrow while playing a CD to go back to the start of the current track. It will go back to the current track if more than eight seconds have played. Press the down arrow again to go to previous tracks. Press the up arrow to go to the next higher track on the disc.

RDM: Press the number four preset button to enter the random play mode. RDM will appear on the display. While in this mode, the tracks on the discs will be played in random order. If you press SEEK, PREV or NEXT while in the random mode, the PREV or NEXT track will be scanned randomly. Press the number four preset button again to turn off RDM and return to normal operation.

RECALL: Press this button to see what track is currently playing. Press RECALL again within five seconds to see how long the track has been playing. When a new track starts to play, the track number will also appear. Press RECALL a third time and the time of day will be displayed.

TAPE PLAY: With a disc loaded in the player and the radio playing, press this button once to play the compact disc. To return to playing the radio, press AM-FM. If both a cassette tape and CD are loaded, press TAPE PLAY to switch between the tape and compact disc.

EJECT: Press this button on the remote player to eject a compact disc.

Rear Seat Audio

This feature allows rear seat passengers to listen to a different music source than the front seat passengers including AM-FM automatic tone control, cassette tapes or CDs. For example, rear seat passengers may listen to a cassette tape or CD through headphones while the driver listens to the radio through the front speakers. The rear seat passengers have control of the volume for each headphone. Be aware that the front seat audio controls always override the rear seat audio controls.

Note that this feature is intended for rear seat passengers. Please do not use headphones while driving.

PWR: Press this button to turn the rear seat audio system on or off. The rear speakers will be muted when the power is turned on. You may operate the rear seat audio functions even when the primary radio power is off.

VOL: Press this knob lightly so it extends. Turn the knob clockwise to increase volume and counterclockwise to decrease volume. Push the knob back into its stored position when you're not using it. The upper VOL knob controls the upper headphone and the lower VOL knob controls the lower headphone.

AM-FM: Press this button to switch between AM, FM1 and FM2. If the front passengers are already listening to AM-FM, the rear seat audio controller will not switch between the bands and cannot change the frequency.

SEEK: Press the up arrow to tune to the next higher station and stay there. Press the down arrow to tune to the next lower station and stay there. The sound will mute while seeking. The SEEK button is inactive if the AM-FM mode on the front radio is in use.

While listening to a cassette tape, press the up arrow to hear the next selection on the tape. Press the down arrow to go back to the previous selection.

P.SET PROG: The front passengers must be listening to something different for each of these functions to work:

• Press this button to seek through your preset radio stations set on your primary radio pushbuttons.
• When a cassette tape is playing, press this button to go to the other side of the tape.

TAPE CD: With a cassette tape in the player and the radio playing, press this button to play a cassette tape. Press TAPE CD to switch between the tape and compact disc if both are loaded. Press AM-FM to return to the radio when a cassette tape or compact disc is playing. The inactive tape or CD will remain safely inside the radio for future listening.

Theft-Deterrent Feature

THEFTLOCK ^™ is designed to discourage theft of your radio. It works by using a secret code to disable all radio functions whenever battery power is removed.

The THEFTLOCK feature for the radio may be used or ignored. If ignored, the system plays normally and the radio is not protected by the feature. If THEFTLOCK is activated, your radio will not operate if stolen.

When THEFTLOCK is activated, the radio will display LOC to indicate a locked condition anytime battery power is removed. If your battery loses power for any reason, you must unlock the radio with the secret code before it will operate.

Activating the Theft-Deterrent Feature

The instructions which follow explain how to enter your secret code to activate the THEFTLOCK system. It is recommended that you read through all nine steps before starting the procedure.

NOTE: If you allow more than 15 seconds to elapse between any steps, the radio automatically reverts to time and you must start the procedure over at Step 4.

1. Write down any three or four-digit number from 000 to 1999 and keep it in a safe place separate from the vehicle.
2. Turn the ignition to ACCESSORY or RUN.
3. Turn the radio off.

4. Press the 1 and 4 buttons together. Hold them down until --- shows on the display. Next you will use the secret code number which you have written down.

5. Press MIN and 000 will appear on the display.

6. Press MIN again to make the last two digits agree with your code.
7. Press HR to make the first one or two digits agree with your code.
8. Press AM-FM after you have confirmed that the code matches the secret code you have written down. The display will show REP to let you know that you need to repeat Steps 5 through 7 to confirm your secret code.
9. Press AM-FM and this time the display will show SEC to let you know that your radio is secure.

Note that with the ignition off, the THEFTLOCK indicator will flash, indicating a secured radio.

Unlocking the Theft-Deterrent Feature After a Power Loss

Enter your secret code as follows; pause no more than 15 seconds between steps:

1. LOC appears when the ignition is on.
2. Press MIN and 000 will appear on the display.
3. Press MIN again to make the last two digits agree with your code.
4. Press HR to make the first one or two digits agree with your code.
5. Press AM-FM after you have confirmed that the code matches the secret code you have written down. The display will show SEC, indicating the radio is now operable and secure.

If you enter the wrong code eight times, INOP will appear on the display. You will have to wait an hour with the ignition on before you can try again. When you try again, you will only have three chances to enter the correct code before INOP appears.

If you lose or forget your code, contact your dealer.

Disabling the Theft-Deterrent Feature

Enter your secret code as follows; pause no more than 15 seconds between steps:

1. Turn the ignition to ACCESSORY or RUN.
2. Turn the radio off.
3. Press the 1 and 4 buttons together. Hold them down until SEC shows on the display.
4. Press MIN and 000 will appear on the display.
5. Press MIN again to make the last two digits agree with your code.
6. Press HR to make the first one or two digits agree with your code.
7. Press AM-FM after you have confirmed that the code matches the secret code you have written down. The display will show ---, indicating that the radio is no longer secured.

If the code entered is incorrect, SEC will appear on the display. The radio will remain secured until the correct code is entered.

When battery power is removed and later applied to a secured radio, the radio won't turn on and LOC will appear on the display.

To unlock a secured radio, see "Unlocking the Theft-Deterrent Feature After a Power Loss" earlier in this section.

Steering Wheel Controls (If Equipped)

If your vehicle has this feature, you can control certain radio and remote playback functions using the buttons on your steering wheel.

VOLUME: Press the up or down arrow to increase or decrease volume.

PLAY: Press this button to play a cassette tape or compact disc when the radio is playing.

MUTE: Press this button to silence the system. Press it again, or any other radio button, to turn on the sound.

SEEK: Press the up arrow to tune to the next radio station and the down arrow to tune to the previous radio station. If a cassette tape or compact disc is playing, the player will advance to the next selection with the up arrow and go to the previous selection with the down arrow.

PRESET: Press this button to play a station you have programmed on the radio preset buttons. When a cassette tape is playing, press this button to change tape sides.

AM-FM: Press this button to choose AM, FM1 or FM2. If a cassette tape or compact disc is playing, it will stop and the radio will play.

Understanding Radio Reception

FM Stereo

FM stereo will give you the best sound. But FM signals will reach only about 10 to 40 miles (16 to 65 km). Tall buildings or hills can interfere with FM signals, causing the sound to come and go.

AM

The range for most AM stations is greater than for FM, especially at night. The longer range, however, can cause stations to interfere with each other. AM can pick up noise from things like storms and power lines. Try reducing the treble to reduce this noise if you ever get it.

Tips About Your Audio System

Hearing damage from loud noise is almost undetectable until it is too late. Your hearing can adapt to higher volumes of sound. Sound that seems normal can be loud and harmful to your hearing. Take precautions by adjusting the volume control on your radio to a safe sound level before your hearing adapts to it.

To help avoid hearing loss or damage:

• Adjust the volume control to the lowest setting.
• Increase volume slowly until you hear comfortably and clearly.

NOTICE:

Before you add any sound equipment to your vehicle -- like a tape player, CB radio, mobile telephone or two-way radio -- be sure you can add what you want. If you can, it's very important to do it properly. Added sound equipment may interfere with the operation of your vehicle's engine, Delco radio or other systems, and even damage them. Your vehicle's systems may interfere with the operation of sound equipment that has been added improperly.

So, before adding sound equipment, check with your dealer and be sure to check Federal rules covering mobile radio and telephone units.

Care of Your Cassette Tape Player

A tape player that is not cleaned regularly can cause reduced sound quality, ruined cassettes or a damaged mechanism. Cassette tapes should be stored in their cases away from contaminants, direct sunlight and extreme heat. If they aren't, they may not operate properly or may cause failure of the tape player.

Your tape player should be cleaned regularly after every 50 hours of use. Your radio may display CLN to indicate that you have used your tape player for 50 hours without resetting the tape clean timer. If this message appears on the display, your cassette tape player needs to be cleaned. It will still play tapes, but you should clean it as soon as possible to prevent damage to your tapes and player. If you notice a reduction in sound quality, try a known good cassette to see if it is the tape or the tape player at fault. If this other cassette has no improvement in sound quality, clean the tape player.

Cleaning may be done with a scrubbing action, non-abrasive cleaning cassette with pads which scrub the tape head as the hubs of the cleaner cassette turn. Follow these steps to prevent the cassette from being ejected due to the CUT TAPE DETECTION feature:

1. Turn the radio off and the ignition on.
2. Press and hold the TAPE/PLAY button for three seconds (tape indicator will flash for two seconds).
3. Insert the cleaner cassette (a CD adapter kit may also be inserted, even though it is not recommended).

The radio will default back to CUT TAPE DETECTION when the cleaner cassette (or CD adapter kit) is ejected.

You may also choose a non-scrubbing action, wet-type cleaner which uses a cassette with a fabric belt to clean the tape head. It may not clean as thoroughly as the scrubbing type cleaner.

After you clean the player, press and hold EJECT for five seconds to reset the CLN indicator. The radio will display --- to show the indicator was reset.

Cassettes are subject to wear and the sound quality may degrade over time. Always make sure the cassette tape is in good condition before you have your tape player serviced.

Care of Your Compact Discs

Handle discs carefully. Store them in their original cases or other protective cases and away from direct sunlight and dust. If the surface of a disc is soiled, dampen a clean, soft cloth in a mild, neutral detergent solution and clean it, wiping from the center to the edge.

Be sure never to touch the signal surface when handling discs. Pick up discs by grasping the outer edges or the edge of the hole and the outer edge.

Integrated Windshield Antenna

The antenna in your vehicle is a very thin, metal layer in the windshield. If you look near the edges of the windshield, you can see the outline of the antenna. The connector is at the top of the windshield, where the headliner ends.

If you experience difficulty with remote transmitters, such as a garage door opener, try pointing the device through the very top of the windshield.

NOTES

NOTES

NOTES

3-36

Section 4 Your Driving and the Road

Here you'll find information about driving on different kinds of roads and in varying weather conditions. We've also included many other useful tips on driving.

4-2 Defensive Driving

4-3 Driving Drunk

4-6 Having Control of Your Vehicle

4-6 Your Braking System Information

4-7 Anti-Lock Brake Information

4-9 Traction Control System

4-11 Braking in Emergencies

4-11 Steering Tips

4-13 Off-Road Recovery

4-13 Passing Other Vehicles

4-15 Loosing Control of Your Vehicle

4-16 Night Driving

4-18 Driving in Rain and on Wet Roads

4-21 City Driving

4-22 Freeway Driving

4-23 Tips Before Leaving on a Long Trip

4-24 Avoiding Highway Hypnosis

4-26 Winter Driving

4-28 If You're Caught in a Blizzard

4-30 Loading Your Vehicle

4-30 Electronic Level Control

4-32 Helpful Hints for Towing a Trailer

Defensive Driving

Black-and-white illustration of a man in a white uniform seated in a car, holding a steering wheel (no text or symbols visible)

The best advice anyone can give about driving is: Drive defensively.

Please start with a very important safety device in your Pontiac: Buckle up. (See "Safety Belts" in the Index.)

Defensive driving really means "be ready for anything." On city streets, rural roads or freeways, it means "always expect the unexpected."

Assume that pedestrians or other drivers are going to be careless and make mistakes. Anticipate what they might do. Be ready for their mistakes.

Rear-end collisions are about the most preventable of accidents. Yet they are common. Allow enough following distance. It's the best defensive driving maneuver, in both city and rural driving. You never know when the vehicle in front of you is going to brake or turn suddenly.

Drunken Driving

Death and injury associated with drinking and driving is a national tragedy. It's the number one contributor to the highway death toll, claiming thousands of victims every year.

Alcohol affects four things that anyone needs to drive a vehicle:

Judgment
• Muscular Coordination
Vision
- Attentiveness.

Police records show that almost half of all motor vehicle-related deaths involve alcohol. In most cases, these deaths are the result of someone who was drinking and driving. In recent years, some 17,000 annual motor vehicle-related deaths have been associated with the use of alcohol, with more than 300,000 people injured.

Many adults -- by some estimates, nearly half the adult population -- choose never to drink alcohol, so they never drive after drinking. For persons under 21, it's against the law in every U.S. state to drink alcohol. There are good medical, psychological and developmental reasons for these laws.

The obvious way to solve this highway safety problem is for people never to drink alcohol and then drive. But what if people do? How much is “too much” if the driver plans to drive? It’s a lot less than many might think. Although it depends on each person and situation, here is some general information on the problem.

The Blood Alcohol Concentration (BAC) of someone who is drinking depends upon four things:

● The amount of alcohol consumed
The drinker's body weight
● The amount of food that is consumed before and during drinking
● The length of time it has taken the drinker to consume the alcohol.

According to the American Medical Association, a 180-lb. (82 kg) person who drinks three 12-ounce (355 ml) bottles of beer in an hour will end up with a BAC of about 0.06 percent. The person would reach the same BAC by drinking three 4-ounce (120 ml) glasses of wine or three mixed drinks if each had 1-1/2 ounces (45 ml) of a liquor like whiskey, gin or vodka.

Black-and-white photo of multiple glasses and wine glasses arranged on a table, no text or symbols visible

It's the amount of alcohol that counts. For example, if the same person drank three double martinis (3 ounces or 90 ml of liquor each) within an hour, the person's BAC would be close to 0.12 percent. A person who consumes food just before or during drinking will have a somewhat lower BAC level.

There is a gender difference, too. Women generally have a lower relative percentage of body water than men.

Since alcohol is carried in body water, this means that a woman generally will reach a higher BAC level than a man of her same body weight when each has the same number of drinks.

The law in many U.S. states sets the legal limit at a BAC of 0.10 percent. In a growing number of U.S. states, and throughout Canada, the limit is 0.08 percent. In some other countries, it's even lower. The BAC limit for all commercial drivers in the United States is 0.04 percent.

The BAC will be over 0.10 percent after three to six drinks (in one hour). Of course, as we've seen, it depends on how much alcohol is in the drinks, and how quickly the person drinks them.

But the ability to drive is affected well below a BAC of 0.10 percent. Research shows that the driving skills of many people are impaired at a BAC approaching 0.05 percent, and that the effects are worse at night. All drivers are impaired at BAC levels above 0.05 percent. Statistics show that the chance of being in a collision increases sharply for drivers who have a BAC of 0.05 percent or above. A driver with a BAC level of 0.06 percent has doubled his or her chance of having a collision. At a BAC level of 0.10 percent, the chance of this driver having a collision is 12 times greater; at a level of 0.15 percent, the chance is 25 times greater!

The body takes about an hour to rid itself of the alcohol in one drink. No amount of coffee or number of cold showers will speed that up. "I'll be careful" isn't the right answer. What if there's an emergency, a need to take sudden action, as when a child darts into the street? A person with even a moderate BAC might not be able to react quickly enough to avoid the collision.

There's something else about drinking and driving that many people don't know. Medical research shows that alcohol in a person's system can make crash injuries worse, especially injuries to the brain, spinal cord or heart. This means that when anyone who has been drinking -- driver or passenger -- is in a crash, that person's chance of being killed or permanently disabled is higher than if the person had not been drinking.

CAUTION:

Drinking and then driving is very dangerous. Your reflexes, perceptions, attentiveness and judgment can be affected by even a small amount of alcohol. You can have a serious -- or even fatal -- collision if you drive after drinking. Please don't drink and drive or ride with a driver who has been drinking. Ride home in a cab; or if you're with a group, designate a driver who will not drink.

Control of a Vehicle

You have three systems that make your vehicle go where you want it to go. They are the brakes, the steering and the accelerator. All three systems have to do their work at the places where the tires meet the road.

Side profile sketch of a car with wheels and suspension (no text or symbols)

Sometimes, as when you're driving on snow or ice, it's easy to ask more of those control systems than the tires and road can provide. That means you can lose control of your vehicle.

Braking

Braking action involves perception time and reaction time.

First, you have to decide to push on the brake pedal. That's perception time. Then you have to bring up your foot and do it. That's reaction time.

Average reaction time is about 3/4 of a second. But that's only an average. It might be less with one driver and as long as two or three seconds or more with another. Age, physical condition, alertness, coordination and eyesight all play a part. So do alcohol, drugs and frustration. But even in 3/4 of a second, a vehicle moving at 60 mph (100 km/h) travels 66 feet (20 m). That could be a lot of distance in an emergency, so keeping enough space between your vehicle and others is important.

And, of course, actual stopping distances vary greatly with the surface of the road (whether it's pavement or gravel); the condition of the road (wet, dry, icy); tire tread; the condition of your brakes; the weight of the vehicle and the amount of brake force applied.

Avoid needless heavy braking. Some people drive in spurts -- heavy acceleration followed by heavy braking -- rather than keeping pace with traffic. This is a mistake. Your brakes may not have time to cool between hard stops. Your brakes will wear out much faster if you do a lot of heavy braking. If you keep pace with the traffic and allow realistic following distances, you will eliminate a lot of unnecessary braking. That means better braking and longer brake life.

If your engine ever stops while you're driving, brake normally but don't pump your brakes. If you do, the pedal may get harder to push down. If your engine stops, you will still have some power brake assist. But you will use it when you brake. Once the power assist is used up, it may take longer to stop and the brake pedal will be harder to push.

Anti-Lock Brakes (ABS)

Your vehicle has anti-lock brakes (ABS). ABS is an advanced electronic braking system that will help prevent a braking skid.

When you start your engine, or when you begin to drive away, your anti-lock brake system will check itself. You may hear a momentary motor or clicking noise while this test is going on, and you may even notice that your brake pedal moves a little. (You may also hear a clicking noise if you leave the ignition in the RUN position for about four seconds before starting the vehicle.) This is normal.

If there's a problem with the anti-lock brake system, this warning light will stay on or flash. See "Anti-Lock Brake System Warning Light" in the Index.

Interior view of a car with driver seated, driver standing near deer in the windshield (no text or symbols visible)

Here's how anti-lock works. Let's say the road is wet. You're driving safely. Suddenly an animal jumps out in front of you.

You slam on the brakes. Here's what happens with ABS.

A computer senses that wheels are slowing down. If one of the wheels is about to stop rolling, the computer will separately work the brakes at each front wheel and at the rear wheels.

The anti-lock system can change the brake pressure faster than any driver could. The computer is programmed to make the most of available tire and road conditions.

Black-and-white illustration of a person driving a car, with a horse jumping out the window (no text or symbols visible)

You can steer around the obstacle while braking hard.

As you brake, your computer keeps receiving updates on wheel speed and controls braking pressure accordingly.

Remember: Anti-lock doesn't change the time you need to get your foot up to the brake pedal or always decrease stopping distance. If you get too close to the vehicle in front of you, you won't have time to apply your brakes if that vehicle suddenly slows or stops. Always leave enough room up ahead to stop, even though you have anti-lock brakes.

Using Anti-Lock

Don't pump the brakes. Just hold the brake pedal down and let anti-lock work for you. You may feel the system working, or you may notice some noise, but this is normal.

LOW TRACTION

If your vehicle has the traction control system, this light will come on when your anti-lock system is adjusting brake pressure to help avoid a braking skid. See “Low Traction Light” in the Index.

Traction Control System (If Equipped)

Your vehicle may have a traction control system that limits wheel spin. This is especially useful in slippery road conditions. The system operates only if it senses that one or both of the front wheels are spinning or beginning to lose traction. When this happens, the system works the front brakes and reduces engine power to limit wheel spin.

You may feel or hear the system working, but this is normal.

If your vehicle is in cruise control when the traction control system begins to limit wheel spin, the cruise control will automatically disengage. When road conditions allow you to safely use it again, you may reengage the cruise control. (See “Cruise Control” in the Index.)

When the system is on, this warning light will come on to let you know if there's a problem with your traction control system.

See "Traction Control System Warning Light" in the Index. When this warning light is on, the system will not limit wheel spin. Adjust your driving accordingly.

The traction control system automatically comes on whenever you start your vehicle. To limit wheel spin, especially in slippery road conditions, you should always leave the system on. But you can turn the traction control system off if you ever need to. (You should turn the system off if your vehicle ever gets stuck in sand, mud, ice or snow. See "Rocking Your Vehicle" in the Index.)

To turn the system off, press the TCS symbol on the bottom of the button in the center console switchbank. The indicator light on the traction control button will go off.

The traction control system warning light will come on and stay on. If the system is limiting wheel spin when you press the button, the warning light will come on -- but the system won't turn off right away. It will wait until there's no longer a current need to limit wheel spin.

You can turn the system back on at any time by pressing the button again. The traction control system warning light should go off.

Braking in Emergencies

With anti-lock, you can steer and brake at the same time. In many emergencies, steering can help you more than even the very best braking.

Steering

Power Steering

If you lose power steering assist because the engine stops or the system is not functioning, you can steer but it will take much more effort.

Steering Tips

Driving on Curves

It's important to take curves at a reasonable speed.

A lot of the "driver lost control" accidents mentioned on the news happen on curves. Here's why:

Experienced driver or beginner, each of us is subject to the same laws of physics when driving on curves. The traction of the tires against the road surface makes it possible for the vehicle to change its path when you turn the front wheels. If there's no traction, inertia will keep the vehicle going in the same direction. If you've ever tried to steer a vehicle on wet ice, you'll understand this. The traction you can get in a curve depends on the condition of your tires and the road surface, the angle at which the curve is banked, and your speed. While you're in a curve, speed is the one factor you can control.

Suppose you're steering through a sharp curve. Then you suddenly accelerate. Both control systems -- steering and acceleration -- have to do their work where the tires meet the road. Adding the sudden acceleration can demand too much of those places. You can lose control.

What should you do if this ever happens? Ease up on the accelerator pedal, steer the vehicle the way you want it to go, and slow down.

Speed limit signs near curves warn that you should adjust your speed. Of course, the posted speeds are based on good weather and road conditions. Under less favorable conditions you'll want to go slower.

If you need to reduce your speed as you approach a curve, do it before you enter the curve, while your front wheels are straight ahead.

Try to adjust your speed so you can "drive" through the curve. Maintain a reasonable, steady speed. Wait to accelerate until you are out of the curve, and then accelerate gently into the straightaway.

Steering in Emergencies

There are times when steering can be more effective than braking. For example, you come over a hill and find a truck stopped in your lane, or a car suddenly pulls out from nowhere, or a child darts out from between parked cars and stops right in front of you. You can avoid these problems by braking -- if you can stop in time. But sometimes you can't; there isn't room. That's the time for evasive action -- steering around the problem.

Your Pontiac can perform very well in emergencies like these. First apply your brakes. (See “Braking in Emergencies” earlier in this section.) It is better to remove as much speed as you can from a possible collision. Then steer around the problem, to the left or right depending on the space available.

Line drawing of a person driving a car with steering wheel and dashboard (no text or symbols)

An emergency like this requires close attention and a quick decision. If you are holding the steering wheel at the recommended 9 and 3 o'clock positions, you can turn it a full 180 degrees very quickly without removing either hand. But you have to act fast, steer quickly, and just as quickly straighten the wheel once you have avoided the object.

The fact that such emergency situations are always possible is a good reason to practice defensive driving at all times and wear safety belts properly.

Off-Road Recovery

You may find sometime that your right wheels have dropped off the edge of a road onto the shoulder while you're driving.

If the level of the shoulder is only slightly below the pavement, recovery should be fairly easy. Ease off the accelerator and then, if there is nothing in the way, steer so that your vehicle straddles the edge of the pavement. You can turn the steering wheel up to one-quarter turn until the right front tire contacts the pavement edge. Then turn your steering wheel to go straight down the roadway.

Passing

The driver of a vehicle about to pass another on a two-lane highway waits for just the right moment, accelerates, moves around the vehicle ahead, then goes back into the right lane again. A simple maneuver?

Not necessarily! Passing another vehicle on a two-lane highway is a potentially dangerous move, since the passing vehicle occupies the same lane as oncoming traffic for several seconds. A miscalculation, an error in judgment, or a brief surrender to frustration or anger can suddenly put the passing driver face to face with the worst of all traffic accidents -- the head-on collision.

So here are some tips for passing:

• "Drive ahead." Look down the road, to the sides and to crossroads for situations that might affect your passing patterns. If you have any doubt whatsoever about making a successful pass, wait for a better time.

• Watch for traffic signs, pavement markings and lines. If you can see a sign up ahead that might indicate a turn or an intersection, delay your pass. A broken center line usually indicates it's all right to pass (providing the road ahead is clear). Never cross a solid line on your side of the lane or a double solid line, even if the road seems empty of approaching traffic.

• Do not get too close to the vehicle you want to pass while you're awaiting an opportunity. For one thing, following too closely reduces your area of vision, especially if you're following a larger vehicle. Also, you won't have adequate space if the vehicle ahead suddenly slows or stops. Keep back a reasonable distance.

• When it looks like a chance to pass is coming up, start to accelerate but stay in the right lane and don't get too close. Time your move so you will be increasing speed as the time comes to move into the other lane. If the way is clear to pass, you will have a "running start" that more than makes up for the distance you would lose by dropping back. And if something happens to cause you to cancel your pass, you need only slow down and drop back again and wait for another opportunity.

• If other cars are lined up to pass a slow vehicle, wait your turn. But take care that someone isn't trying to pass you as you pull out to pass the slow vehicle. Remember to glance over your shoulder and check the blind spot.

• Check your mirrors, glance over your shoulder and start your left lane change signal before moving out of the right lane to pass. When you are far enough ahead of the passed vehicle to see its front in your inside mirror, activate your right lane change signal and move back into the right lane. (Remember that your right outside mirror is convex. The vehicle you just passed may seem to be farther away from you than it really is.)

• Try not to pass more than one vehicle at a time on two-lane roads. Reconsider before passing the next vehicle.
• Don't overtake a slowly moving vehicle too rapidly. Even though the brake lamps are not flashing, it may be slowing down or starting to turn.
• If you're being passed, make it easy for the following driver to get ahead of you. Perhaps you can ease a little to the right.

Loss of Control

Let's review what driving experts say about what happens when the three control systems (brakes, steering and acceleration) don't have enough friction where the tires meet the road to do what the driver has asked.

In any emergency, don't give up. Keep trying to steer and constantly seek an escape route or area of less danger.

Skidding

In a skid, a driver can lose control of the vehicle. Defensive drivers avoid most skids by taking reasonable care suited to existing conditions, and by not "overdriving" those conditions. But skids are always possible.

The three types of skids correspond to your Pontiac's three control systems. In the braking skid, your wheels aren't rolling. In the steering or cornering skid, too much speed or steering in a curve causes tires to slip and lose cornering force. And in the acceleration skid, too much throttle causes the driving wheels to spin.

A cornering skid and an acceleration skid are best handled by easing your foot off the accelerator pedal.

If your vehicle starts to slide, ease your foot off the accelerator pedal and quickly steer the way you want the vehicle to go. If you start steering quickly enough, your vehicle may straighten out. Always be ready for a second skid if it occurs.

Of course, traction is reduced when water, snow, ice, gravel or other material is on the road. For safety, you'll want to slow down and adjust your driving to these conditions. It is important to slow down on slippery surfaces because stopping distance will be longer and vehicle control more limited.

While driving on a surface with reduced traction, try your best to avoid sudden steering, acceleration or braking (including engine braking by shifting to a lower gear). Any sudden changes could cause the tires to slide. You may not realize the surface is slippery until your vehicle is skidding. Learn to recognize warning clues -- such as enough water, ice or packed snow on the road to make a "mirrored surface" -- and slow down when you have any doubt.

Remember: Any anti-lock brake system (ABS) helps avoid only the braking skid.

Driving at Night

Black-and-white illustration of a vintage SUV driving on a mountain road with a speed limit sign (no text or symbols on the vehicle or road)

Night driving is more dangerous than day driving. One reason is that some drivers are likely to be impaired -- by alcohol or drugs, with night vision problems, or by fatigue.

Here are some tips on night driving.

• Drive defensively.
• Don't drink and drive.
• Adjust your inside rearview mirror to reduce the glare from headlamps behind you.
• Since you can't see as well, you may need to slow down and keep more space between you and other vehicles.
• Slow down, especially on higher speed roads. Your headlamps can light up only so much road ahead.
• In remote areas, watch for animals.
• If you're tired, pull off the road in a safe place and rest.

Night Vision

No one can see as well at night as in the daytime. But as we get older these differences increase. A 50-year-old driver may require at least twice as much light to see the same thing at night as a 20-year-old.

What you do in the daytime can also affect your night vision. For example, if you spend the day in bright sunshine you are wise to wear sunglasses. Your eyes will have less trouble adjusting to night. But if you're driving, don't wear sunglasses at night. They may cut down on glare from headlamps, but they also make a lot of things invisible.

You can be temporarily blinded by approaching headlamps. It can take a second or two, or even several seconds, for your eyes to readjust to the dark. When you are faced with severe glare (as from a driver who doesn't lower the high beams, or a vehicle with misaimed headlamps), slow down a little. Avoid staring directly into the approaching headlamps.

Keep your windshield and all the glass on your vehicle clean -- inside and out. Glare at night is made much worse by dirt on the glass. Even the inside of the glass can build up a film caused by dust. Dirty glass makes lights dazzle and flash more than clean glass would, making the pupils of your eyes contract repeatedly.

Remember that your headlamps light up far less of a roadway when you are in a turn or curve. Keep your eyes moving; that way, it's easier to pick out dimly lighted objects. Just as your headlamps should be checked regularly for proper aim, so should your eyes be examined regularly. Some drivers suffer from night blindness -- the inability to see in dim light -- and aren't even aware of it.

Driving in Rain and on Wet Roads

Black-and-white sketch of a car partially submerged in water, no text or symbols present

Rain and wet roads can mean driving trouble. On a wet road, you can't stop, accelerate or turn as well because your tire-to-road traction isn't as good as on dry roads.

And, if your tires don't have much tread left, you'll get even less traction. It's always wise to go slower and be cautious if rain starts to fall while you are driving. The surface may get wet suddenly when your reflexes are tuned for driving on dry pavement.

The heavier the rain, the harder it is to see. Even if your windshield wiper blades are in good shape, a heavy rain can make it harder to see road signs and traffic signals, pavement markings, the edge of the road and even people walking.

It's wise to keep your wiping equipment in good shape and keep your windshield washer tank filled with washer fluid. Replace your windshield wiper inserts when they show signs of streaking or missing areas on the windshield, or when strips of rubber start to separate from the inserts.

Black-and-white illustration of a car partially submerged in water, creating splashes (no text or symbols)

Driving too fast through large water puddles or even going through some car washes can cause problems, too. The water may affect your brakes. Try to avoid puddles. But if you can't, try to slow down before you hit them.

CAUTION:

Wet brakes can cause accidents. They won't work as well in a quick stop and may cause pulling to one side. You could lose control of the vehicle.

After driving through a large puddle of water or a car wash, apply your brake pedal lightly until your brakes work normally.

Hydroplaning

Hydroplaning is dangerous. So much water can build up under your tires that they can actually ride on the water. This can happen if the road is wet enough and you're going fast enough. When your vehicle is hydroplaning, it has little or no contact with the road.

Hydroplaning doesn't happen often. But it can if your tires do not have much tread or if the pressure in one or more is low. It can happen if a lot of water is standing on the road. If you can see reflections from trees, telephone poles or other vehicles, and raindrops "dimple" the water's surface, there could be hydroplaning.

Hydroplaning usually happens at higher speeds. There just isn't a hard and fast rule about hydroplaning. The best advice is to slow down when it is raining.

Driving Through Deep Standing Water

NOTICE:

If you drive too quickly through deep puddles or standing water, water can come in through your engine's air intake and badly damage your engine. Never drive through water that is slightly lower than the underbody of your vehicle. If you can't avoid deep puddles or standing water, drive through them very slowly.

Some Other Rainy Weather Tips

• Turn on your low-beam headlamps -- not just your parking lamps -- to help make you more visible to others.
• Besides slowing down, allow some extra following distance. And be especially careful when you pass another vehicle. Allow yourself more clear room ahead, and be prepared to have your view restricted by road spray.
• Have good tires with proper tread depth. (See "Tires" in the Index.)

City Driving

Black-and-white street scene showing a convoy of cars driving on a city road with modern buildings and trees in the background (no visible text or signage)

One of the biggest problems with city streets is the amount of traffic on them. You'll want to watch out for what the other drivers are doing and pay attention to traffic signals.

Here are ways to increase your safety in city driving:

• Know the best way to get to where you are going. Get a city map and plan your trip into an unknown part of the city just as you would for a cross-country trip.
• Try to use the freeways that rim and crisscross most large cities. You'll save time and energy. (See the next part, "Freeway Driving.")
• Treat a green light as a warning signal. A traffic light is there because the corner is busy enough to need it. When a light turns green, and just before you start to move, check both ways for vehicles that have not cleared the intersection or may be running the red light.

Freeway Driving

Illustration of a car driving under an overpass over a highway with hills in the background (no text or symbols)

Mile for mile, freeways (also called thruways, parkways, expressways, turnpikes or superhighways) are the safest of all roads. But they have their own special rules.

The most important advice on freeway driving is: Keep up with traffic and keep to the right. Drive at the same speed most of the other drivers are driving. Too-fast or too-slow driving breaks a smooth traffic flow. Treat the left lane on a freeway as a passing lane.

At the entrance, there is usually a ramp that leads to the freeway. If you have a clear view of the freeway as you drive along the entrance ramp, you should begin to check traffic. Try to determine where you expect to blend with the flow. Try to merge into the gap at close to the prevailing speed. Switch on your turn signal, check your mirrors and glance over your shoulder as often as necessary. Try to blend smoothly with the traffic flow.

Once you are on the freeway, adjust your speed to the posted limit or to the prevailing rate if it's slower. Stay in the right lane unless you want to pass.

Before changing lanes, check your mirrors. Then use your turn signal.

Just before you leave the lane, glance quickly over your shoulder to make sure there isn't another vehicle in your "blind" spot.

Once you are moving on the freeway, make certain you allow a reasonable following distance. Expect to move slightly slower at night.

When you want to leave the freeway, move to the proper lane well in advance. If you miss your exit, do not, under any circumstances, stop and back up. Drive on to the next exit.

The exit ramp can be curved, sometimes quite sharply.

The exit speed is usually posted.

Reduce your speed according to your speedometer, not to your sense of motion. After driving for any distance at higher speeds, you may tend to think you are going slower than you actually are.

Before Leaving on a Long Trip

Make sure you're ready. Try to be well rested. If you must start when you're not fresh -- such as after a day's work -- don't plan to make too many miles that first part of the journey. Wear comfortable clothing and shoes you can easily drive in. Is your vehicle ready for a long trip? If you keep it serviced and maintained, it's ready to go. If it needs service, have it done before starting out. Of course, you'll find experienced and able service experts in Pontiac dealerships all across North America. They'll be ready and willing to help if you need it.

Here are some things you can check before a trip:

● Windshield Washer Fluid: Is the reservoir full? Are all windows clean inside and outside?
• Wiper Blades: Are they in good shape?
- Fuel, Engine Oil, Other Fluids: Have you checked all levels?
- Lamps: Are they all working? Are the lenses clean?
- Tires: They are vitally important to a safe, trouble-free trip. Is the tread good enough for long-distance driving? Are the tires all inflated to the recommended pressure?
- Weather Forecasts: What's the weather outlook along your route? Should you delay your trip a short time to avoid a major storm system?
- Maps: Do you have up-to-date maps?

Highway Hypnosis

Is there actually such a condition as "highway hypnosis"? Or is it just plain falling asleep at the wheel? Call it highway hypnosis, lack of awareness, or whatever.

There is something about an easy stretch of road with the same scenery, along with the hum of the tires on the road, the drone of the engine, and the rush of the wind against the vehicle that can make you sleepy. Don't let it happen to you! If it does, your vehicle can leave the road in less than a second, and you could crash and be injured.

What can you do about highway hypnosis? First, be aware that it can happen.

Then here are some tips:

● Make sure your vehicle is well ventilated, with a comfortably cool interior.
- Keep your eyes moving. Scan the road ahead and to the sides. Check your mirrors and your instruments frequently.
- If you get sleepy, pull off the road into a rest, service or parking area and take a nap, get some exercise, or both. For safety, treat drowsiness on the highway as an emergency.

Hill and Mountain Roads

Black-and-white landscape painting of a winding mountain road with deer and pine trees (no text or symbols)

Driving on steep hills or mountains is different from driving in flat or rolling terrain.

If you drive regularly in steep country, or if you're planning to visit there, here are some tips that can make your trips safer and more enjoyable.

• Keep your vehicle in good shape. Check all fluid levels and also the brakes, tires, cooling system and transaxle. These parts can work hard on mountain roads.
• Know how to go down hills. The most important thing to know is this: let your engine do some of the slowing down. Shift to a lower gear when you go down a steep or long hill.

CAUTION:

If you don't shift down, your brakes could get so hot that they wouldn't work well. You would then have poor braking or even none going down a hill. You could crash. Shift down to let your engine assist your brakes on a steep downhill slope.

CAUTION:

Coasting downhill in NEUTRAL (N) or with the ignition off is dangerous. Your brakes will have to do all the work of slowing down. They could get so hot that they wouldn't work well. You would then have poor braking or even none going down a hill. You could crash. Always have your engine running and your vehicle in gear when you go downhill.

• Know how to go uphill. You may want to shift down to a lower gear. The lower gears help cool your engine and transaxle, and you can climb the hill better.
• Stay in your own lane when driving on two-lane roads in hills or mountains. Don't swing wide or cut across the center of the road. Drive at speeds that let you stay in your own lane.
• As you go over the top of a hill, be alert. There could be something in your lane, like a stalled car or an accident.
• You may see highway signs on mountains that warn of special problems. Examples are long grades, passing or no-passing zones, a falling rocks area or winding roads. Be alert to these and take appropriate action.

Winter Driving

Sketch of a snowy street scene with parked cars and buildings in the background (no text or symbols visible)

Here are some tips for winter driving:

• Have your Pontiac in good shape for winter.
• You may want to put winter emergency supplies in your vehicle.

Include an ice scraper, a small brush or broom, a supply of windshield washer fluid, a rag, some winter outer clothing, a small shovel, a flashlight, a red cloth and reflective warning triangles. And, if you will be driving under severe conditions, include a small bag of sand, a piece of old carpet or a couple of burlap bags to help provide traction. Be sure you properly secure these items in your vehicle.

Driving on Snow or Ice

Most of the time, those places where your tires meet the road probably have good traction.

However, if there is snow or ice between your tires and the road, you can have a very slippery situation. You'll have a lot less traction or "grip" and will need to be very careful.

Black-and-white line drawing of a car driving on pavement, no text or symbols present

What's the worst time for this? "Wet ice." Very cold snow or ice can be slick and hard to drive on. But wet ice can be even more trouble because it may offer the least traction of all. You can get wet ice when it's about freezing (32°F; 0°C) and freezing rain begins to fall. Try to avoid driving on wet ice until salt and sand crews can get there.

Whatever the condition -- smooth ice, packed, blowing or loose snow -- drive with caution.

If you have traction control, keep the system on. It will improve your ability to accelerate when driving on a slippery road. Even though your vehicle has a traction control system, you'll want to slow down and adjust your driving to the road conditions. See "Traction Control System" in the Index.

If you don't have traction control, accelerate gently. Try not to break the gentle traction. If you accelerate too fast, the drive wheels will spin and polish the surface under the tires even more.

Your anti-lock brakes improve your vehicle's stability when you make a hard stop on a slippery road. Even though you have an anti-lock braking system, you'll want to begin stopping sooner than you would on dry pavement. See "Anti-Lock" in the Index.

• Allow greater following distance on any slippery road.
• Watch for slippery spots. The road might be fine until you hit a spot that's covered with ice. On an otherwise clear road, ice patches may appear in shaded areas where the sun can't reach: around clumps of trees, behind buildings or under bridges. Sometimes the surface of a curve or an overpass may remain icy when the surrounding roads are clear. If you see a patch of ice ahead of you, brake before you are on it. Try not to brake while you're actually on the ice, and avoid sudden steering maneuvers.

If You're Caught in a Blizzard

Sketch of a car driving through heavy snowfall (no text or symbols)

If you are stopped by heavy snow, you could be in a serious situation. You should probably stay with your vehicle unless you know for sure that you are near help and you can hike through the snow. Here are some things to do to summon help and keep yourself and your passengers safe:

● Turn on your hazard flashers.

• Tie a red cloth to your vehicle to alert police that you've been stopped by the snow.
• Put on extra clothing or wrap a blanket around you. If you have no blankets or extra clothing, make body insulators from newspapers, burlap bags, rags, floor mats -- anything you can wrap around yourself or tuck under your clothing to keep warm.

Cartoon illustration of a van driving through heavy rain with smoke plumes nearby (no text or symbols)

You can run the engine to keep warm, but be careful.

CAUTION:

Snow can trap exhaust gases under your vehicle. This can cause deadly CO (carbon monoxide) gas to get inside. CO could overcome you and kill you. You can't see it or smell it, so you might not know it is in your vehicle. Clear away snow from around the base of your vehicle, especially any that is blocking your exhaust pipe. And check around again from time to time to be sure snow doesn't collect there.

Open a window just a little on the side of the vehicle that's away from the wind. This will help keep CO out.

Run your engine only as long as you must. This saves fuel. When you run the engine, make it go a little faster than just idle. That is, push the accelerator slightly. This uses less fuel for the heat that you get and it keeps the battery charged. You will need a well-charged battery to restart the vehicle, and possibly for signaling later on with your headlamps. Let the heater run for awhile.

Then, shut the engine off and close the window almost all the way to preserve the heat. Start the engine again and repeat this only when you feel really uncomfortable from the cold. But do it as little as possible. Preserve the fuel as long as you can. To help keep warm, you can get out of the vehicle and do some fairly vigorous exercises every half hour or so until help comes.

Loading Your Vehicle

The Certification/Tire label is found on the rear edge of the driver's door.

The label shows the size of your original tires and the inflation pressures needed to obtain the gross weight capacity of your vehicle. This is called the Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR). The GVWR includes the weight of the vehicle, all occupants, fuel and cargo.

The Certification/Tire label also tells you the maximum weights for the front and rear axles, called the Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR). To find out the actual loads on your front and rear axles, you need to go to a weigh station and weigh your vehicle. Your dealer can help you with this. Be sure to spread out your load equally on both sides of the centerline.

Never exceed the GVWR for your vehicle or the Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) for either the front or rear axle.

Electronic Level Control (Option)

On vehicles equipped with the optional electronic level control, the rear of the vehicle is automatically kept level as you load or unload your vehicle. However, you should still not exceed the GVWR or the GAWR.

You may hear the compressor operating when you load or unload your vehicle, and periodically as the system self-adjusts. This is normal.

The compressor should operate for brief periods of time. If the sound continues for an extended period of time, your vehicle needs service. To keep your battery from being drained, you may want to pull the ELC fuse in the fuse control panel until you you can have your vehicle serviced (see "Fuses and Circuit Breakers" in the Index).

Using heavier suspension components to get added durability might not change your weight ratings. Ask your dealer to help you load your vehicle the right way.

CAUTION:

Do not load your vehicle any heavier than the GVWR, or either the maximum front or rear GAWR. If you do, parts on your vehicle can break, or it can change the way your vehicle handles. These could cause you to lose control. Also, overloading can shorten the life of your vehicle.

NOTICE:

Your warranty does not cover parts or components that fail because of overloading.

If you put things inside your vehicle -- like suitcases, tools, packages, or anything else -- they will go as fast as the vehicle goes. If you have to stop or turn quickly, or if there is a crash, they'll keep going.

CAUTION:

Things you put inside your vehicle can strike and injure people in a sudden stop or turn, or in a crash.

● Put things in the cargo area of your vehicle. Try to spread the weight evenly.
- Never stack heavier things, like suitcases, inside the vehicle so that some of them are above the tops of the seats.
- Don't leave an unsecured child restraint in your vehicle.
- When you carry something inside the vehicle, secure it whenever you can.
- Don't leave a seat folded down unless you need to.

Towing a Trailer

CAUTION:

If you don't use the correct equipment and drive properly, you can lose control when you pull a trailer. For example, if the trailer is too heavy, the brakes may not work well -- or even at all. You and your passengers could be seriously injured. Pull a trailer only if you have followed all the steps in this section. Ask your Pontiac dealer for advice and information about towing a trailer with your vehicle.

NOTICE:

Pulling a trailer improperly can damage your vehicle and result in costly repairs not covered by your warranty. To pull a trailer correctly, follow the advice in this part, and see your Pontiac dealer for important information about towing a trailer with your vehicle.

Your vehicle can tow a trailer. To identify what the vehicle trailering capacity is for your vehicle, you should read the information in "Weight of the Trailer" that appears later in this section. But trailering is different than just driving your vehicle by itself. Trailering means changes in handling, durability and fuel economy. Successful, safe trailering takes correct equipment, and it has to be used properly.

That's the reason for this section. In it are many time-tested, important trailering tips and safety rules. Many of these are important for your safety and that of your passengers. So please read this section carefully before you pull a trailer.

Load-pulling components such as the engine, transaxle, wheel assemblies and tires are forced to work harder against the drag of the added weight. The engine is required to operate at relatively higher speeds and under greater loads, generating extra heat. What's more, the trailer adds considerably to wind resistance, increasing the pulling requirements.

If You Do Decide To Pull A Trailer

If you do, here are some important points:

There are many different laws, including speed limit restrictions, having to do with trailering. Make sure your rig will be legal, not only where you live but also where you'll be driving. A good source for this information can be state or provincial police.
- Consider using a sway control if your trailer will weigh 2,000 lbs. (900 kg) or less. You should always use a sway control if your trailer will weigh more than 2,000 lbs. (900 kg). You can ask a hitch dealer about sway controls.
- Don't tow a trailer at all during the first 500 miles (800 km) your new vehicle is driven. Your engine, axle or other parts could be damaged.
- Then, during the first 500 miles (800 km) that you tow a trailer, don't drive over 50 mph (80 km/h) and don't make starts at full throttle. This helps your engine and other parts of your vehicle wear in at the heavier loads.
- You may use THIRD (3) (or as you need to, a lower gear) when towing a trailer. Operating your vehicle in THIRD (3) when towing a trailer will minimize heat build-up and extend the life of your transaxle.

Three important considerations have to do with weight:

• the weight of the trailer,
the weight of the trailer tongue
and the weight on your vehicle's tires.

Weight of the Trailer

How heavy can a trailer safely be?

It should never weigh more than 1,400 lbs. (630 kg) with up to six occupants in the vehicle or more than 2,000 lbs. (900 kg) with up to two occupants. If you have the optional trailer towing package, your vehicle can tow up to 2,900 lbs. (1 300 kg) with up to six occupants or up to 3,500 lbs. (1 575 kg) with up to two occupants. But even that can be too heavy.

It depends on how you plan to use your rig. For example, speed, altitude, road grades, outside temperature and how much your vehicle is used to pull a trailer are all important. And, it can also depend on any special equipment that you have on your vehicle.

You can ask your dealer for our trailering information or advice, or you can write us at :

Customer Assistance Center

Pontiac Division

One Pontiac Plaza

Pontiac, MI 48340-2952

In Canada, write to:

General Motors of Canada Limited

Customer Communication Centre

1908 Colonel Sam Drive

Oshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7

Weight of the Trailer Tongue

The tongue load (A) of any trailer is an important weight to measure because it affects the total or gross weight of your vehicle. The Gross Vehicle Weight (GVW) includes the curb weight of the vehicle, any cargo you may carry in it, and the people who will be riding in the vehicle. And if you will tow a trailer, you must add the tongue load to the GVW because your vehicle will be carrying that weight, too. See “Loading Your Vehicle” in the Index for more information about your vehicle’s maximum load capacity.

Illustration of a train with a speedometer and a hanging clock (no text or symbols)

A

Simple line drawing of a vehicle on a scale with a pointer and a clock (no text or symbols)

B

If you're using a weight-carrying hitch, the trailer tongue (A) should weigh 10 percent of the total loaded trailer weight (B). If you're using a weight-distributing hitch, the trailer tongue (A) should weigh 12 percent of the total loaded trailer weight (B).

After you've loaded your trailer, weigh the trailer and then the tongue, separately, to see if the weights are proper. If they aren't, you may be able to get them right simply by moving some items around in the trailer.

Total Weight on Your Vehicle's Tires

Be sure your vehicle's tires are inflated to the upper limit for cold tires. You'll find these numbers on the Certification/Tire label at the rear edge of the driver's door or see "Tire Loading" in the Index. Then be sure you don't go over the GVW limit for your vehicle, including the weight of the trailer tongue.

Hitches

It's important to have the correct hitch equipment. Crosswinds, large trucks going by and rough roads are a few reasons why you'll need the right hitch. Here are some rules to follow:

● The bumpers on your vehicle are not intended for hitches. Do not attach rental hitches or other bumper-type hitches to them. Use only a frame-mounted hitch that does not attach to the bumper.
- If you'll be pulling a trailer that, when loaded, will weigh more than 2,000 lbs. (900 kg), be sure to use a properly mounted, weight-carrying hitch and sway control of the proper size. This equipment is very important for proper vehicle loading and good handling when you're driving.

- Will you have to make any holes in the body of your vehicle when you install a trailer hitch?

If you do, then be sure to seal the holes later when you remove the hitch. If you don't seal them, deadly carbon monoxide (CO) from your exhaust can get into your vehicle (see "Carbon Monoxide" in the Index). Dirt and water can, too.

Safety Chains

You should always attach chains between your vehicle and your trailer. Cross the safety chains under the tongue of the trailer so that the tongue will not drop to the road if it becomes separated from the hitch. Instructions about safety chains may be provided by the hitch manufacturer or by the trailer manufacturer. Follow the manufacturer's recommendation for attaching safety chains and do not attach them to the bumper. Always leave just enough slack so you can turn with your rig. And, never allow safety chains to drag on the ground.

Trailer Brakes

If your trailer weighs more than 1,000 lbs. (450 kg) loaded, then it needs its own brakes -- and they must be adequate. Be sure to read and follow the instructions for the trailer brakes so you'll be able to install, adjust and maintain them properly.

Because you have anti-lock brakes, do not try to tap into your vehicle's brake system. If you do, both brake systems won't work well, or at all.

Driving with a Trailer

CAUTION:

If you have a rear-most window open and you pull a trailer with your vehicle, carbon monoxide (CO) could come into your vehicle. You can't see or smell CO. It can cause unconsciousness or death. (See "Engine Exhaust" in the Index.) To maximize your safety when towing a trailer:

• Have your exhaust system inspected for leaks, and make necessary repairs before starting on your trip.
• Keep the rear-most windows closed.
• If exhaust does come into your vehicle through a window in the rear or another opening, drive with your front, main heating or cooling system on and with the fan on any speed. This will bring fresh, outside air into your vehicle. Do not use RECIRC because it only recirculates the air inside your vehicle. (See “Comfort Controls” in the Index.)

Towing a trailer requires a certain amount of experience. Before setting out for the open road, you'll want to get to know your rig. Acquaint yourself with the feel of handling and braking with the added weight of the trailer. And always keep in mind that the vehicle you are driving is now a good deal longer and not nearly as responsive as your vehicle is by itself.

Before you start, check the trailer hitch and platform (and attachments), safety chains, electrical connector, lamps, tires and mirror adjustment. If the trailer has electric brakes, start your vehicle and trailer moving and then apply the trailer brake controller by hand to be sure the brakes are working. This lets you check your electrical connection at the same time.

During your trip, check occasionally to be sure that the load is secure, and that the lamps and any trailer brakes are still working.

Following Distance

Stay at least twice as far behind the vehicle ahead as you would when driving your vehicle without a trailer. This can help you avoid situations that require heavy braking and sudden turns.

Passing

You'll need more passing distance up ahead when you're towing a trailer. And, because you're a good deal longer, you'll need to go much farther beyond the passed vehicle before you can return to your lane.

Backing Up

Hold the bottom of the steering wheel with one hand. Then, to move the trailer to the left, just move that hand to the left. To move the trailer to the right, move your hand to the right. Always back up slowly and, if possible, have someone guide you.

Making Turns

NOTICE:

Making very sharp turns while trailering could cause the trailer to come in contact with the vehicle. Your vehicle could be damaged. Avoid making very sharp turns while trailering.

When you're turning with a trailer, make wider turns than normal. Do this so your trailer won't strike soft shoulders, curbs, road signs, trees or other objects. Avoid jerky or sudden maneuvers. Signal well in advance.

Turn Signals When Towing a Trailer

When you tow a trailer, your vehicle has to have extra wiring.

The arrows on your instrument panel will flash whenever you signal a turn or lane change. Properly hooked up, the trailer lamps will also flash, telling other drivers you're about to turn, change lanes or stop.

When towing a trailer, the arrows on your instrument panel will flash for turns even if the bulbs on the trailer are burned out. Thus, you may think drivers behind you are seeing your signal when they are not. It's important to check occasionally to be sure the trailer bulbs are still working.

Driving On Grades

Reduce speed and shift to a lower gear before you start down a long or steep downgrade. If you don't shift down, you might have to use your brakes so much that they would get hot and no longer work well.

On a long uphill grade, shift down and reduce your speed to around 45 mph (70 km/h) to reduce the possibility of engine and transaxle overheating.

If you are towing a trailer that weighs more than 1,000 lbs. (454 kg), you may prefer to drive in THIRD (3) instead of AUTOMATIC OVERDRIVE (D) (or, as you need to, a lower gear). This will minimize heat build-up and extend the life of your transaxle.

Parking on Hills

You really should not park your vehicle, with a trailer attached, on a hill. If something goes wrong, your rig could start to move. People can be injured, and both your vehicle and the trailer can be damaged.

But if you ever have to park your rig on a hill, here's how to do it:

1. Apply your regular brakes, but don't shift into PARK (P) yet.
2. Have someone place chocks under the trailer wheels.
3. When the wheel chocks are in place, release the regular brakes until the chocks absorb the load.
4. Reapply the regular brakes. Then apply your parking brake, and then shift to PARK (P).
5. Release the regular brakes.

When You Are Ready to Leave After Parking on a Hill

1. Apply your regular brakes and hold the pedal down while you:

2. Start your engine;

3. Shift into a gear; and
   ● Release the parking brake.

4. Let up on the brake pedal.

5. Drive slowly until the trailer is clear of the chocks.
6. Stop and have someone pick up and store the chocks.

Maintenance When Trailer Towing

Your vehicle will need service more often when you're pulling a trailer. See the Maintenance Schedule for more on this. Things that are especially important in trailer operation are automatic transaxle fluid (don't overfill), engine oil, belts, cooling system and brake adjustment. Each of these is covered in this manual, and the Index will help you find them quickly. If you're trailering, it's a good idea to review these sections before you start your trip.

Check periodically to see that all hitch nuts and bolts are tight.

NOTES

NOTES

Section 5 Problems on the Road

Here you'll find what to do about some problems that can occur on the road.

5-2 How to Use Warning Flashers

5-3 Other Types of Warning Devices

5-3 Step-by-Step Procedure for Jump Starting

5-8 Information You Should Know Before Towing

5-10 Towing Your Vehicle From the Front

5-11 Towing Your Vehicle From the Rear

5-12 Overheated Engine Protection Operating Mode

5-12 If Your Engine is Overheating

5-13 If Steam is Coming From Your Engine

5-15 Cooling System

5-16 How to Add Coolant

5-22 What to do if a Tire Goes Flat

5-22 How to Change a Flat Tire

5-31 Where to Store the Flat Tire and Tools

5-32 Information on the Compact Spare Tire

5-33 If You're Stuck in Sand, Mud, Snow or on Ice

5-33 How to Rock Your Vehicle to Get Unstuck

Hazard Warning Flashers

Side profile illustration of a vintage minibus driving on a road (no text or symbols visible)

Your hazard warning flashers let you warn others. They also let police know you have a problem. Your front and rear turn signal lamps will flash on and off.

Close-up grayscale image of a smooth, curved surface with a small triangular object on the right side (no text or symbols visible)

Your hazard warning flashers switch is on top of the steering column. Press the button in to turn on your flashers.

Your hazard warning flashers work no matter what position your key is in, and even if the key isn't in.

To turn off the flashers, push the switch down and it will pop back up by itself.

When the hazard warning flashers are on, your turn signals won't work.

Other Warning Devices

If you carry reflective triangles, you can set one up at the side of the road about 300 feet (100 m) behind your vehicle.

Jump Starting

If your battery has run down, you may want to use another vehicle and some jumper cables to start your Pontiac. But please use the following steps listed to do it safely.

On vehicles equipped with the optional power sliding door, a low voltage battery or replacing a battery may cause the system to become inoperative. See "Power Sliding Door" in the Index for more information.

CAUTION:

Batteries can hurt you. They can be dangerous because:

● They contain acid that can burn you.
● They contain gas that can explode or ignite.
● They contain enough electricity to burn you.

If you don't follow these steps exactly, some or all of these things can hurt you.

NOTICE:

Ignoring these steps could result in costly damage to your vehicle that wouldn't be covered by your warranty.

Trying to start your Pontiac by pushing or pulling it won't work, and it could damage your vehicle.

1. Check the other vehicle. It must have a 12-volt battery with a negative ground system.

NOTICE:

If the other system isn't a 12-volt system with a negative ground, both vehicles can be damaged.

Get the vehicles close enough so the jumper cables can reach, but be sure the vehicles aren't touching each other. If they are, it could cause a ground connection you don't want. You wouldn't be able to start your Pontiac, and the bad grounding could damage the electrical systems.

NOTICE:

To avoid the possibility of the vehicles rolling, set the parking brake firmly on both vehicles involved in the jump start procedure. Put an automatic transaxle in PARK (P).

1. Turn off the ignition on both vehicles. Unplug unnecessary accessories plugged into the cigarette lighter or accessory power outlet. Turn off all lamps that aren't needed as well as radios. This will avoid sparks and help save both batteries. In addition, it could save your radio!

NOTICE:

If you leave your radio on, it could be badly damaged. The repairs wouldn't be covered by your warranty.

1. Open the hoods and locate the batteries.

CAUTION:

An electric fan can start up even when the engine is not running and can injure you. Keep hands, clothing and tools away from any underhood electric fan.

1. Find the positive (+) and negative (-) terminals on each battery.

Interior view of a vehicle or industrial facility with large pipes and machinery (no visible text or symbols)

Your Pontiac has a remote positive (+) jump starting terminal. The terminal is under a tethered cap at the front of the underhood fuse and relay center. Pull up the cap to access the remote positive (+) terminal.

You should always use the remote positive (+) terminal instead of the positive (+) terminal on your battery.

CAUTION:

Using a match near a battery can cause battery gas to explode. People have been hurt doing this, and some have been blinded. Use a flashlight if you need more light.

Be sure the battery has enough water. You don't need to add water to the Delco Freedom® battery installed in every new GM vehicle. But if a battery has filler caps, be sure the right amount of fluid is there. If it is low, add water to take care of that first. If you don't, explosive gas could be present.

Battery fluid contains acid that can burn you. Don't get it on you. If you accidentally get it in your eyes or on your skin, flush the place with water and get medical help immediately.

CAUTION:

Fans or other moving engine parts can injure you badly. Keep your hands away from moving parts once the engine is running.

1. Connect the red positive (+) cable to the positive (+) terminal of the vehicle with the dead battery. Use a remote positive (+) terminal if the vehicle has one.

Close-up of a mechanical component with pipes and a circular base (no visible text or symbols)

1. Don't let the other end touch metal. Connect it to the positive (+) terminal of the good battery. Use a remote positive (+) terminal if the vehicle has one.

Close-up of a car's dashboard and steering wheel assembly (no visible text or symbols)

1. Now connect the black negative (-) cable to the good battery's negative (-) terminal.

Don't let the other end touch anything until the next step. The other end of the negative (-) cable doesn't go to the dead battery. It goes to a heavy unpainted metal part on the engine of the vehicle with the dead battery.

Industrial machinery setup with pipes and components (no visible text or symbols)

1. Attach the cable at least 18 inches (45 cm) away from the dead battery, but not near engine parts that move.

The electrical connection is just as good there, but the chance of sparks getting back to the battery is much less.

1. Now start the vehicle with the good battery and run the engine for a while.

2. Try to start the vehicle with the dead battery. If it won't start after a few tries, it probably needs service.

3. Remove the cables in reverse order to prevent electrical shorting. Take care that they don't touch each other or any other metal.

graph TD
    A["A"] -->|①| B["-B"]
    B -->|②| C["③"]
    B -->|④| D["-C"]
    D -->|④| B

A. Heavy Metal Engine Part

B. Good Battery

C. Dead Battery

Towing Your Vehicle

Try to have a GM dealer or a professional towing service tow your vehicle. They can provide the right equipment and know how to tow it without damage. See "Roadside Assistance" in the Index.

If your vehicle has been changed or modified since it was factory-new by adding aftermarket items like fog lamps, aero skirting, or special tires and wheels, these things can be damaged during towing.

Before you do anything, turn on the hazard warning flashers.

When you call, tell the towing service:

That your vehicle has front-wheel drive.
- That your vehicle cannot be towed from the front or rear with sling-type equipment.
The make, model and year of your vehicle.
Whether you can still move the shift lever.
- If there was an accident, what was damaged.

CAUTION:

To help avoid injury to you or others:

• Never let passengers ride in a vehicle that is being towed.
• Never tow faster than safe or posted speeds.
• Never tow with damaged parts not fully secured.
  Never get under your vehicle after it has been lifted by the tow truck.
  ● Always use separate safety chains on each side when towing a vehicle.
  Never use J-hooks. Use T-hooks instead.

CAUTION:

A vehicle can fall from a car carrier if it isn't adequately secured. This can cause a collision, serious personal injury and vehicle damage. The vehicle should be tightly secured with chains or steel cables before it is transported.

Don't use substitutes (ropes, leather straps, canvas webbing, etc.) that can be cut by sharp edges underneath the towed vehicle. Always use T-hooks inserted in the T-hook slots. Never use J-hooks. They will damage drivetrain and suspension components.

NOTICE:

If you are chaining or strapping the vehicle body to a trailer, you must pull the ELC fuse, in the instrument panel fuse block, before securing the vehicle. Damage to the shocks or leveling system may occur if the Electronic Level Control is not disabled.

When your vehicle is being towed, have the ignition key in the OFF position. The steering wheel should be clamped in a straight-ahead position, with a clamping device designed for towing service. Do not use the vehicle's steering column lock for this. The transaxle should be in NEUTRAL (N) and the parking brake released.

NOTICE:

Your vehicle has front-wheel drive; do not have it towed with the front wheels in contact with the ground or vehicle damage may occur. A dolly must be used under the front wheels when towing from the rear or the vehicle must be transported on a flat bed carrier.

Be careful not to damage brake fluid lines when securing the vehicle with safety chains.

Towing From the Front

Tow Limits -- 55 mph (80 km/h), 500 miles (800 km)

Line drawings of three vintage pickup trucks with no visible text or symbols

NOTICE:

Do not tow with sling-type equipment or the front bumper system will be damaged. Use wheel-lift or car-carrier equipment. Additional ramping may be required for car-carrier equipment. Use safety chains and wheel straps. Towing a vehicle over rough surfaces could damage a vehicle. Damage can occur from vehicle to ground or vehicle to wheel-lift equipment. To help avoid damage, install a towing dolly and raise the vehicle until adequate clearance is obtained between the ground and/or wheel-lift equipment.

Towing From the Rear

A towing dolly must be used under the front wheels when towing from the rear.

NOTICE:

Do not tow with sling-type equipment or the rear bumper system will be damaged. Use wheel-lift or car-carrier equipment. Additional ramping may be required for car-carrier equipment. Use safety chains and wheel straps.

Towing a vehicle over rough surfaces could damage a vehicle. Damage can occur from vehicle to ground or vehicle to wheel-lift equipment. To help avoid damage, install a towing dolly and raise the vehicle until adequate clearance is obtained between the ground and/or wheel-lift equipment.

Engine Overheating

You will find a coolant temperature gage on your Pontiac's instrument panel. See "Engine Coolant Temperature Gage" in the Index. You also have a low coolant level light on your instrument panel. See "Low Coolant Light" in the Index.

Overheated Engine Protection Operating Mode

Should a low coolant condition exist, an overheat protection mode which alternates firing groups of three cylinders helps prevent engine damage. In this mode, you will notice a significant loss in power and engine performance. The low coolant light may come on and the temperature gage will indicate an overheat condition exists. This emergency operating mode allows your vehicle to be driven to a safe place in an emergency. Towing a trailer in the overheat protection mode should be avoided.

NOTICE:

After driving in the overheated engine protection operating mode, to avoid engine damage, allow the engine to cool before attempting any repair. The engine oil will be severely degraded. Repair the cause of coolant loss and change the oil. See "Engine Oil, When to Change" in the Index.

If Steam Is Coming From Your Engine

Woman washing a car with a no-smoking symbol on the roof (no text or numbers visible)

CAUTION:

Steam from an overheated engine can burn you badly, even if you just open the hood. Stay away from the engine if you see or hear steam coming from it. Just turn it off and get everyone away from the vehicle until it cools down. Wait until there is no sign of steam or coolant before you open the hood.

If you keep driving when your engine is overheated, the liquids in it can catch fire. You or others could be badly burned. Stop your engine if it overheats, and get out of the vehicle until the engine is cool.

NOTICE:

If your engine catches fire because you keep driving with no coolant, your vehicle can be badly damaged. The costly repairs would not be covered by your warranty. See “Overheated Engine Protection Operating Mode” in the Index.

If No Steam Is Coming From Your Engine

If you get the overheat warning but see or hear no steam, the problem may not be too serious. Sometimes the engine can get a little too hot when you:

● Climb a long hill on a hot day.
- Stop after high-speed driving.
● Idle for long periods in traffic.
- Tow a trailer.

If you get the overheat warning with no sign of steam, try this for a minute or so:

1. Turn off your air conditioner.

2. Turn on your heater to full hot at the highest fan speed and open the window as necessary.

3. If you're in a traffic jam, shift to NEUTRAL (N); otherwise, shift to the highest gear while driving -- AUTOMATIC OVERDRIVE (D) or THIRD (3).

If you no longer have the overheat warning, you can drive. Just to be safe, drive slower for about 10 minutes. If the warning doesn't come back on, you can drive normally.

If the warning continues, pull over, stop, and park your vehicle right away.

If there's still no sign of steam, you can idle the engine for two or three minutes while you're parked, to see if the warning stops. But then, if you still have the warning, turn off the engine and get everyone out of the vehicle until it cools down. Also, see "Overheated Engine Protection Operating Mode" listed previously in this section.

You may decide not to lift the hood but to get service help right away.

When you decide it's safe to lift the hood, here's what you'll see:

A. Radiator Pressure Cap
B. Electric Engine Fan
C. Coolant Recovery Tank

CAUTION:

An electric fan under the hood can start up even when the engine is not running and can injure you. Keep hands, clothing and tools away from any underhood electric fan.

If the coolant inside the coolant recovery tank is boiling, don't do anything else until it cools down.

Close-up of a white plastic automotive engine compartment with visible hoses and components (no text or symbols)

The coolant level should be at or above the FULL HOT mark. If it isn't, you may have a leak in the radiator hoses, heater hoses, radiator, water pump or somewhere else in the cooling system.

CAUTION:

Heater and radiator hoses, and other engine parts, can be very hot. Don't touch them. If you do, you can be burned.

Don't run the engine if there is a leak. If you run the engine, it could lose all coolant. That could cause an engine fire, and you could be burned. Get any leak fixed before you drive the vehicle.

NOTICE:

Engine damage from running your engine without coolant isn't covered by your warranty.

If there seems to be no leak, with the engine on, check to see if the electric engine fans are running. If the engine is overheating, both fans should be running. If they aren't, your vehicle needs service.

How to Add Coolant to the Coolant Recovery Tank

If you haven't found a problem yet, but the coolant level isn't at or above the FULL HOT mark, add a 50/50 mixture of clean water (preferably distilled) and DEX-COOL® (silicate-free) antifreeze at the coolant recovery tank. (See "Engine Coolant" in the Index for more information.)

CAUTION:

Adding only plain water to your cooling system can be dangerous. Plain water, or some other liquid like alcohol, can boil before the proper coolant mix will. Your vehicle's coolant warning system is set for the proper coolant mix. With plain water or the wrong mix, your engine could get too hot but you wouldn't get the overheat warning. Your engine could catch fire and you or others could be burned. Use a 50/50 mix of clean water and DEX-COOL® coolant.

NOTICE:

In cold weather, water can freeze and crack the engine, radiator, heater core and other parts. Use the recommended coolant and the proper coolant mix.

Person pouring liquid into a car engine compartment (no visible text or symbols)

CAUTION:

You can be burned if you spill coolant on hot engine parts. Coolant contains ethylene glycol and it will burn if the engine parts are hot enough. Don't spill coolant on a hot engine.

When the coolant in the coolant recovery tank is at or above the FULL HOT mark, start your vehicle.

If the overheat warning continues, there's one more thing you can try. You can add the proper coolant mix directly to the radiator, but be sure the cooling system is cool before you do it.

CAUTION:

Steam and scalding liquids from a hot cooling system can blow out and burn you badly. They are under pressure, and if you turn the radiator pressure cap -- even a little -- they can come out at high speed. Never turn the cap when the cooling system, including the radiator pressure cap, is hot. Wait for the cooling system and the radiator pressure cap to cool if you ever have to turn the pressure cap.

Black-and-white photo of a person examining a car window with a no-smoking symbol (no text or numbers visible)

How to Add Coolant to the Radiator

Close-up of a mechanical component with a circular head and lever mechanism (no visible text or symbols)

1. You can remove the radiator pressure cap when the cooling system, including the radiator pressure cap and upper radiator hose, is no longer hot. Turn the pressure cap slowly counterclockwise until it first stops. (Don't press down while turning the pressure cap.)

If you hear a hiss, wait for that to stop. A hiss means there is still some pressure left.

Close-up of a mechanical component with arrows pointing to features, no visible text or symbols

1. Then keep turning the pressure cap, but now push down as you turn it. Remove the pressure cap.

Interior view of a vehicle engine bay with a person pouring liquid into a funnel (no visible text or symbols)

1. Fill the radiator with the proper DEX-COOL® coolant mixture, up to the base of the filler neck.

Close-up of a hand operating a mechanical component with no visible text or symbols

1. Start the engine and let it run until you can feel the upper radiator hose getting hot. Watch out for the engine fans.
2. By this time, the coolant level inside the radiator filler neck may be lower. If the level is lower, add more of the proper DEX-COOL® coolant mixture through the filler neck until the level reaches the base of the filler neck.

Close-up of a mechanical component with no visible text or symbols

1. Then replace the pressure cap. At any time during this procedure if coolant begins to flow out of the filler neck, reinstall the pressure cap. Be sure the arrows on the pressure cap line up like this.

Person pouring liquid into a car engine compartment (no visible text or symbols)

1. Then fill the coolant recovery tank to just below the words FULL COLD.

2. Put the cap back on the coolant recovery tank.

If a Tire Goes Flat

It's unusual for a tire to "blow out" while you're driving, especially if you maintain your tires properly. If air goes out of a tire, it's much more likely to leak out slowly. But if you should ever have a "blowout," here are a few tips about what to expect and what to do:

If a front tire fails, the flat tire will create a drag that pulls the vehicle toward that side. Take your foot off the accelerator pedal and grip the steering wheel firmly. Steer to maintain lane position, and then gently brake to a stop well out of the traffic lane.

A rear blowout, particularly on a curve, acts much like a skid and may require the same correction you'd use in a skid. In any rear blowout, remove your foot from the accelerator pedal. Get the vehicle under control by steering the way you want the vehicle to go. It may be very bumpy and noisy, but you can still steer. Gently brake to a stop -- well off the road if possible.

If a tire goes flat, the next part shows how to use your jacking equipment to change a flat tire safely.

Air Inflator (Option)

Your vehicle may have an air inflator used to bring tires up to the proper pressure. See “Air Inflator” in the Index for more details.

Changing a Flat Tire

If a tire goes flat, avoid further tire and wheel damage by driving slowly to a level place. Turn on your hazard warning flashers.

CAUTION:

Changing a tire can cause an injury. The vehicle can slip off the jack and roll over you or other people. You and they could be badly injured. Find a level place to change your tire. To help prevent the vehicle from moving:

1. Set the parking brake firmly.
2. Put the shift lever in PARK (P).
3. Turn off the engine.

To be even more certain the vehicle won't move, you can put blocks at the front and rear of the tire farthest away from the one being changed. That would be the tire on the other side of the vehicle, at the opposite end.

Black-and-white illustration of a vintage SUV driving on a dirt road with trees and a fence in the background (no text or symbols)

The following steps will tell you how to use the jack and change a tire.

Removing the Spare Tire and Tools

The equipment you'll need is in the storage compartment at the rear of the vehicle, on the passenger's side.

Interior view of a vehicle showing internal components and structural elements (no visible text or symbols)

Remove the side convenience nets. Open the jack storage compartment by lifting up the tab and pulling the cover off.

Remove the jack and jacking tools by loosening the wing nut and bracket.

Separate the plastic pouch from the jack and remove the jacking tools (folding wrench and shaft) from the pouch.

The compact spare tire is located under the vehicle, ahead of the rear bumper. Insert the narrow end of the shaft into the hole above the rear bumper. Then attach the folding wrench to the shaft.

Rotate the folding wrench counterclockwise to lower the compact spare tire until it can be pulled from under the vehicle.

Line drawing of a hand using a tool to adjust or install a car tire component (no text or symbols present)

Slide the cable retainer through the center of the spare, then place the compact spare tire near the flat tire.

Mechanical device with three labeled parts (A, B, C) showing different frame structures (no text or symbols on the components themselves)

The tools you'll be using include the jack (A), shaft (B) and folding wrench (C).

Removing the Flat Tire and Installing the Spare Tire

1. If your vehicle has aluminum wheels, each wheel nut is covered with a nylon cap. Use the folding wrench to completely remove the nylon caps from the wheel nuts before you loosen the nuts.

Close-up of mechanical components with bolts and a tool, no visible text or symbols

1. If your vehicle has the plastic "bolt-on" wheel covers, you cannot separate the nylon wheel nut caps from the cover. Loosen them completely using the folding wrench, and remove the wheel cover. If the wheel nut caps have been completely loosened, the wheel cover will come off easily.

Technical line drawing of a mechanical component with bolts and a pulley (no text or symbols)

1. Loosen the wheel nuts -- but do not remove them -- using the folding wrench. (Turn the handle about 180°, then flip the handle back to the starting position. This avoids taking the wrench off the lug nut for each turn.)

Technical line drawing of a mechanical assembly with a wheel and bracket (no text or symbols)

1. Near each wheel, there is a notch in the vehicle's body. Position the jack and raise the jack head until it fits firmly into the notch in the vehicle's frame nearest the flat tire.

NOTICE:

Do not place the jack under the rear axle control arms. Only use the areas shown for proper jack location.

Do not raise the vehicle yet. Put the compact spare tire near you.

CAUTION:

Getting under a vehicle when it is jacked up is dangerous. If the vehicle slips off the jack, you could be badly injured or killed. Never get under a vehicle when it is supported only by a jack.

Technical line drawing of a mechanical device with no visible text or symbols

1. Attach the folding wrench to the jack, and rotate the wrench clockwise to raise the jack head a few inches.

CAUTION:

Raising your vehicle with the jack improperly positioned can damage the vehicle and even make the vehicle fall. To help avoid personal injury and vehicle damage, be sure to fit the jack lift head into the proper location before raising your vehicle.

Raise the vehicle by rotating the folding wrench clockwise in the jack. Raise the vehicle far enough off the ground so there is enough room for the spare tire to fit.

1. Remove all the wheel nuts and take off the flat tire.

Line drawing of a hand adjusting a brake caliper on a car wheel (no text or symbols)

1. Remove any rust or dirt from the wheel bolts, mounting surfaces and spare wheel.

CAUTION:

Rust or dirt on the wheel, or on the parts to which it is fastened, can make the wheel nuts become loose after a time. The wheel could come off and cause an accident. When you change a wheel, remove any rust or dirt from the places where the wheel attaches to the vehicle. In an emergency, you can use a cloth or a paper towel to do this; but be sure to use a scraper or wire brush later, if you need to, to get all the rust or dirt off.

CAUTION:

Never use oil or grease on studs or nuts. If you do, the nuts might come loose. Your wheel could fall off, causing a serious accident.

1. Install spare tire and replace the wheel nuts with the rounded end of the nuts toward the wheel. Tighten each nut by hand until the wheel is held against the hub.

Technical line drawing of a car brake system with suspension components (no text or labels)

1. Lower the vehicle by attaching the folding wheel wrench to the jack and rotating the wrench counterclockwise. Lower the jack completely.

1. Tighten the wheel nuts firmly in a criss-cross sequence, as shown.

CAUTION:

Incorrect wheel nuts or improperly tightened wheel nuts can cause the wheel to become loose and even come off. This could lead to an accident. Be sure to use the correct wheel nuts. If you have to replace them, be sure to get new GM original equipment wheel nuts.

Stop somewhere as soon as you can and have the nuts tightened with a torque wrench to 100 lb-ft (140 N·m).

NOTICE:

Improperly tightened wheel nuts can lead to brake pulsation and rotor damage. To avoid expensive brake repairs, evenly tighten the wheel nuts in the proper sequence and to the proper torque specification.

1. Don't try to put a wheel cover on the compact spare tire. It won't fit. Store the wheel cover securely in the rear of the vehicle until you have the flat tire repaired or replaced.

NOTICE:

Wheel covers won't fit on your compact spare. If you try to put a wheel cover on your compact spare, you could damage the cover or the spare.

Storing a Flat or Spare Tire and Tools

CAUTION:

Storing a jack, a tire or other equipment in the passenger compartment of the vehicle could cause injury. In a sudden stop or collision, loose equipment could strike someone. Store all these in the proper place.

Lay the tire near the rear of the vehicle with the valve stem down. Remove the small center cap by tapping the back of the cap with the extension of the shaft. Slide the cable retainer through the center of the wheel and start to raise the tire. When the tire is almost in the stored position, turn the tire so the valve is towards the rear of the vehicle. This will help when you check and maintain tire pressure in the spare.

Keep raising the wheel until you hear the hoist mechanism click twice. This means the wheel is firmly stored against the underside of the vehicle. Push against the wheel to be sure it does not move and is stored securely.

Replace all jacking tools as they were stored in the jack storage compartment and replace the compartment cover. To replace the cover, line up the tabs on the right of the cover with the slots in the cover opening. Push the cover in place and push down the tab so that it rests in the groove. This secures the cover in place.

Unless you have the plastic "bolt-on" wheel covers, be sure to also store the nylon nut caps and the center cap. When you replace the compact spare with a full-size

tire, replace the bolt-on wheel covers or the nylon nut caps and the center cap. Tighten them "hand tight" over the wheel nuts, using the folding wrench.

Compact Spare Tire

Although the compact spare tire was fully inflated when your vehicle was new, it can lose air after a time. Check the inflation pressure regularly. It should be 60 psi (420 kPa).

After installing the compact spare on your vehicle, you should stop as soon as possible and make sure your spare tire is correctly inflated. The compact spare is made to perform well at speeds up to 65 mph (105 km/h) for distances up to 3,000 miles (5 000 km), so you can finish your trip and have your full-size tire repaired or replaced where you want. Of course, it's best to replace your spare with a full-size tire as soon as you can. Your spare will last longer and be in good shape in case you need it again.

NOTICE:

When the compact spare is installed, don't take your vehicle through an automatic car wash with guide rails. The compact spare can get caught on the rails. That can damage the tire and wheel, and maybe other parts of your vehicle.

Don't use your compact spare on other vehicles.

And don't mix your compact spare tire or wheel with other wheels or tires. They won't fit. Keep your spare tire and its wheel together.

NOTICE:

Tire chains won't fit your compact spare. Using them can damage your vehicle and can damage the chains too. Don't use tire chains on your compact spare.

If You're Stuck: In Sand, Mud, Ice or Snow

What you don't want to do when your vehicle is stuck is to spin your wheels too fast. The method known as "rocking" can help you get out when you're stuck, but you must use caution.

CAUTION:

If you let your tires spin at high speed, they can explode, and you or others could be injured. And, the transaxle or other parts of the vehicle can overheat. That could cause an engine compartment fire or other damage. When you're stuck, spin the wheels as little as possible. Don't spin the wheels above 35 mph (55 km/h) as shown on the speedometer.

NOTICE:

Spinning your wheels can destroy parts of your vehicle as well as the tires. If you spin the wheels too fast while shifting your transaxle back and forth, you can destroy your transaxle.

For information about using tire chains on your vehicle, see "Tire Chains" in the Index.

Rocking Your Vehicle To Get It Out

First, turn your steering wheel left and right. That will clear the area around your front wheels. If your vehicle has traction control, you should turn your traction control system off. (See "Traction Control System" in the Index.) Then shift back and forth between REVERSE (R) and a forward gear, spinning the wheels as little as possible. Release the accelerator pedal while you shift, and press lightly on the accelerator pedal when the transaxle is in gear. If that doesn't get you out after a few tries, you may need to be towed out. If you do need to be towed out, see "Towing Your Vehicle" in the Index.

NOTES

NOTES

NOTES

Section 6 Service and Appearance Care

Here you will find information about the care of your Pontiac. This section begins with service and fuel information, and then it shows how to check important fluid and lubricant levels. There is also technical information about your vehicle, and a part devoted to its appearance care.

6-2	Doing Your Own Service Work
6-3	What Kind of Fuel to Use
6-5	Using Fuel in Foreign Countries
6-5	Where to Put the Fuel and Filling the Tank
6-8	Checking Things Under the Hood
6-11	Checking Your Engine Oil
6-15	Air Clean
6-16	Pollen Filter
6-18	Automatic Transaxle Fluid
6-21	Engine Coolant
6-25	Power Steering Fluid
6-26	Where to Fill the Windshield Washer Fluid
6-27	Important Brake Information
6-30	Information on Your Vehicle's Battery
6-30	Tips on Vehicle Storage
6-31	Bulb Replacement Procedures
6-39	Windshield Wiper Blade Replacement
6-41	How and When to Check Tire Inflation

6-43	When it is Time to Buy New Tires
6-45	Wheel Alignment
6-48	Cleaning the Inside of Your Vehicle
6-51	Care of the Safety Belts
6-53	Cleaning the Outside of Your Vehicle
6-54	How to Clean Aluminum Wheels
6-55	Underbody Maintenance
6-56	Recommended Appearance Care Materials
6-57	Your Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)
6-58	The Electrical System
6-59	Fuses and Circuit Breakers
6-64	Replacement Bulb Types for Your Vehicle
6-64	Capacities and Specifications
6-64	Air Conditioning Specifications
6-65	Vehicle Dimensions
6-65	Normal Replacement Parts

Service

Your Pontiac dealer knows your vehicle best and wants you to be happy with it. We hope you'll go to your dealer for all your service needs. You'll get genuine GM parts and GM-trained and supported service people.

We hope you'll want to keep your GM vehicle all GM. Genuine GM parts have one of these marks:

Doing Your Own Service Work

If you want to do some of your own service work, you'll want to use the proper Pontiac Service Manual. It tells you much more about how to service your Pontiac than this manual can. To order the proper service manual, see "Service and Owner Publications" in the Index.

Your vehicle has an air bag system. Before attempting to do your own service work, see "Servicing Your Air Bag-Equipped Pontiac" in the Index.

You should keep a record with all parts receipts and list the mileage and the date of any service work you perform. See "Maintenance Record" in the Index.

CAUTION:

You can be injured and your vehicle could be damaged if you try to do service work on a vehicle without knowing enough about it.

• Be sure you have sufficient knowledge, experience, the proper replacement parts and tools before you attempt any vehicle maintenance task.
• Be sure to use the proper nuts, bolts and other fasteners. "English" and "metric" fasteners can be easily confused. If you use the wrong fasteners, parts can later break or fall off. You could be hurt.

Adding Equipment to the Outside of Your Vehicle

Things you might add to the outside of your vehicle can affect the airflow around it. This may cause wind noise and affect windshield washer performance. Check with your Pontiac dealer before adding equipment to the outside of your vehicle.

Fuel

Use regular unleaded gasoline rated at 87 octane or higher. At a minimum, it should meet specifications ASTM D4814 in the United States and CGSB 3.5-M93 in Canada. Improved gasoline specifications have been developed by the American Automobile Manufacturers Association (AAMA) for better vehicle performance and engine protection. Gasolines meeting the AAMA specification could provide improved driveability and emission control system protection compared to other gasolines.

Be sure the posted octane is at least 87. If the octane is less than 87, you may get a heavy knocking noise when you drive. If it's bad enough, it can damage your engine. If you're using fuel rated at 87 octane or higher and you hear heavy knocking, your engine needs service. But don't worry if you hear a little pinging noise when you're accelerating or driving up a hill. That's normal, and you don't have to buy a higher octane fuel to get rid of pinging. It's the heavy, constant knock that means you have a problem.

If your vehicle is certified to meet California Emission Standards (indicated on the underhood tune-up label), it is designed to operate on fuels that meet California specifications. If such fuels are not available in states adopting California emissions standards, your vehicle will operate satisfactorily on fuels meeting federal specifications, but emission control system performance may be affected. The malfunction indicator lamp on your instrument panel may turn on and/or your vehicle may fail a smog-check test. If this occurs, return to your authorized Pontiac dealer for diagnosis to determine the cause of failure. In the event it is determined that the cause of the condition is the type of fuels used, repairs may not be covered by your warranty.

Some gasolines that are not reformulated for low emissions contain an octane-enhancing additive called methylcyclopentadienyl manganese tricarbonyl (MMT); ask your service station operator whether or not his fuel contains MMT. General Motors does not recommend the use of such gasolines. If fuels containing MMT are used, spark plug life may be reduced and your emission control system performance may be affected. The malfunction indicator lamp on your instrument panel may turn on. If this occurs, return to your authorized Pontiac dealer for service.

To provide cleaner air, all gasolines in the United States are now required to contain additives that will help prevent deposits from forming in your engine and fuel system, allowing your emission control system to function properly. Therefore, you should not have to add anything to the fuel. In addition, gasolines

containing oxygenates, such as ethers and ethanol, and reformulated gasolines may be available in your area to help clean the air. General Motors recommends that you use these gasolines if they comply with the specifications described earlier.

NOTICE:

Your vehicle was not designed for fuel that contains methanol. Don't use it. It can corrode metal parts in your fuel system and also damage plastic and rubber parts. That damage wouldn't be covered under your warranty.

Fuels in Foreign Countries

If you plan on driving in another country outside the United States or Canada, the proper fuel may be hard to find. Never use leaded gasoline or any other fuel not recommended in the previous text on fuel. Costly repairs caused by use of improper fuel wouldn't be covered by your warranty.

To check on fuel availability, ask an auto club, or contact a major oil company that does business in the country where you'll be driving.

You can also write us at the following address for advice. Just tell us where you're going and give your Vehicle Identification Number (VIN).

General Motors International Product Center 1908 Colonel Sam Drive Oshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7

Filling Your Tank

When the fuel door is opened on a vehicle with dual sliding doors, the driver's side sliding door will only open partway.

Close-up of a metallic mechanical component with circular housing and mounting bracket (no visible text or symbols)

CAUTION:

Gasoline vapor is highly flammable. It burns violently, and that can cause very bad injuries. Don't smoke if you're near gasoline or refueling your vehicle. Keep sparks, flames and smoking materials away from gasoline.

Close-up of a mechanical switch or lever assembly mounted on a surface, with no visible text or symbols.

While refueling, hang the cap by the tether from the hook on the filler door hinge.

To take off the cap, turn it slowly to the left (counterclockwise).

CAUTION:

If you get gasoline on yourself and then something ignites it, you could be badly burned. Gasoline can spray out on you if you open the fuel filler cap too quickly. This spray can happen if your tank is nearly full, and is more likely in hot weather. Open the fuel filler cap slowly and wait for any "hiss" noise to stop. Then unscrew the cap all the way.

Be careful not to spill gasoline. Clean gasoline from painted surfaces as soon as possible. See "Cleaning the Outside of Your Pontiac" in the Index.

When you put the cap back on, turn it to the right (clockwise) until you hear a clicking sound. Make sure you fully install the cap. The diagnostic system can determine if the fuel cap has been left off or improperly installed. This would allow fuel to evaporate into the atmosphere. See “Malfunction Indicator Lamp” in the Index.

NOTICE:

If you need a new cap, be sure to get the right type. Your dealer can get one for you. If you get the wrong type, it may not fit properly. This may cause your malfunction indicator lamp to light and your fuel tank and emissions system may be damaged. See “Malfunction Indicator Lamp” in the Index.

Checking Things Under the Hood

CAUTION:

An electric fan under the hood can start up and injure you even when the engine is not running. Keep hands, clothing and tools away from any underhood electric fan.

CAUTION:

Things that burn can get on hot engine parts and start a fire. These include liquids like gasoline, oil, coolant, brake fluid, windshield washer and other fluids, and plastic or rubber. You or others could be burned. Be careful not to drop or spill things that will burn onto a hot engine.

Hood Release

Close-up of a car's side panel with a white logo on the cover (no visible text or symbols)

To open the hood, first pull the hood release handle inside the vehicle.

Line drawing of a hand cleaning a car grille with hexagonal patterns (no text or symbols)

Then go to the front of the vehicle and push up on the underhood release.

Lift the hood.

Close-up of a curved, elongated object against a cloudy sky background (no text or symbols visible)

The hood prop may be hot due to increased engine temperatures under the hood, so be careful when handling it. Use your hood prop sleeve when handling the hood prop.

When you lift the hood, you'll see these items:

A. Underhood Fuse and Relay Center
B. Remote Positive Terminal
C. Windshield Washer Fluid Reservoir
D. Radiator Pressure Cap
E. Power Steering Fluid Reservoir
F. Engine Oil Fill Location

G. Engine Oil Dipstick
H. Transaxle Fluid Dipstick
I. Brake Master Cylinder
J. Air Cleaner
K. Engine Coolant Recovery Tank

Pull forward on the hood prop to release it from its storage clip. Then put the end of the hood prop into the slot in the underside of the hood.

Before closing the hood, be sure all the filler caps are on properly. Then lift the hood to relieve pressure on the hood prop. Remove the hood prop from the slot in the hood and return the prop to its retainer. Then just let the hood down and close it firmly.

Underhood Lamp

Your underhood lamp will go on when you open the hood.

Engine Oil

OIL LEVEL

If the OIL LEVEL light on the instrument panel comes on, it means you need to check your engine oil level right away. For more information, see "Low Oil Level Light" in the Index. You should check your engine oil level regularly; this is an added reminder.

It's a good idea to check your engine oil every time you get fuel. In order to get an accurate reading, the oil must be warm and the vehicle must be on level ground.

Close-up of mechanical components including a white plastic bulb and metal parts, with no visible text or symbols.

The engine oil dipstick is located at the front of the engine compartment, near the center. The dipstick handle has a bright, yellow loop design for easy identification.

Turn off the engine and give the oil a few minutes to drain back into the oil pan. If you don't, the oil dipstick might not show the actual level.

Checking Engine Oil

Pull out the dipstick and clean it with a paper towel or cloth, then push it back in all the way. Remove it again, keeping the tip down, and check the level.

When to Add Oil

If the oil is at or below the ADD mark, then you'll need to add at least one quart of oil. But you must use the right kind. This part explains what kind of oil to use. For crankcase capacity, see "Capacities and Specifications" in the Index.

NOTICE:

Don't add too much oil. If your engine has so much oil that the oil level gets above the cross-hatched area that shows the proper operating range, your engine could be damaged.

The engine oil fill cap is located just behind the engine oil dipstick.

Be sure to fill it enough to put the level somewhere in the proper operating range. Push the dipstick all the way back in when you're through.

What Kind of Oil to Use

Oils recommended for your vehicle can be identified by looking for the "Starburst" symbol. This symbol indicates that the oil has been certified by the American Petroleum Institute (API). Do not use any oil which does not carry this Starburst symbol.

If you change your own oil, be sure you use oil that has the Starburst symbol on the front of the oil container. If you have your oil changed for you, be sure the oil put into your engine is American Petroleum Institute certified for gasoline engines.

You should also use the proper viscosity oil for your vehicle, as shown in the following chart:

As shown in the chart, SAE 5W-30 is best for your vehicle. However, you can use SAE 10W-30 if it's going to be 0^ F ( -18^ C) or above. These numbers on an oil container show its viscosity, or thickness. Do not use other viscosity oils, such as SAE 20W-50.

NOTICE:

Use only engine oil with the American Petroleum Institute Certified For Gasoline Engines "Starburst" symbol. Failure to use the recommended oil can result in engine damage not covered by your warranty.

GM Goodwrench ^® oil meets all the requirements for your vehicle.

If you are in an area where the temperature falls below -20^ ( -29^ ), consider using either an SAE 5W-30 synthetic oil or an SAE 0W-30 oil. Both will provide easier cold starting and better protection for your engine at extremely low temperatures.

Engine Oil Additives

Don't add anything to your oil. Your Pontiac dealer is ready to advise if you think something should be added.

When to Change Engine Oil

If any one of these is true for you, use the short trip/city maintenance schedule:

• Most trips are less than 5 to 10 miles (8 to 16 km). This is particularly important when outside temperatures are below freezing.
• Most trips include extensive idling (such as frequent driving in stop-and-go traffic).
  ● Most trips are through dusty areas.
• You frequently tow a trailer or use a carrier on top of your vehicle.
• The vehicle is used for delivery service, police, taxi or other commercial application.

Driving under these conditions causes engine oil to break down sooner. If any one of these is true for your vehicle, then you need to change your oil and filter every 3,000 miles (5 000 km) or 3 months -- whichever occurs first.

If none of them is true, use the long trip/highway maintenance schedule. Change the oil and filter every 7,500 miles (12 500 km) or 12 months -- whichever occurs first. Driving a vehicle with a fully warmed engine under highway conditions causes engine oil to break down slower.

What to Do with Used Oil

Did you know that used engine oil contains certain elements that may be unhealthy for your skin and could even cause cancer? Don't let used oil stay on your skin for very long. Clean your skin and nails with soap and water, or a good hand cleaner. Wash or properly throw away clothing or rags containing used engine oil. (See the manufacturer's warnings about the use and disposal of oil products.)

Used oil can be a real threat to the environment. If you change your own oil, be sure to drain all free-flowing oil from the filter before disposal. Don't ever dispose of oil by putting it in the trash, pouring it on the ground, into sewers, or into streams or bodies of water. Instead, recycle it by taking it to a place that collects used oil. If you have a problem properly disposing of your used oil, ask your dealer, a service station or a local recycling center for help.

Air Cleaner

Close-up of a dark, textured fabric or jacket with visible straps and straps (no text or symbols)

The air cleaner is located at the front of the engine compartment (on the left side of the vehicle), under the engine coolant reservoir.

Checking or Replacing the Air Cleaner

1. Unlatch the two hooks on top of the air cleaner housing.
2. Turn back the air inlet panel and rest it on top of the housing. The air intake tube is designed to flex back; you do not need to disconnect it.
3. After replacing the air cleaner filter, seat the tabs on the bottom of the panel into the slots at the bottom.
4. Latch the hooks to secure the panel in place. If the panel moves easily, check that the tabs are seated correctly in the slots.

CAUTION:

Operating the engine with the air cleaner off can cause you or others to be burned. The air cleaner not only cleans the air, it stops flame if the engine backfires. If it isn't there, and the engine backfires, you could be burned. Don't drive with it off, and be careful working on the engine with the air cleaner off.

NOTICE:

If the air cleaner is off, a backfire can cause a damaging engine fire. And, dirt can easily get into your engine, which will damage it. Always have the air cleaner in place when you're driving.

Passenger Compartment Air Filter Replacement

Your passenger compartment pollen filter traps most of the pollen from the air entering the vehicle and air circulated inside your vehicle. Like your vehicle's air filter, it may need to be changed periodically. For how often to change the pollen filter, see "Maintenance Schedule" in the Index.

The access panel for the pollen filter is in the back of the glove box.

1. Pull the tab up and out on the outer access panel.

Interior view of a mechanical or electronic component with a white arrow pointing to a specific part (no visible text or symbols)

1. Then squeeze the tab on the left of the inner access panel.

2. The first pollen filter will pull straight out. To remove the second, reach in and slide it towards the opening. Pull the second filter out.

Close-up of a mechanical assembly with metallic components and mounting brackets (no visible text or symbols)

1. Replace the filters by reversing Step 3. Make sure the filters are inserted so that the sealing foam is angled in the same direction on both filters. For the type of filter to use, see "Normal Replacement Parts" in the Index.
2. Close the inner access door, while squeezing the tab, to be sure it is tightly closed.
3. Snap the outer access panel into the back of the glove box.

Automatic Transaxle Fluid

When to Check and Change

A good time to check your automatic transaxle fluid level is when the engine oil is changed.

Change both the fluid and filter every 50,000 miles (83 000 km) if the vehicle is mainly driven under one or more of these conditions:

• In heavy city traffic where the outside temperature regularly reaches 90°F (32°C) or higher.
  In hilly or mountainous terrain.
  ● When doing frequent trailer towing.
  • Uses such as found in taxi, police or delivery service.

If you do not use your vehicle under any of these conditions, the fluid and filter do not require changing.

See "Scheduled Maintenance Services" in the Index.

How to Check

Because this operation can be a little difficult, you may choose to have this done at your Pontiac dealership Service Department.

If you do it yourself, be sure to follow all the instructions here, or you could get a false reading on the dipstick.

NOTICE:

Too much or too little fluid can damage your transaxle. Too much can mean that some of the fluid could come out and fall on hot engine parts or exhaust system parts, starting a fire. Be sure to get an accurate reading if you check your transaxle fluid.

Wait at least 30 minutes before checking the transaxle fluid level if you have been driving:

• When outside temperatures are above 90^ (32°C).
  ● At high speed for quite a while.
• In heavy traffic -- especially in hot weather.
  ● While pulling a trailer.

To get the right reading, the fluid should be at normal operating temperature, which is 180^ F to 200^ F ( 82^ C to 93^ C).

Get the vehicle warmed up by driving about 15 miles (24 km) when outside temperatures are above 50°F (10°C). If it's colder than 50°F (10°C), you may have to drive longer.

Checking the Fluid Level

● Park your vehicle on a level place. Keep the engine running.
● With the parking brake applied, place the shift lever in PARK (P).
- With your foot on the brake pedal, move the shift lever through each gear range, pausing for about three seconds in each range. Then, position the shift lever in PARK (P).
- Let the engine run at idle for three to five minutes.

Then, without shutting off the engine, follow these steps:

Close-up of mechanical components including hoses and a valve (no visible text or symbols)

1. The dipstick is located toward the back of the engine compartment, near the center. The dipstick has a bright red loop design for easy identification. Pull out the dipstick and wipe it with a clean rag or paper towel.
2. Push it back in all the way, wait three seconds and then pull it back out again.

1. Check both sides of the dipstick, and read the lower level. The fluid level must be in the cross-hatched area.
2. If the fluid level is in the acceptable range, push the dipstick back in all the way.

How to Add Fluid

Refer to the Maintenance Schedule to determine what kind of transaxle fluid to use. See “Recommended Fluids and Lubricants” in the Index.

If the fluid level is low, add only enough of the proper fluid to bring the level into the cross-hatched area on the dipstick.

1. Pull out the dipstick.
2. Using a long-neck funnel, add enough fluid at the dipstick hole to bring it to the proper level.
   It doesn't take much fluid, generally less than one pint (0.5 L). Don't overfill.

NOTICE:

We recommend you use only fluid labeled DEXRON ^® -III, because fluid with that label is made especially for your automatic transaxle. Damage caused by fluid other than DEXRON-III is not covered by your new vehicle warranty.

1. After adding fluid, recheck the fluid level as described under "How to Check."
2. When the correct fluid level is obtained, push the dipstick back in all the way.

Engine Coolant

The cooling system in your vehicle is filled with DEX-COOL ^® engine coolant. This coolant is designed to remain in your vehicle for 5 years or 150,000 miles (240 000 km), whichever occurs first if you add only DEX-COOL ^® extended life coolant.

The following explains your cooling system and how to add coolant when it is low. If you have a problem with engine overheating, see “Engine Overheating” in the Index.

A 50/50 mixture of water and DEX-COOL ^® coolant will:

● Give freezing protection down to -34^ F ( -37^ C).
● Give boiling protection up to 265°F (129°C).
● Protect against rust and corrosion.
● Help keep the proper engine temperature.
- Let the warning lights and gages work as they should.

NOTICE:

When adding coolant, it is important that you use only DEX-COOL ^® (silicate-free) coolant. If coolant other than DEX-COOL ^® is added to the system, premature engine, heater core or radiator corrosion may result. In addition, the engine coolant will require change sooner -- at 30,000 miles (50 000 km) or 24 months, whichever occurs first. Damage caused by the use of coolant other than DEX-COOL ^® is not covered by your new vehicle warranty.

What to Use

Use a mixture of one-half clean water (preferably distilled) and one-half DEX-COOL ^® coolant which won't damage aluminum parts. If you use this mixture, you don't need to add anything else.

CAUTION:

Adding only plain water to your cooling system can be dangerous. Plain water, or some other liquid like alcohol, can boil before the proper coolant mix will. Your vehicle's coolant warning system is set for the proper coolant mix. With plain water or the wrong mix, your engine could get too hot but you wouldn't get the overheat warning. Your engine could catch fire and you or others could be burned. Use a 50/50 mix of clean water and DEX-COOL® coolant.

NOTICE:

If you use an improper coolant mix, your engine could overheat and be badly damaged. The repair cost wouldn't be covered by your warranty. Too much water in the mix can freeze and crack the engine, radiator, heater core and other parts.

If you have to add coolant more than four times a year, have your dealer check your cooling system.

NOTICE:

If you use the proper coolant, you don't have to add extra inhibitors or additives which claim to improve the system. These can be harmful.

Checking Coolant

The engine coolant reservoir is located on the driver's side of the vehicle, above the air cleaner.

Close-up of a white plastic water heater component with a black handle, mounted on a metal frame (no visible text or symbols)

When your engine is cold, the coolant level should be at FULL COLD, or a little higher. When your engine is warm, the level should be up to FULL HOT, or a little higher.

Simple diagram showing a downward arrow inside a rectangular container with wavy bottom (no text or symbols)

If this light comes on, it means you're low on engine coolant.

Adding Coolant

If you need more coolant, add the proper DEX-COOL® coolant mixture at the coolant recovery tank.

CAUTION:

Turning the radiator pressure cap when the engine and radiator are hot can allow steam and scalding liquids to blow out and burn you badly. With the coolant recovery tank, you will almost never have to add coolant at the radiator. Never turn the radiator pressure cap -- even a little -- when the engine and radiator are hot.

Add coolant mixture at the recovery tank, but be careful not to spill it.

CAUTION:

You can be burned if you spill coolant on hot engine parts. Coolant contains ethylene glycol, and it will burn if the engine parts are hot enough. Don't spill coolant on a hot engine.

Radiator Pressure Cap

NOTICE:

Your radiator cap is a 15 psi (105 kPa) pressure-type cap and must be tightly installed to prevent coolant loss and possible engine damage from overheating. Be sure the arrows on the cap line up with the overflow tube on the radiator filler neck.

When you replace your radiator pressure cap, an AC ^® cap is recommended.

Thermostat

Engine coolant temperature is controlled by a thermostat in the engine coolant system. The thermostat stops the flow of coolant through the radiator until the coolant reaches a preset temperature.

When you replace your thermostat, an AC ^® thermostat is recommended.

Power Steering Fluid

Close-up of a hand adjusting a mechanical component with a bolt, no visible text or symbols

The power steering fluid reservoir is located to the right of the windshield washer fluid reservoir, at the back of the engine compartment.

When to Check Power Steering Fluid

It is not necessary to regularly check power steering fluid unless you suspect there is a leak in the system or you hear an unusual noise. A fluid loss in this system could indicate a problem. Have the system inspected and repaired.

How To Check Power Steering Fluid

When the engine compartment is cool, wipe the cap and the top of the reservoir clean, then unscrew the cap and wipe the dipstick with a clean rag. Replace the cap and completely tighten it. Then remove the cap again and look at the fluid level on the dipstick.

When the engine compartment is hot, the level should be at the H mark. When it's cold, the level should be at the C mark. If the fluid is at the ADD mark, you should add fluid.

What to Use

To determine what kind of fluid to use, see "Recommended Fluids and Lubricants" in the Index. Always use the proper fluid. Failure to use the proper fluid can cause leaks and damage hoses and seals.

Windshield Washer Fluid

What to Use

When you need windshield washer fluid, be sure to read the manufacturer's instructions before use. If you will be operating your vehicle in an area where the temperature may fall below freezing, use a fluid that has sufficient protection against freezing.

Adding Washer Fluid

Interior view of a dimly lit room with a person standing near a vehicle (no visible text or symbols)

The windshield washer fluid reservoir is located on the passenger's side of the vehicle, near the fuse and relay center.

Open the cap labeled WASHER FLUID ONLY. Add washer fluid until the tank is full.

NOTICE:

• When using concentrated washer fluid, follow the manufacturer's instructions for adding water.
• Don't mix water with ready-to-use washer fluid. Water can cause the solution to freeze and damage your washer fluid tank and other parts of the washer system. Also, water doesn't clean as well as washer fluid.
• Fill your washer fluid tank only three-quarters full when it's very cold. This allows for expansion, which could damage the tank if it is completely full.
• Don't use radiator antifreeze in your windshield washer. It can damage your washer system and paint.

Brakes

Brake Fluid

Close-up of internal engine components including barrels, hoses, and a battery (no visible text or symbols)

Your brake master cylinder reservoir is here. It is filled with DOT-3 brake fluid.

There are only two reasons why the brake fluid level in the reservoir might go down. The first is that the brake fluid goes down to an acceptable level during normal brake

lining wear. When new linings are put in, the fluid level goes back up. The other reason is that fluid is leaking out of the brake system. If it is, you should have your brake system fixed, since a leak means that sooner or later your brakes won't work well, or won't work at all.

So, it isn't a good idea to "top off" your brake fluid. Adding brake fluid won't correct a leak. If you add fluid when your linings are worn, then you'll have too much fluid when you get new brake linings. You should add (or remove) brake fluid, as necessary, only when work is done on the brake hydraulic system.

CAUTION:

If you have too much brake fluid, it can spill on the engine. The fluid will burn if the engine is hot enough. You or others could be burned, and your vehicle could be damaged. Add brake fluid only when work is done on the brake hydraulic system.

BRAKE

When your brake fluid falls to a low level, your brake warning light will come on. See “Brake System Warning Light” in the Index.

What to Add

When you do need brake fluid, use only DOT-3 brake fluid -- such as Delco Supreme 11 ^® (GM Part No. 12377967). Use new brake fluid from a sealed container only.

Always clean the brake fluid reservoir cap and the area around the cap before removing it. This will help keep dirt from entering the reservoir.

CAUTION:

With the wrong kind of fluid in your brake system, your brakes may not work well, or they may not even work at all. This could cause a crash. Always use the proper brake fluid.

NOTICE:

• Using the wrong fluid can badly damage brake system parts. For example, just a few drops of mineral-based oil, such as engine oil, in your brake system can damage brake system parts so badly that they'll have to be replaced. Don't let someone put in the wrong kind of fluid.
• If you spill brake fluid on your vehicle's painted surfaces, the paint finish can be damaged. Be careful not to spill brake fluid on your vehicle. If you do, wash it off immediately. See "Appearance Care" in the Index.

Brake Wear

Your Pontiac has front disc brakes and rear drum brakes.

Disc brake pads have built-in wear indicators that make a high-pitched warning sound when the brake pads are worn and new pads are needed. The sound may come and go or be heard all the time your vehicle is moving (except when you are pushing on the brake pedal firmly).

CAUTION:

The brake wear warning sound means that soon your brakes won't work well. That could lead to an accident. When you hear the brake wear warning sound, have your vehicle serviced.

NOTICE:

Continuing to drive with worn-out brake pads could result in costly brake repair.

Some driving conditions or climates may cause a brake squeal when the brakes are first applied or lightly applied. This does not mean something is wrong with your brakes.

Properly torqued wheel nuts are necessary to help prevent brake pulsation. When tires are rotated, inspect brake pads for wear and evenly torque wheel nuts in the proper sequence to GM specifications.

Your rear drum brakes don't have wear indicators, but if you ever hear a rear brake rubbing noise, have the rear brake linings inspected. Also, the rear brake drums should be removed and inspected each time the tires are removed for rotation or changing. When you have the front brake pads replaced, have the rear brakes inspected, too.

Brake linings should always be replaced as complete axle sets.

See "Brake System Inspection" in Section 7 of this manual under Part C, "Periodic Maintenance Inspections."

Brake Pedal Travel

See your dealer if the brake pedal does not return to normal height, or if there is a rapid increase in pedal travel. This could be a sign of brake trouble.

Brake Adjustment

Every time you apply the brakes, with or without the vehicle moving, your brakes adjust for wear.

Replacing Brake System Parts

The braking system on a modern vehicle is complex. Its many parts have to be of top quality and work well together if the vehicle is to have really good braking. Your vehicle was designed and tested with top-quality GM brake parts. When you replace parts of your braking system -- for example, when your brake linings wear down and you have to have new ones put in -- be sure you get new approved GM replacement parts. If you don't, your brakes may no longer work properly. For example, if someone puts in brake linings that are wrong for your vehicle, the balance between your front and rear brakes can change -- for the worse. The braking performance you've come to expect can change in many other ways if someone puts in the wrong replacement brake parts.

Battery

Every new Pontiac has a Delco Freedom® battery. You never have to add water to one of these. When it's time for a new battery, we recommend a Delco Freedom battery. Get one that has the replacement number shown on the original battery's label.

Vehicle Storage

If you're not going to drive your vehicle for 25 days or more, take off the black, negative (-) cable from the battery. This will help keep your battery from running down.

CAUTION:

Batteries have acid that can burn you and gas that can explode. You can be badly hurt if you aren't careful. See "Jump Starting" in the Index for tips on working around a battery without getting hurt.

Contact your dealer to learn how to prepare your vehicle for longer storage periods.

Also, for your audio system, see "Theft-Deterrent Feature" in the Index.

Jump Starting

For jump starting instructions, see "Jump Starting" in the Index.

Bulb Replacement

For the type of bulbs, see "Replacement Bulbs" in the Index.

Halogen Bulbs

CAUTION:

Halogen bulbs have pressurized gas inside and can burst if you drop or scratch the bulb. You or others could be injured. Be sure to read and follow the instructions on the bulb package.

Headlamps

1. Open the hood.
2. Remove the front parking/turn signal lamp assembly. See "Front Parking/Turn Signal Lamps" later in this section.

Close-up of mechanical components with a white arrow pointing to a specific part (no visible text or symbols)

1. Remove the two wing nuts located on top of the headlamp assembly.

Close-up of a car engine bay with visible structural components and two white arrows pointing to specific parts (no text or symbols present)

1. Unscrew the black retainer ring that holds the bulb assembly in place, and pull the bulb assembly out of the lamp housing.

Close-up of a hand using a tool to adjust or install a mechanical component (no visible text or symbols)

1. Unhook the electrical connector by lifting up the blue tabs and pulling the bulb out.
2. Replace the new bulb through the black retainer ring and into the electrical connector. Push the bulb firmly enough so that the blue tabs hook over the tab on the bulb.

Close-up of hands assembling a mechanical component (no visible text or symbols)

Close-up of hands operating a mechanical device with a tool and component (no visible text or symbols)

1. Carefully put the bulb assembly back into the lamp housing and tighten the black retainer ring in place. Be careful not to damage the bulb on the headlamp aiming bar.

Close-up of mechanical components with coiled tubing and a white arrow pointing to a bolted part (no visible text or symbols)

1. Align the pins on the bottom of the headlamp assembly with the holes in the lamp support bracket while placing the holes in the assembly over the bolts where the wing nuts attach.
2. Replace and tighten the wing nuts.
3. Replace the parking/turn signal lamp assembly by lining up the tabs at the back of the assembly with the holes in the fender.
4. Tighten the bolt connecting the parking/turn signal lamp assembly. Be sure the tab from the parking/turn signal lamp assembly is inboard of the tab from the headlamp assembly.

Front Parking/Turn Signal Lamps

1. Open the hood.
2. Remove the thumb screw attaching the parking/turn signal lamp assembly to the headlamp assembly.

Close-up of mechanical components with a white arrow pointing to a specific part (no visible text or symbols)

1. Pull the parking/turn signal lamp assembly away from the body.

2. Unscrew the bulb sockets from the lamp assembly by pressing the tab while turning counterclockwise.

Close-up of hands adjusting a mechanical component with a tool (no visible text or symbols)

1. Replace the bulb by pulling the old one out and gently pushing the new one into the lamp socket.

2. Line up the tabs on the sockets with the gaps in the socket holes and screw the bulb sockets back into the lamp housing until an audible click is heard (the tab popping back out).

Close-up of a mechanical component with textured surfaces and a small inset view (no visible text or symbols)

1. To replace the lamp assembly, line up and insert the tabs on the back of the assembly with the slots in the fender. Engage the lower clip on the front of the lamp assembly, keeping the upper tab on the parking/turn signal lamp assembly inboard of the headlamp bracket tab.
2. To align the parking/turn signal lamp assembly with the headlamp assembly, lift up the parking/turn signal lamp assembly until the upper edge is contacting the fender.
3. Fasten the parking/turn signal lamp assembly to the headlamp assembly with the thumb screw used in Step 1.

Front Sidemarker

1. Open the hood.
2. Remove the thumb screw attaching the parking/turn signal lamp assembly to the headlamp assembly.

Close-up of mechanical components with a white arrow pointing to a detail (no visible text or symbols)

1. Pull the parking/turn signal lamp assembly away from the body.

2. Unscrew the bulb sockets from the lamp assembly by turning counterclockwise.

Close-up of hands using a tool to apply liquid into a container (no visible text or symbols)

1. Replace the bulb by pulling the old one out and gently pushing the new one into the lamp socket.
2. Line up the tabs on the sockets with the gaps in the socket holes and screw the bulb sockets back into the lamp housing.

Close-up of a metallic mechanical component with textured surface and side brackets (no visible text or symbols)

1. To replace the lamp assembly, line up and insert the tabs on the back of the assembly with the slots in the fender. Engage the lower clip on the front of the lamp assembly, keeping upper tab on the parking/turn signal lamp assembly inboard of the headlamp bracket tab.

2. To align the parking/turn signal lamp assembly with the headlamp assembly, lift up the parking/turn signal lamp assembly until the upper edge is contacting the fender.

3. Fasten the parking/turn signal lamp assembly to the headlamp assembly with the thumb screw used in Step 1.

Taillamps

1. Open the liftgate.
2. Remove the two screws from the taillamp housing on the inboard side.
3. Pull off the entire taillamp housing. The locator/retaining pins on the outboard side are part of the lamp assembly and will remain intact during removal.

Close-up of hands adjusting a mechanical component with two white arrows pointing to features (no visible text or symbols)

1. Remove the bulb holder by pressing the four retaining tabs and pulling the holder away from the assembly.

2. Replace the bulb(s) by pulling the old one(s) out and gently pushing the new one(s) into the bulb holder socket.

A. Tail bulb

C. Signal bulb

B. Back-up bulb

D. Stop/tail bulb

1. Snap the bulb holder back into place ensuring all retaining tabs are properly over the bulb holder tabs.
2. Reinstall the taillamp assembly by inserting the outboard locating/retaining pins until the lamp is seated. Secure with the inboard screws.

For any bulb changing procedure not listed in this section, contact your Pontiac dealer service department.

Windshield Wiper Blade Replacement

Close-up of a hand holding a black cable or wire against a plain background (no text or symbols visible)

Replacement blades for your vehicle are 24 inches (60 cm) in length. They come in different types and are removed in different ways. Here's how to remove the type with a release clip:

1. Turn the wipers on to the lowest intermittent setting.

2. Turn off the ignition while the wipers are at the outer positions of the wipe pattern. The blades are more accessible for removal/replacement while in this position.

3. Pull the windshield wiper arm away from the windshield or backglass.

4. While holding the wiper arm away from the glass, push the release clip from under the blade connecting point and pull the blade assembly down towards the glass to remove it from the wiper arm.

5. Push the new wiper blade securely on the wiper arm until you hear the release clip "click" into place.

Tires

Your new Pontiac comes with high-quality tires made by a leading tire manufacturer. If you ever have questions about your tire warranty and where to obtain service, see your Pontiac Warranty booklet for details.

CAUTION:

Poorly maintained and improperly used tires are dangerous.

- Overloading your tires can cause overheating as a result of too much friction. You could have an air-out and a serious accident. See “Loading Your Vehicle” in the Index.

CAUTION: (Continued)

CAUTION: (Continued)

• Underinflated tires pose the same danger as overloaded tires. The resulting accident could cause serious injury. Check all tires frequently to maintain the recommended pressure. Tire pressure should be checked when your tires are cold.
• Overinflated tires are more likely to be cut, punctured or broken by a sudden impact -- such as when you hit a pothole. Keep tires at the recommended pressure.
• Worn, old tires can cause accidents. If your tread is badly worn, or if your tires have been damaged, replace them.

Inflation -- Tire Pressure

The Certification/Tire label, which is on the rear edge of the driver's door, shows the correct inflation pressures for your tires when they're cold. "Cold" means your vehicle has been sitting for at least three hours or driven no more than 1 mile (1.6 km).

NOTICE:

Don't let anyone tell you that underinflation or overinflation is all right. It's not. If your tires don't have enough air (underinflation), you can get the following:

• Too much flexing
• Too much heat
• Tire overloading
• Bad wear
• Bad handling
  ● Bad fuel economy.

NOTICE: (Continued)

NOTICE: (Continued)

If your tires have too much air (overinflation), you can get the following:

• Unusual wear
• Bad handling
• Rough ride
  ● Needless damage from road hazards.

When to Check

Check your tires once a month or more.

Don't forget your compact spare tire. It should be at 60 psi (420 kPa).

How to Check

Use a good quality pocket-type gage to check tire pressure. You can't tell if your tires are properly inflated simply by looking at them. Radial tires may look properly inflated even when they're underinflated.

Be sure to put the valve caps back on the valve stems.

They help prevent leaks by keeping out dirt and moisture.

Tire Inspection and Rotation

Tires should be rotated every 6,000 to 8,000 miles (10 000 to 13 000 km). Any time you notice unusual wear, rotate your tires as soon as possible and check wheel alignment. Also check for damaged tires or wheels. See “When It’s Time for New Tires” and “Wheel Replacement” later in this section for more information.

The purpose of regular rotation is to achieve more uniform wear for all tires on the vehicle. The first rotation is the most important. See “Scheduled Maintenance Services” in the Index for scheduled rotation intervals.

graph TD
    A[" "] --> B[" "]
    A[" "] --> C[" "]
    A[" "] --> D[" "]
    B[" "] --> C[" "]
    B[" "] --> D[" "]
    C[" "] --> D[" "]
    style A fill:#000,stroke:#000
    style B fill:#000,stroke:#000
    style C fill:#000,stroke:#000
    style D fill:#000,stroke:#000
    linkStyle 0 stroke:#000,stroke-width:2px
    linkStyle 1 stroke:#000,stroke-width:2px
    linkStyle 2 stroke:#000,stroke-width:2px
    linkStyle 3 stroke:#000,stroke-width:2px
    linkStyle 4 stroke:#000,stroke-width:2px

When rotating your tires, always use the correct rotation pattern shown here.

Don't include the compact spare tire in your tire rotation.

After the tires have been rotated, adjust the front and rear inflation pressures as shown on the Certification/Tire label. Make certain that all wheel nuts are properly tightened. See “Wheel Nut Torque” in the Index.

CAUTION:

Rust or dirt on a wheel, or on the parts to which it is fastened, can make wheel nuts become loose after a time. The wheel could come off and cause an accident. When you change a wheel, remove any rust or dirt from places where the wheel attaches to the vehicle. In an emergency, you can use a cloth or a paper towel to do this; but be sure to use a scraper or wire brush later, if you need to, to get all the rust or dirt off. (See "Changing a Flat Tire" in the Index.)

When It's Time for New Tires

Technical line drawing of a tire with textured surface and side gap (no text or symbols)

One way to tell when it's time for new tires is to check the treadwear indicators, which will appear when your tires have only 1/16 inch (1.6 mm) or less of tread remaining.

You need a new tire if any of the following statements are true:

• You can see the indicators at three or more places around the tire.
• You can see cord or fabric showing through the tire's rubber.
• The tread or sidewall is cracked, cut or snagged deep enough to show cord or fabric.

● The tire has a bump, bulge or split.
- The tire has a puncture, cut or other damage that can't be repaired well because of the size or location of the damage.

Buying New Tires

To find out what kind and size of tires you need, look at the Certification/Tire label.

The tires installed on your vehicle when it was new had a Tire Performance Criteria Specification (TPC Spec) number on each tire's sidewall. When you get new tires, get ones with that same TPC Spec number. That way your vehicle will continue to have tires that are designed to give proper endurance, handling, speed rating, traction, ride and other things during normal service on your vehicle. If your tires have an all-season tread design, the TPC number will be followed by an "MS" (for mud and snow).

If you ever replace your tires with those not having a TPC Spec number, make sure they are the same size, load range, speed rating and construction type (bias, bias-belted or radial) as your original tires.

CAUTION:

Mixing tires could cause you to lose control while driving. If you mix tires of different sizes or types (radial and bias-belted tires), the vehicle may not handle properly, and you could have a crash.

Using tires of different sizes may also cause damage to your vehicle. Be sure to use the same size and type tires on all wheels.

It's all right to drive with your compact spare, though. It was developed for use on your vehicle.

Uniform Tire Quality Grading

The following information relates to the system developed by the United States National Highway Traffic Safety Administration, which grades tires by treadwear, traction and temperature performance. (This applies only to vehicles sold in the United States.) The grades are molded on the sidewalls of most passenger

car tires. The Uniform Tire Quality Grading system does not apply to deep tread, winter-type snow tires, space-saver or temporary use spare tires, tires with nominal rim diameters of 10 to 12 inches (25 to 30 cm), or to some limited-production tires.

While the tires available on General Motors passenger cars and light trucks may vary with respect to these grades, they must also conform to Federal safety requirements and additional General Motors Tire Performance Criteria (TPC) standards.

Treadwear

The treadwear grade is a comparative rating based on the wear rate of the tire when tested under controlled conditions on a specified government test course. For example, a tire graded 150 would wear one and a half (1 1/2) times as well on the government course as a tire graded 100. The relative performance of tires depends upon the actual conditions of their use, however, and may depart significantly from the norm due to variations in driving habits, service practices and differences in road characteristics and climate.

Traction -- A, B, C

The traction grades, from highest to lowest, are A, B, and C, and they represent the tire's ability to stop on wet pavement as measured under controlled conditions on specified government test surfaces of asphalt and concrete. A tire marked C may have poor traction performance.

Warning: The traction grade assigned to this tire is based on braking (straightahead) traction tests and does not include cornering (turning) traction.

Temperature -- A, B, C

The temperature grades are A (the highest), B, and C, representing the tire's resistance to the generation of heat and its ability to dissipate heat when tested under controlled conditions on a specified indoor laboratory test wheel. Sustained high temperature can cause the material of the tire to degenerate and reduce tire life, and excessive temperature can lead to sudden tire failure. The grade C corresponds to a level of performance which all passenger car tires must meet under the Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard No. 109. Grades B and A represent higher levels of performance on the laboratory test wheel than the minimum required by law.

Warning: The temperature grade for this tire is established for a tire that is properly inflated and not overloaded. Excessive speed, underinflation, or excessive loading, either separately or in combination, can cause heat buildup and possible tire failure.

Wheel Alignment and Tire Balance

The wheels on your vehicle were aligned and balanced carefully at the factory to give you the longest tire life and best overall performance.

Scheduled wheel alignment and wheel balancing are not needed. However, if you notice unusual tire wear or your vehicle pulling one way or the other, the alignment may need to be reset. If you notice your vehicle vibrating when driving on a smooth road, your wheels may need to be rebalanced.

Wheel Replacement

Replace any wheel that is bent, cracked, or badly rusted or corroded. If wheel nuts keep coming loose, the wheel, wheel bolts and wheel nuts should be replaced. If the wheel leaks air, replace it (except some aluminum wheels, which can sometimes be repaired). See your Pontiac dealer if any of these conditions exist.

Your dealer will know the kind of wheel you need.

Each new wheel should have the same load-carrying capacity, diameter, width, offset and be mounted the same way as the one it replaces.

If you need to replace any of your wheels, wheel bolts or wheel nuts, replace them only with new GM original equipment parts. This way, you will be sure to have the right wheel, wheel bolts and wheel nuts for your Pontiac model.

CAUTION:

Using the wrong replacement wheels, wheel bolts or wheel nuts on your vehicle can be dangerous. It could affect the braking and handling of your vehicle, make your tires lose air and make you lose control. You could have a collision in which you or others could be injured. Always use the correct wheel, wheel bolts and wheel nuts for replacement.

NOTICE:

The wrong wheel can also cause problems with bearing life, brake cooling, speedometer or odometer calibration, headlamp aim, bumper height, vehicle ground clearance and tire or tire chain clearance to the body and chassis.

See "Changing a Flat Tire" in the Index for more information.

Used Replacement Wheels

CAUTION:

Putting a used wheel on your vehicle is dangerous. You can't know how it's been used or how far it's been driven. It could fail suddenly and cause an accident. If you have to replace a wheel, use a new GM original equipment wheel.

Tire Chains

NOTICE:

Use tire chains only where legal and only when you must. Use only SAE Class "S" type chains that are the proper size for your tires. Install them on the front tires and tighten them as tightly as possible with the ends securely fastened. Drive slowly and follow the chain manufacturer's instructions. If you can hear the chains contacting your vehicle, stop and retighten them. If the contact continues, slow down until it stops. Driving too fast or spinning the wheels with chains on will damage your vehicle.

Appearance Care

Remember, cleaning products can be hazardous. Some are toxic. Others can burst into flame if you strike a match or get them on a hot part of the vehicle. Some are dangerous if you breathe their fumes in a closed space. When you use anything from a container to clean your Pontiac, be sure to follow the manufacturer's warnings and instructions. And always open your doors or windows when you're cleaning the inside.

Never use these to clean your vehicle:

Gasoline
- Benzene
Naphtha
• Carbon Tetrachloride
- Acetone
- Paint Thinner
- Turpentine
- Lacquer Thinner
- Nail Polish Remover

They can all be hazardous -- some more than others -- and they can all damage your vehicle, too.

Don't use any of these unless this manual says you can. In many uses, these will damage your vehicle:

• Alcohol
• Laundry Soap
• Bleach
• Reducing Agents

Cleaning the Inside of Your Pontiac

Use a vacuum cleaner often to get rid of dust and loose dirt. Wipe vinyl or leather with a clean, damp cloth.

Your Pontiac dealer has two cleaners, a solvent-type spot lifter and a foam-type powdered cleaner. They will clean normal spots and stains very well. Do not use them on vinyl or leather.

Here are some cleaning tips:

1. Always read the instructions on the cleaner label.
2. Clean up stains as soon as you can -- before they set.
3. Use a clean cloth or sponge, and change to a clean area often. A soft brush may be used if stains are stubborn.
4. Use solvent-type cleaners in a well-ventilated area only. If you use them, don't saturate the stained area.
5. If a ring forms after spot cleaning, clean the entire area immediately or it will set.

Using Foam-Type Cleaner on Fabric

1. Vacuum and brush the area to remove any loose dirt.
2. Always clean a whole trim panel or section. Mask surrounding trim along stitch or welt lines.
3. Mix Multi-Purpose Powdered Cleaner following the directions on the container label.
4. Use suds only and apply with a clean sponge. Don't saturate the material and don't rub it roughly.
5. As soon as you've cleaned the section, use a sponge to remove the suds.
6. Rinse the section with a clean, wet sponge.
7. Wipe off what's left with a slightly damp paper towel or cloth.
8. Dry it immediately with a blow dryer.
9. Wipe with a clean cloth.

Using Solvent-Type Cleaner on Fabric

First, see if you have to use solvent-type cleaner at all. Some spots and stains will clean off better with just water and mild soap.

If you need to use a solvent:

1. Gently scrape excess soil from the trim material with a clean, dull knife or scraper.

2. Use very little cleaner, light pressure and clean cloths (preferably cheesecloth). Cleaning should start at the outside of the stain, "feathering" toward the center.

3. Keep changing to a clean section of the cloth.
4. When you clean a stain from fabric, immediately dry the area with a blow dryer to help prevent a cleaning ring.

Special Cleaning Problems

Greasy or Oily Stains

Stains caused by grease, oil, butter, margarine, shoe polish, coffee with cream, chewing gum, cosmetic creams, vegetable oils, wax crayon, tar and asphalt can be removed as follows:

1. Carefully scrape off excess stain.
2. Follow the solvent-type instructions described earlier.
   Shoe polish, wax crayon, tar and asphalt will stain if left on a vehicle's seat fabric. They should be removed as soon as possible. Be careful, because the cleaner will dissolve them and may cause them to spread.

Non-Greasy Stains

Stains caused by catsup, coffee (black), egg, fruit, fruit juice, milk, soft drinks, wine, vomit, urine and blood can be removed as follows:

1. Carefully scrape off excess stain, then sponge the soiled area with cool water.
2. If a stain remains, follow the foam-type instructions described earlier.
3. If an odor lingers after cleaning vomit or urine, treat the area with a water/baking soda solution: 1 teaspoon (5 ml) of baking soda to 1 cup (250 ml) of lukewarm water.
4. If needed, clean lightly with solvent-type cleaner.

Combination Stains

Stains caused by candy, ice cream, mayonnaise, chili sauce and unknown stains can be removed as follows:

1. Carefully scrape off excess stain.
2. Clean with cool water and allow to dry.
3. If a stain remains, clean it with solvent-type cleaner.

Cleaning Vinyl

Use warm water and a clean cloth.

• Rub with a clean, damp cloth to remove dirt. You may have to do it more than once.
• Things like tar, asphalt and shoe polish will stain if you don't get them off quickly. Use a clean cloth and a vinyl/leather cleaner. See your dealer for this product.

Cleaning Leather

Use a soft cloth with lukewarm water and a mild soap or saddle soap and wipe dry with a soft cloth. Then let the leather dry naturally. Do not use heat to dry.

• For stubborn stains, use a vinyl/leather cleaner. See your dealer for this product.
• Never use oils, varnishes, solvent-based or abrasive cleaners, furniture polish or shoe polish on leather.
• Soiled or stained leather should be cleaned immediately. If dirt is allowed to work into the finish, it can harm the leather.

Cleaning the Top of the Instrument Panel

Use only mild soap and water to clean the top surfaces of the instrument panel. Sprays containing silicones or waxes may cause annoying reflections in the windshield and even make it difficult to see through the windshield under certain conditions.

Cleaning the Built-In Child Restraint Pad

The built-in child restraint pad is attached to the seat frame with fastener strips. You can remove the pad and hand wash it with mild soap and water.

Care of Safety Belts and Built-in Child Restraint Harness

Keep the safety belts and the built-in child restraint harness clean and dry.

CAUTION:

Do not bleach or dye safety belts or the built-in child restraint harness. If you do, they may be severely weakened. In a crash, they might not be able to provide adequate protection. Clean the safety belts and the child restraint harness only with mild soap and lukewarm water.

Cleaning Glass Surfaces

Glass should be cleaned often. GM Glass Cleaner (GM Part No. 1050427) or a liquid household glass cleaner will remove normal tobacco smoke and dust films on interior glass.

Don't use abrasive cleaners on glass, because they may cause scratches. Avoid placing decals on the inside rear window, since they may have to be scraped off later. If abrasive cleaners are used on the inside of the rear window, an electric defogger element may be damaged. Any temporary license should not be attached across the defogger grid.

Cleaning the Outside of the Windshield, Backglass and Wiper Blades

If the windshield is not clear after using the windshield washer, or if the wiper blade chatters when running, wax, sap or other material may be on the blade or windshield.

Clean the outside of the windshield with GM Glass Cleaner Bon Ami ^® Powder (Non-scratching glass cleaning powder), GM Part No. 1050011. The windshield is clean if beads do not form when you rinse it with water.

Grime from the windshield will stick to the wiper blades and affect their performance. Clean the blade by wiping vigorously with a cloth soaked in full-strength windshield washer solvent. Then rinse the blade with water.

Check the wiper blades and clean them as necessary; replace worn blades.

Weatherstrips

Silicone grease on weatherstrips will make them last longer, seal better, and not stick or squeak. Apply silicone grease with a clean cloth at least every six months. During very cold, damp weather more frequent application may be required. (See "Recommended Fluids and Lubricants" in the Index.)

Cleaning the Outside of Your Pontiac

The paint finish on your vehicle provides beauty, depth of color, gloss retention and durability.

Washing Your Vehicle

The best way to preserve your vehicle's finish is to keep it clean by washing it often with lukewarm or cold water.

Don't wash your vehicle in the direct rays of the sun. Don't use strong soaps or chemical detergents. Use liquid hand, dish or car washing (mild detergent) soaps. Don't use cleaning agents that are petroleum based, or that contain acid or abrasives. All cleaning agents should be flushed promptly and not allowed to dry on the surface, or they could stain. Dry the finish with a soft, clean chamois or an all-cotton towel to avoid surface scratches and water spotting.

Before you enter an automatic car wash, if your vehicle is equipped with the optional power sliding door, be sure to have the switch for the power sliding door override feature enabled. See "Power Sliding Door" in the Index.

High pressure car washes may cause water to enter your vehicle.

Cleaning Exterior Lamps/Lenses

Use lukewarm or cold water, a soft cloth and a liquid hand, dish or car washing (mild detergent) soap to clean exterior lamps and lenses. Follow instructions under "Washing Your Vehicle."

Finish Care

Occasional waxing or mild polishing of your Pontiac by hand may be necessary to remove residue from the paint finish. You can get GM-approved cleaning products from your dealer. (See "Appearance Care and Materials" in the Index.)

Your Pontiac has a "basecoat/clearcoat" paint finish. The clearcoat gives more depth and gloss to the colored basecoat. Always use waxes and polishes that are non-abrasive and made for a basecoat/clearcoat paint finish.

NOTICE:

Machine compounding or aggressive polishing on a basecoat/clearcoat paint finish may dull the finish or leave swirl marks.

Foreign materials such as calcium chloride and other salts, ice melting agents, road oil and tar, tree sap, bird droppings, chemicals from industrial chimneys, etc., can damage your vehicle's finish if they remain on painted surfaces. Wash the vehicle as soon as possible. If necessary, use non-abrasive cleaners that are marked safe for painted surfaces to remove foreign matter.

Exterior painted surfaces are subject to aging, weather and chemical fallout that can take their toll over a period of years. You can help to keep the paint finish looking new by keeping your Pontiac garaged or covered whenever possible.

Cleaning Aluminum Wheels (If Equipped)

Keep your wheels clean using a soft clean cloth with mild soap and water. Rinse with clean water. After rinsing thoroughly, dry with a soft clean towel. A wax may then be applied.

The surface of these wheels is similar to the painted surface of your vehicle. Don't use strong soaps, chemicals, abrasive polishes, abrasive cleaners or abrasive cleaning brushes on them because you could damage the surface.

Don't take your vehicle through an automatic car wash that has silicon carbide tire cleaning brushes. These brushes can also damage the surface of these wheels.

Cleaning Tires

To clean your tires, use a stiff brush with a tire cleaner.

NOTICE:

When applying a tire dressing always take care to wipe off any overspray or splash from all painted surfaces on the body or wheels of the vehicle. Petroleum-based products may damage the paint finish.

Sheet Metal Damage

If your vehicle is damaged and requires sheet metal repair or replacement, make sure the body repair shop applies anti-corrosion material to the parts repaired or replaced to restore corrosion protection.

Finish Damage

Any stone chips, fractures or deep scratches in the finish should be repaired right away.

Minor chips and scratches can be repaired with touch-up materials available from your dealer or other service outlets. Larger areas of finish damage can be corrected in your dealer's body and paint shop.

Underbody Maintenance

Chemicals used for ice and snow removal and dust control can collect on the underbody. If these are not removed, accelerated corrosion (rust) can occur on the underbody parts such as fuel lines, frame, floor pan and exhaust system even though they have corrosion protection.

At least every spring, flush these materials from the underbody with plain water. Clean any areas where mud and other debris can collect. Dirt packed in closed areas of the frame should be loosened before being flushed. Your dealer or an underbody car washing system can do this for you.

Chemical Paint Spotting

Some weather and atmospheric conditions can create a chemical fallout. Airborne pollutants can fall upon and attack painted surfaces on your vehicle. This damage can take two forms: blotchy, ringlet-shaped discolorations, and small irregular dark spots etched into the paint surface.

Although no defect in the paint job causes this, Pontiac will repair, at no charge to the owner, the surfaces of new vehicles damaged by this fallout condition within 12 months or 12,000 miles (20 000 km) of purchase, whichever occurs first.

Appearance Care Materials Chart

PART NUMBER	SIZE	DESCRIPTION	USAGE
994954	23 in. x 25 in.	Polishing Cloth – Wax Treated	Exterior Polish
1050004	2.75 sq. ft.	Chamois	Shines vehicle without scratching
1050172	16 oz. (0.473 L)	Tar and Road Oil Remover	Also removes old waxes and polishes
1050173	16 oz. (0.473 L)	Chrome Cleaner and Polish	Removes rust and corrosion
1050174	16 oz. (0.473 L)	White Sidewall Tire Cleaner	Removes soil and black marks
1050200	1 gal. (3.785 L)	Magic Mirror Cleaner Polish	Exterior cleaner and polish
1050214	32 oz. (0.946 L)	Vinyl Cleaner	Spot and stain removal
1050427	23 oz. (0.680 L)	Glass Cleaner	Cleans grease, grime and smoke film
1052870	16 oz. (0.473 L)	Wash and Wax Concentrate	Exterior wash
1052918**	8 oz. (0.237 L)	Armor AllTM Protector	Protects vinyl, leather and rubber
1052925	16 oz. (0.473 L)	Multi-Purpose Powdered Cleaner	Cleans vinyl, cloth, tires and mats
1052929	16 oz. (0.473 L)	Wheel Cleaner	Spray on wheel cleaner
1052930	8 oz. (0.237 L)	Capture Dry Spot Remover	Attracts and absorbs soils
12345002**	16 oz. (0.473 L)	Armor AllTM Cleaner	Cleans vinyl, leather and rubber
12345725	12 oz. (0.354 L)	Silicone Tire Shine	Shines tires
12377964	16 oz. (0.473 L)	Cleaning Wax	Protects finish and removes fine scratches
12377966	16 oz. (0.473 L)	Finish Enhancer	Spot cleans paint and gives high luster
See your General Motors Parts Department for these products. **Not recommended for use on instrument panel vinyl.See “Fluids and Lubricants” in the Index.

Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)

This is the legal identifier for your Pontiac. It appears on a plate in the front corner of the instrument panel, on the driver's side. You can see it if you look through the windshield from outside your vehicle. The VIN also appears on the Vehicle Certification and Service Parts labels and the certificates of title and registration.

Engine Identification

The 8th character in your VIN is the engine code. This code will help you identify your engine, specifications and replacement parts.

Service Parts Identification Label

You'll find this label on the inside of the air inflator panel. It's very helpful if you ever need to order parts. On this label is:

• your VIN.
  • the model designation,
• paint information and

- a list of all production options and special equipment.

Be sure that this label is not removed from the vehicle.

Electrical System

Add-On Electrical Equipment

NOTICE:

Don't add anything electrical to your Pontiac unless you check with your dealer first. Some electrical equipment can damage your vehicle and the damage wouldn't be covered by your warranty. Some add-on electrical equipment can keep other components from working as they should.

Your vehicle has an air bag system. Before attempting to add anything electrical to your Pontiac, see "Servicing Your Air Bag-Equipped Pontiac" in the Index.

Headlamp Wiring

The headlamp wiring is protected by an internal circuit breaker in the I/P fuse panel. An electrical overload will cause the lamps to go on and off, or in some cases to remain off. If this happens, have your headlamp wiring checked right away.

Windshield Wipers

The windshield wiper motor is protected by an internal circuit breaker and a fuse. If the motor overheats due to heavy snow, etc., the wiper will stop until the motor cools. If the overload is caused by some electrical problem, be sure to get it fixed.

Power Windows and Other Power Options

Circuit breakers in the I/P fuse panel protect the power windows and other power accessories. When the current load is too heavy, the circuit breaker opens and closes, protecting the circuit until the problem is fixed.

Fuses and Circuit Breakers

The wiring circuits in your vehicle are protected from short circuits by a combination of fuses, circuit breakers and fusible thermal links.

Look at the silver-colored band inside the fuse. If the band is broken or melted, replace the fuse. Be sure you replace a bad fuse with a new one of the identical size and rating.

If you ever have a problem on the road and don't have a spare fuse, you can borrow one that has the same amperage or use one of the spare fuses in the underhood fuse and relay center. Just pick some feature of your vehicle that you can get along without -- like the radio or cigarette lighter -- and use its fuse, if it is the right amperage. Replace it as soon as you can.

There are two fuse blocks in your vehicle: the instrument panel fuse block and the underhood fuse and relay center.

Instrument Panel Fuse Block

Close-up of a car door and side panel showing the front and side panels (no text or symbols visible)

The instrument panel fuse block is to the right of the glove box. Pull the door open to access the instrument panel fuse block.

FUSE USAGE CHART
CIRCUIT BREAKERS	10ABS/TCS VON	10DRIL	10PCM
	10ELEC PRINOL		25RH DEFDG	26ELC
	10PWR MIRROR	15OIGAREOLC	20FRT PWR SOXT	10CTSY LAMP
	10CRUISE	12T/S/O	13BR-	10IGN 1	10PSD
	10PWR CITR VENT	24RR HVAC	25FRT HVAC LOWI MED SLAM	26SUNROOF	12HVAC/DRL
	29FRT WPR WSHR	3SWC ACCY	10MALL/RADROIDIC	20RR WPR WSHR	10BCM PHORM
		15HAZARD	15STOP LAMP
	20PWR LOCK	20RR PWR SOXT	10ABS MOL SAFT
		20ABS SOL	2SWC BACK LIGHT

For More Information, See Owner's Manual led in 10250677

CIRCUIT BREAKERS

FRT HVAC
HI BLWR	Blower Motor Resistor
HEADLAMP	DRL Control Module,Headlamp Dimmer Switchand Headlamp Switch
PWR SEAT/PSD	6-way Power Seat(s)and Rear Side DoorActuator Motor
PWR WDO/RR
VENT	Front Power Windows

FUSES

ABS MDL BAT ...	Electronic Brake Traction Control Module (EBTCM)
ABS SOL ......	LH and RH Front Brake Solenoid Valve
ABS/TCS IGN ....	Electronic Brake Control Relay and EBTCM
BCM PRGRM ....	Body Control Module (BCM)
CIGAR/DLC ....	Cigarette Lighter and Data Link Connector (DLC)
CRUISE ......	Cruise Control Module, Switch and Release Switch
CTSY LAMP ....	BCM
DRL ......	DRL Control Module
ELC ......	Electronic Level Control (ELC) Air Compressor and ELC Relay
ELEC PRNDL ....	Instrument Cluster to PRNDL Indicators
FRT HVAC LOW/ MED BLWR ....	Heater-A/C Control
FRT PWR SCKT ..	Front Electric Accessory Plug Housing
FRT WPR/WSHR .	Windshield Wiper/Washer Motor and Switch

FUSES

HAZARD ......	Turn Signal Switch
HVAC/DRL ......	Air Recirculation Motor, DRL Control Module, Heater-A/C Control, Temperature Door Actuator (Front) and Rear Window Defogger Relay
IGN 1 ......	ELC Sensor, BCM, Electronic Brake Control Indicator Lamp Driver Module, Instrument Panel Cluster, Rear Side Door Actuator Motor, Rear Window Wiper/Washer and Multifunction Switch (Foglamp Switch/TCS Enable Switch) and Stoplamp/Torque Converter Clutch (TCC) Switch

MALL/RADIO/

DIC	BCM, Driver Information Display, Radio and Radio Rear Speaker Amplifier
PCM	Relay and PCM
PSD	Rear Side Door Actuator Motor
PWR LOCK	BCM
PWR MIRROR	Power Remote Control Mirror

FUSES

PWR QTR VENT .	Interior Lamps and Multifunction Switch (Power Vent Switch)
RR HVAC . . . . . . .	Rear Blower Motor, Rear Heater-A/C Control, and Temperature Door Actuator (Rear)
RR DEFOG . . . . . .	Rear Window Defogger Relay
RR PWR SCKT . . .	Rear Electric Accessory Plug Housing
RR WPR/WSHR . .	Rear Window Wiper Motor, Rear Window Wiper/Washer and Multifunction Switch (Rear Window Wiper/Washer Switch)
SIR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .	Inflatable Restraint Control Module
STOP LAMP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..	Stoplamp Switch to Stoplamps
SUNROOF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SWC ACCY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SWC BACKLIGHT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . T/SIG . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Turn Signal Switch

Underhood Fuse and Relay Center

Close-up of mechanical components including a black box, gears, and a voltmeter (no visible text or symbols)

This fuse and relay center is located in the engine compartment, in front of the windshield washer fluid reservoir.

The fuses marked spare are available if a replacement fuse is needed.

Maxi Fuse

1-COOL FAN 2 ... Coolant Fans

3-HEADLAMPS .. Circuit Breakers: FRT HVAC HI BLWR, and HEADLAMP Fuses (I/P): HAZARD and STOPLAMP

4-BATT MAIN 2 .. Circuit Breaker: PWR SEAT/PSD. Fuses (I/P): ELC and RR DEFOG

Maxi Fuse

5-IGN MAIN 1 ...	Ignition Switch to Fuses (I/P):ABS/TCS IGN, CRUISE,DRL, ELEC PRNDL, IGN 1,PSD, SIR, T/SIG and PCM[IGN MAIN Relay(Underhood Electrical CenterFuses: A/C CLU, ELEK IGN,IGN 1-U/H, INJ, TCC)]
6-COOL FAN 1 ...	Coolant Fans
7-BATT MAIN 1 ...	Fuses (I/P): ABS MDLBATT, CIGAR/DLC, CTSYLAMP, FRT PWR SCKT,PWR LOCK, PWR MIRRORand RR PWR SCKT

Mini Fuse

18-INJ	Fuel Injectors 1-6
21-IGN1-UH	Evaporative Emissions (EVAP)Canister Purge Valve, EVAPCanister Vacuum Switch,Heated Oxygen Sensors #1 and #2, Linear Exhaust GasRecirculation (EGR) Valve,Mass Air Flow (MAF) Sensorand Powertrain ControlModule (PCM)

Mini Fuse

25-ELEK IGN ....	Ignition Control (IC) Module
27-B/U LAMP ....	Transaxle Range Switch to Back-up Lamps
28-A/C CLU ....	A/C CLU to A/C Compressor Clutch Oil
29-RADIO ....	Driver Information Display, Heater A/C Control, Radio, Rear Side Door Actuator Motor, Remote Control Door Lock Receiver (RCDLR), Security Indicator Lamp and Theft Deterrent Shock Sensor
30-ALT SENSE ...	Generator
31-TCC ....	Automatic Transaxle (Torque Converter Clutch Solenoids) Stoplamp Switch to PCM
32-FUEL PUMP ..	Fuel Pump Relay
33-ECM SENSE ..	Powertrain Control Module (PCM)
35-FOG LP ....	Fog Lamp Relay
36-HORN ....	Horn Relay
37-PARK LP ....	Daytime Running Lamps (DRL) Control Module, Headlamps Switch Theft Deterrent Relay to Headlamps

Replacement Bulbs

Exterior Lamps	Bulb Number
Headlamps	9004-HBI
Front Parking/Turn Signal Lamps	3157NA or 3157 NAK
Front Sidemarker Lamps	194
Stop/Tail (Top)	3057
Signal (2nd from top)	3156
Back-up Lamps (3rd from top)	3156
Tail (Bottom)	3057

Capacities and Specifications (Approximate)

The following approximate capacities are given in English and Metric conversions.

Please refer to “Recommended Fluids and Lubricants” in the Index for more information.

Automatic Transaxle

Pan Removal and Replacement .... 6 quarts (5.7 L)

Cooling System

With A/C .... 11.75 quarts (11.25 L)

With Rear Climate Controlor Rear Heater .... 13.5 quarts (12.75 L)

Engine Crankcase - Oil and Filter Change 4.5 quarts (4.3 L)

Fuel Capacity Standard (RWB) .... 20 gallons (76 L) Optional (EWB) .... 25 gallons (95 L)

Refrigerant, Air Conditioning* ... See Refrigerant Label under the hood.

Tire Pressures, Sizes .... See Tire-Loading Information label on driver's door.

Wheel Nut Torque 100 lb-ft (140 N·m)

Windshield Washer Fluid ..... 1 gallon (0.37 L)

* See Air Conditioning Refrigerants later in this section.

NOTE: All capacities are approximate. When adding, be sure to fill to the appropriate level, as recommended in this manual.

Air Conditioning Refrigerants

Not all air conditioning refrigerants are the same. If the air conditioning system in your vehicle needs refrigerant, be sure the proper refrigerant is used. If you're not sure, ask your Pontiac dealer.

Engine Specifications

Engine VIN Code E

Engine Type V6

Firing Order 1-2-3-4-5-6

Horsepower 180

Thermostat Temperature Specification 195°F (91°C)

Vehicle Dimensions - Extended Wheel Base

Length 201.3" (511.4 cm)

Width 72.7" (184.7 cm)

Height 68.1" (173.1 cm)

Wheelbase 120" (304.7 cm)

Front Tread Width 61.5" (156.2 cm)

Rear Tread Width 63.3" (160.8 cm)

Vehicle Dimensions - Regular Wheel Base

Length 187.3" (475.8 cm)

Width 72.7" (184.7 cm)

Height 67.4" (171.2 cm)

Wheelbase 112" (284.5 cm)

Front Tread Width 61.5" (156.2 cm)

Rear Tread Width 63.3" (160.8 cm)

Normal Maintenance Replacement Parts

Air Cleaner Filter ..... AC Type A-974C

Pollen Filter (2) 52470574

Engine Oil Filter PF47

Spark Plugs AC Type 41-940 Gap: 0.060" (1.52 mm)

Windshield Wiper Blades

Length 24" (600 mm)

Type ....Shepard's Hook

Backglass Wiper Blade

Length 16" (406 mm)

Type ....Shepard's Hook

NOTES

Section 7 Maintenance Schedule

This section covers the maintenance required for your Pontiac. Your vehicle needs these services to retain its safety, dependability and emission control performance.

7-2 Introduction to Your Maintenance Schedule
7-2 Your Vehicle and the Environment
7-3 How this Section is Organized
7-4 Using Your Maintenance Schedule
7-4 Selecting the Right Schedule for Your Vehicle
7-5 Short Trip/City Definition
7-5 Short Trip/City Intervals
7-6 Long Trip/Highway Definition
7-6 Long Trip/Highway Intervals

7-37 Owner Checks at Each Fuel Fill-up
7-37 What to Check at Least Once a Month
7-38 What to Check at Least Twice a Year
7-38 What to Check at Least Once a Year
7-41 Periodic Maintenance Inspections
7-42 Recommended Fluids and Lubricants
7-44 Tips for Keeping Track of Maintenance
7-44 A Place to Record Maintenance Procedures

Have you purchased the GM Protection Plan? The Plan supplements your new vehicle warranties. See your Warranty and Owner Assistance booklet, or your Pontiac dealer for details.

Introduction

Your Vehicle and the Environment

Proper vehicle maintenance not only helps to keep your vehicle in good working condition, but also helps the environment. All recommended maintenance procedures are important. Improper vehicle maintenance can even affect the quality of the air we breathe. Improper fluid levels or the wrong tire inflation can increase the level of emissions from your vehicle. To help protect our environment, and to keep your vehicle in good condition, please maintain your vehicle properly.

How This Section is Organized

The remainder of this section is divided into five parts:

"Part A: Scheduled Maintenance Services" shows what to have done and how often. Some of these services can be complex, so unless you are technically qualified and have the necessary equipment, you should let your dealer's service department or another qualified service center do these jobs.

CAUTION:

Performing maintenance work on a vehicle can be dangerous. In trying to do some jobs, you can be seriously injured. Do your own maintenance work only if you have the required know-how and the proper tools and equipment for the job. If you have any doubt, have a qualified technician do the work.

If you are skilled enough to do some work on your vehicle, you will probably want to get the service information GM publishes. See “Service and Owner Publications” in the Index.

"Part B: Owner Checks and Services" tells you what should be checked and when. It also explains what you can easily do to help keep your vehicle in good condition.

"Part C: Periodic Maintenance Inspections" explains important inspections that your Pontiac dealer's service department or another qualified service center should perform.

"Part D: Recommended Fluids and Lubricants" lists some products GM recommends to help keep your vehicle properly maintained. These products, or their equivalents, should be used whether you do the work yourself or have it done.

"Part E: Maintenance Record" provides a place for you to record the maintenance performed on your vehicle. Whenever any maintenance is performed, be sure to write it down in this part. This will help you determine when your next maintenance should be done. In addition, it is a good idea to keep your maintenance receipts. They may be needed to qualify your vehicle for warranty repairs.

Part A: Scheduled Maintenance Services

Using Your Maintenance Schedule

We at General Motors want to help you keep your vehicle in good working condition. But we don't know exactly how you'll drive it. You may drive very short distances only a few times a week. Or you may drive long distances all the time in very hot, dusty weather. You may use your vehicle in making deliveries. Or you may drive it to work, to do errands or in many other ways.

Because of all the different ways people use their GM vehicles, maintenance needs vary. You may even need more frequent checks and replacements than you'll find in the schedules in this section. So please read this section and note how you drive. If you have any questions on how to keep your vehicle in good condition, see your Pontiac dealer.

This part tells you the maintenance services you should have done and when you should schedule them. If you go to your dealer for your service needs, you'll know that GM-trained and supported service people will perform the work using genuine GM parts.

The proper fluids and lubricants to use are listed in Part D. Make sure whoever services your vehicle uses these. All parts should be replaced and all necessary repairs done before you or anyone else drives the vehicle.

These schedules are for vehicles that:

• carry passengers and cargo within recommended limits. You will find these limits on your vehicle's Certification/Tire label. See "Loading Your Vehicle" in the Index.
  are driven on reasonable road surfaces within legal driving limits.
  use the recommended fuel. See "Fuel" in the Index.

Selecting the Right Schedule

First you'll need to decide which of the two schedules is right for your vehicle. Here's how to decide which schedule to follow:

Maintenance Schedule

Short Trip/City Definition

Follow the Short Trip/City Maintenance Schedule if any one of these conditions is true for your vehicle:

● Most trips are less than 5 to 10 miles (8 to 16 km). This is particularly important when outside temperatures are below freezing.
- Most trips include extensive idling (such as frequent driving in stop-and-go traffic).
● Most trips are through dusty areas.
- You frequently tow a trailer or use a carrier on top of your vehicle.
- If the vehicle is used for delivery service, police, taxi or other commercial application.

One of the reasons you should follow this schedule if you operate your vehicle under any of these conditions is that these conditions cause engine oil to break down sooner.

Short Trip/City Intervals

Every 3,000 Miles (5 000 km): Engine Oil and Filter Change (or 3 months, whichever occurs first).
Every 6,000 Miles (10 000 km): Tire Rotation.
Every 12,000 Miles (20 000 km): Passenger Compartment Air Filter Replacement.
Every 15,000 Miles (25 000 km): Air Cleaner Filter Inspection, if driving in dusty conditions.
Every 30,000 Miles (50 000 km): Air Cleaner Filter Replacement.
Every 50,000 Miles (83 000 km): Automatic Transaxle Service (severe conditions only).
Every 60,000 Miles (100 000 km): Engine Accessory Drive Belt Inspection. Fuel Tank, Cap and Lines Inspection (or every 60 months, whichever occurs first).
Every 100,000 Miles (166 000 km): Spark Plug Wire Inspection. Spark Plug Replacement.
Every 150,000 Miles (240 000 km): Cooling System Service (or every 60 months, whichever occurs first).
These intervals only summarize maintenance services. Be sure to follow the complete maintenance schedule on the following pages.

Maintenance Schedule

Long Trip/Highway Definition

Follow this maintenance schedule only if none of the conditions from the Short Trip/City Maintenance Schedule is true. Do not use this schedule if the vehicle is used for trailer towing, driven in a dusty area or used off paved roads. Use the Short Trip/City schedule for these conditions.

Driving a vehicle with a fully warmed engine under highway conditions causes engine oil to break down slower.

Long Trip/Highway Intervals

Every 7,500 Miles (12 500 km): Engine Oil and Filter Change (or every 12 months, whichever occurs first). Tire Rotation.

Every 15,000 Miles (25 000 km): Passenger Compartment Air Filter Replacement.

Every 30,000 Miles (50 000 km): Air Cleaner Filter Replacement.

Every 50,000 Miles (83 000 km): Automatic Transaxle Service (severe conditions only).

Every 60,000 Miles (100 000 km): Engine Accessory Drive Belt Inspection. Fuel Tank, Cap and Lines Inspection (or every 60 months, whichever occurs first).

Every 100,000 Miles (166 000 km): Spark Plug Wire Inspection. Spark Plug Replacement.

Every 150,000 Miles (240 000 km): Cooling System Service (or every 60 months, whichever occurs first).

These intervals only summarize maintenance services. Be sure to follow the complete maintenance schedule on the following pages.

Short Trip/City Maintenance Schedule

The services shown in this schedule up to 100,000 miles (166 000 km) should be performed after 100,000 miles (166 000 km) at the same intervals. The services shown at 150,000 miles (240 000 km) should be performed at the same interval after 150,000 miles (240 000 km).

See "Owner Checks and Services" and "Periodic Maintenance Inspections" following.

Footnotes

† The U.S. Environmental Protection Agency or the California Air Resources Board has determined that the failure to perform this maintenance item will not nullify the emission warranty or limit recall liability prior to the completion of the vehicle's useful life. We, however, urge that all recommended maintenance services be performed at the indicated intervals and the maintenance be recorded.

+ A good time to check your brakes is during tire rotation. See "Brake System Inspection" under "Periodic Maintenance Inspection" in Part C of this schedule.

3,000 Miles (5 000 km)

□ Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months, whichever occurs first).

An Emission Control Service.

DATE	ACTUAL MILEAGE	SERVICED BY:

Short Trip/City Maintenance Schedule

6,000 Miles (10 000 km)

□ Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months, whichever occurs first). An Emission Control Service.
☐ Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspection and Rotation” in the Index for proper rotation pattern and additional information. (See footnote +.)

9,000 Miles (15 000 km)

□ Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months, whichever occurs first). An Emission Control Service.

DATE	ACTUAL MILEAGE	SERVICED BY:

DATE	ACTUAL MILEAGE	SERVICED BY:

Short Trip/City Maintenance Schedule

12,000 Miles (20 000 km)

☐ Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months, whichever occurs first). An Emission Control Service.
□ Replace passenger compartment air filter.
☐ Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspection and Rotation” in the Index for proper rotation pattern and additional information. (See footnote +.)

15,000 Miles (25 000 km)

□ Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months, whichever occurs first). An Emission Control Service.
☐ Inspect air cleaner filter if you are driving in dusty conditions. Replace filter if necessary. An Emission Control Service. (See footnote†.)

DATE	ACTUAL MILEAGE	SERVICED BY:

DATE	ACTUAL MILEAGE	SERVICED BY:

Short Trip/City Maintenance Schedule

18,000 Miles (30 000 km)

□ Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months, whichever occurs first). An Emission Control Service.
☐ Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspection and Rotation” in the Index for proper rotation pattern and additional information. (See footnote +.)

DATE	ACTUAL MILEAGE	SERVICED BY:

21,000 Miles (35 000 km)

☐ Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months, whichever occurs first). An Emission Control Service.

DATE	ACTUAL MILEAGE	SERVICED BY:

Short Trip/City Maintenance Schedule

24,000 Miles (40 000 km)

☐ Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months, whichever occurs first).
An Emission Control Service.
□ Replace passenger compartment air filter.
☐ Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspection and Rotation” in the Index for proper rotation pattern and additional information.
(See footnote +.)

27,000 Miles (45 000 km)

□ Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months, whichever occurs first).

An Emission Control Service.

DATE	ACTUAL MILEAGE	SERVICED BY:

DATE	ACTUAL MILEAGE	SERVICED BY:

Short Trip/City Maintenance Schedule

30,000 Miles (50 000 km)

□ Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months, whichever occurs first).
An Emission Control Service.
□ Replace air cleaner filter.
An Emission Control Service.
☐ Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspection and Rotation” in the Index for proper rotation pattern and additional information.
(See footnote +.)

33,000 Miles (55 000 km)

□ Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months, whichever occurs first).

An Emission Control Service.

DATE	ACTUAL MILEAGE	SERVICED BY:

DATE	ACTUAL MILEAGE	SERVICED BY:

Short Trip/City Maintenance Schedule

36,000 Miles (60 000 km)

☐ Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months, whichever occurs first). An Emission Control Service.
□ Replace passenger compartment air filter.
☐ Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspection and Rotation” in the Index for proper rotation pattern and additional information. (See footnote +.)

DATE	ACTUAL MILEAGE	SERVICED BY:

39,000 Miles (65 000 km)

□ Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months, whichever occurs first). An Emission Control Service.

DATE	ACTUAL MILEAGE	SERVICED BY:

Short Trip/City Maintenance Schedule

42,000 Miles (70 000 km)

□ Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months, whichever occurs first). An Emission Control Service.
☐ Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspection and Rotation” in the Index for proper rotation pattern and additional information. (See footnote +.)

DATE	ACTUAL MILEAGE	SERVICED BY:

45,000 Miles (75 000 km)

□ Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months, whichever occurs first). An Emission Control Service.
□ Inspect air cleaner filter if you are driving in dusty conditions. Replace filter if necessary. An Emission Control Service. (See footnote†.)

DATE	ACTUAL MILEAGE	SERVICED BY:

Short Trip/City Maintenance Schedule

48,000 Miles (80 000 km)

☐ Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months, whichever occurs first). An Emission Control Service.
□ Replace passenger compartment air filter.
☐ Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspection and Rotation” in the Index for proper rotation pattern and additional information. (See footnote +.)

DATE	ACTUAL MILEAGE	SERVICED BY:

50,000 Miles (83 000 km)

□ Change automatic transaxle fluid and filter if the vehicle is mainly driven under one or more of these conditions:

• In heavy city traffic where the outside temperature regularly reaches 90°F (32°C) or higher.
• In hilly or mountainous terrain.

(Continued)

Short Trip/City Maintenance Schedule

50,000 Miles (83 000 km) (Continued)

• When doing frequent trailer towing.
  – Uses such as found in taxi, police or delivery service.

If you do not use your vehicle under any of these conditions, the fluid and filter do not require changing.

51,000 Miles (85 000 km)

□ Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months, whichever occurs first). An Emission Control Service.

DATE	ACTUAL MILEAGE	SERVICED BY:

DATE	ACTUAL MILEAGE	SERVICED BY:

Short Trip/City Maintenance Schedule

54,000 Miles (90 000 km)

□ Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months, whichever occurs first). An Emission Control Service.
☐ Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspection and Rotation” in the Index for proper rotation pattern and additional information. (See footnote +.)

DATE	ACTUAL MILEAGE	SERVICED BY:

57,000 Miles (95 000 km)

□ Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months, whichever occurs first). An Emission Control Service.

DATE	ACTUAL MILEAGE	SERVICED BY:

Short Trip/City Maintenance Schedule

60,000 Miles (100 000 km)

□ Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months, whichever occurs first).
An Emission Control Service.
□ Replace passenger compartment air filter.
□ Inspect engine accessory drive belt.
□ Replace air cleaner filter.
An Emission Control Service.

□ Inspect fuel tank, cap and lines for damage or leaks. Inspect fuel cap gasket for any damage. Replace parts as needed.
An Emission Control Service. (See footnote†.)

☐ Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspection and Rotation” in the Index for proper rotation pattern and additional information.

(See footnote +.)

DATE	ACTUAL MILEAGE	SERVICED BY:

Short Trip/City Maintenance Schedule

63,000 Miles (105 000 km)

☐ Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months, whichever occurs first).
An Emission Control Service.

66,000 Miles (110 000 km)

□ Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months, whichever occurs first). An Emission Control Service.
☐ Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspection and Rotation” in the Index for proper rotation pattern and additional information. (See footnote +.)

DATE	ACTUAL MILEAGE	SERVICED BY:

DATE	ACTUAL MILEAGE	SERVICED BY:

Short Trip/City Maintenance Schedule

69,000 Miles (115 000 km)

□ Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months, whichever occurs first). An Emission Control Service.

72,000 Miles (120 000 km)

□ Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months, whichever occurs first). An Emission Control Service.
□ Replace passenger compartment air filter.
☐ Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspection and Rotation” in the Index for proper rotation pattern and additional information. (See footnote +.)

DATE	ACTUAL MILEAGE	SERVICED BY:

DATE	ACTUAL MILEAGE	SERVICED BY:

Short Trip/City Maintenance Schedule

75,000 Miles (125 000 km)

☐ Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months, whichever occurs first). An Emission Control Service.
☐ Inspect air cleaner filter if you are driving in dusty conditions. Replace filter if necessary. An Emission Control Service. (See footnote†.)

DATE	ACTUAL MILEAGE	SERVICED BY:

78,000 Miles (130 000 km)

□ Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months, whichever occurs first). An Emission Control Service.
☐ Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspection and Rotation” in the Index for proper rotation pattern and additional information. (See footnote +.)

DATE	ACTUAL MILEAGE	SERVICED BY:

Short Trip/City Maintenance Schedule

81,000 Miles (135 000 km)

☐ Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months, whichever occurs first). An Emission Control Service.

84,000 Miles (140 000 km)

- Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months, whichever occurs first). An Emission Control Service. - Replace passenger compartment air filter. - Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspection and Rotation” in the Index for proper rotation pattern and additional information. (See footnote +.)

DATE	ACTUAL MILEAGE	SERVICED BY:

DATE	ACTUAL MILEAGE	SERVICED BY:

Short Trip/City Maintenance Schedule

87,000 Miles (145 000 km)

☐ Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months, whichever occurs first). An Emission Control Service.

DATE	ACTUAL MILEAGE	SERVICED BY:

90,000 Miles (150 000 km)

□ Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months, whichever occurs first). An Emission Control Service.
□ Replace air cleaner filter. An Emission Control Service.
☐ Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspection and Rotation” in the Index for proper rotation pattern and additional information. (See footnote +.)

DATE	ACTUAL MILEAGE	SERVICED BY:

Short Trip/City Maintenance Schedule

93,000 Miles (155 000 km)

☐ Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months, whichever occurs first). An Emission Control Service.

96,000 Miles (160 000 km)

□ Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months, whichever occurs first). An Emission Control Service.
□ Replace passenger compartment air filter.
☐ Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspection and Rotation” in the Index for proper rotation pattern and additional information. (See footnote +.)

DATE	ACTUAL MILEAGE	SERVICED BY:

DATE	ACTUAL MILEAGE	SERVICED BY:

Short Trip/City Maintenance Schedule

99,000 Miles (165 000 km)

☐ Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months, whichever occurs first).
An Emission Control Service.

DATE	ACTUAL MILEAGE	SERVICED BY:

100,000 Miles (166 000 km)

□ Inspect spark plug wires. An Emission Control Service.
□ Replace spark plugs. An Emission Control Service.
□ Change automatic transaxle fluid and filter if the vehicle is mainly driven under one or more of these conditions:
- In heavy city traffic where the outside temperature regularly reaches 90^ (32^) or higher.
– In hilly or mountainous terrain.

(Continued)

Short Trip/City Maintenance Schedule

100,000 Miles (166 000 km) (Continued)

• When doing frequent trailer towing.
  – Uses such as found in taxi, police or delivery service.

If you do not use your vehicle under any of these conditions, the fluid and filter do not require changing.

150,000 Miles (240 000 km)

□ Drain, flush and refill cooling system (or every 60 months since last service, whichever occurs first). See “Engine Coolant” in the Index for what to use. Inspect hoses. Clean radiator, condenser, pressure cap and neck. Pressure test cooling system and pressure cap.

An Emission Control Service.

DATE	ACTUAL MILEAGE	SERVICED BY:

DATE	ACTUAL MILEAGE	SERVICED BY:

Long Trip/Highway Maintenance Schedule

The services shown in this schedule up to 100,000 miles (166 000 km) should be performed after 100,000 miles (166 000 km) at the same intervals. The services shown at 150,000 miles (240 000 km) should be performed at the same interval after 150,000 miles (240 000 km).

See "Owner Checks and Services" and "Periodic Maintenance Inspections" following.

Footnotes

† The U.S. Environmental Protection Agency or the California Air Resources Board has determined that the failure to perform this maintenance item will not nullify the emission warranty or limit recall liability prior to the completion of the vehicle's useful life. We, however, urge that all recommended maintenance services be performed at the indicated intervals and the maintenance be recorded.

+ A good time to check your brakes is during tire rotation. See "Brake System Inspection" under "Periodic Maintenance Inspection" in Part C of this schedule.

7,500 Miles (12 500 km)

☐ Change engine oil and filter (or every 12 months, whichever occurs first). An Emission Control Service.
☐ Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspection and Rotation” in the Index for proper rotation pattern and additional information. (See footnote +.)

DATE	ACTUAL MILEAGE	SERVICED BY:

Long Trip/Highway Maintenance Schedule

15,000 Miles (25 000 km)

□ Change engine oil and filter (or every 12 months, whichever occurs first). An Emission Control Service.
□ Replace passenger compartment air filter.
☐ Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspection and Rotation” in the Index for proper rotation pattern and additional information. (See footnote +.)

22,500 Miles (37 500 km)

□ Change engine oil and filter (or every 12 months, whichever occurs first). An Emission Control Service.
☐ Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspection and Rotation” in the Index for proper rotation pattern and additional information. (See footnote +.)

DATE	ACTUAL MILEAGE	SERVICED BY:

DATE	ACTUAL MILEAGE	SERVICED BY:

Long Trip/Highway Maintenance Schedule

30,000 Miles (50 000 km)

□ Change engine oil and filter (or every 12 months, whichever occurs first). An Emission Control Service.
□ Replace passenger compartment air filter.
☐ Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspection and Rotation” in the Index for proper rotation pattern and additional information. (See footnote +.)
□ Replace air cleaner filter. An Emission Control Service.

DATE	ACTUAL MILEAGE	SERVICED BY:

37,500 Miles (62 500 km)

□ Change engine oil and filter (or every 12 months, whichever occurs first). An Emission Control Service.
☐ Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspection and Rotation” in the Index for proper rotation pattern and additional information. (See footnote +.)

DATE	ACTUAL MILEAGE	SERVICED BY:

Long Trip/Highway Maintenance Schedule

45,000 Miles (75 000 km)

□ Change engine oil and filter (or every 12 months, whichever occurs first). An Emission Control Service.
□ Replace passenger compartment air filter.
☐ Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspection and Rotation” in the Index for proper rotation pattern and additional information. (See footnote +.)

DATE	ACTUAL MILEAGE	SERVICED BY:

50,000 Miles (83 000 km)

□ Change automatic transaxle fluid and filter if the vehicle is mainly driven under one or more of these conditions:

- In heavy city traffic where the outside temperature regularly reaches 90^ (32^) or higher.

Long Trip/Highway Maintenance Schedule

– In hilly or mountainous terrain.
- When doing frequent trailer towing.
– Uses such as found in taxi, police or delivery service.

If you do not use your vehicle under any of these conditions, the fluid and filter do not require changing.

52,500 Miles (87 500 km)

□ Change engine oil and filter (or every 12 months, whichever occurs first). An Emission Control Service.
☐ Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspection and Rotation” in the Index for proper rotation pattern and additional information. (See footnote +.)

DATE	ACTUAL MILEAGE	SERVICED BY:

DATE	ACTUAL MILEAGE	SERVICED BY:

Long Trip/Highway Maintenance Schedule

60,000 Miles (100 000 km)

□ Change engine oil and filter (or every 12 months, whichever occurs first). An Emission Control Service.
□ Replace passenger compartment air filter.
☐ Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspection and Rotation” in the Index for proper rotation pattern and additional information. (See footnote +.)
□ Inspect engine accessory drive belt.

□ Replace air cleaner filter. An Emission Control Service.
☐ Inspect fuel tank, cap and lines for damage or leaks. Inspect fuel cap gasket for any damage. Replace parts as needed. An Emission Control Service. (See footnote†.)

DATE	ACTUAL MILEAGE	SERVICED BY:

Long Trip/Highway Maintenance Schedule

67,500 Miles (112 500 km)

☐ Change engine oil and filter (or every 12 months, whichever occurs first). An Emission Control Service.
☐ Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspection and Rotation” in the Index for proper rotation pattern and additional information. (See footnote +.)

DATE	ACTUAL MILEAGE	SERVICED BY:

75,000 Miles (125 000 km)

□ Change engine oil and filter (or every 12 months, whichever occurs first). An Emission Control Service.
□ Replace passenger compartment air filter.
☐ Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspection and Rotation” in the Index for proper rotation pattern and additional information. (See footnote +.)

DATE	ACTUAL MILEAGE	SERVICED BY:

Long Trip/Highway Maintenance Schedule

82,500 Miles (137 500 km)

□ Change engine oil and filter (or every 12 months, whichever occurs first). An Emission Control Service.
☐ Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspection and Rotation” in the Index for proper rotation pattern and additional information. (See footnote +.)

DATE	ACTUAL MILEAGE	SERVICED BY:

90,000 Miles (150 000 km)

□ Change engine oil and filter (or every 12 months, whichever occurs first). An Emission Control Service.
□ Replace passenger compartment air filter.
□ Replace air cleaner filter. An Emission Control Service.
☐ Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspection and Rotation” in the Index for proper rotation pattern and additional information. (See footnote +.)

DATE	ACTUAL MILEAGE	SERVICED BY:

Long Trip/Highway Maintenance Schedule

97,500 Miles (162 500 km)

☐ Change engine oil and filter (or every 12 months, whichever occurs first). An Emission Control Service.
☐ Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspection and Rotation” in the Index for proper rotation pattern and additional information. (See footnote +.)

DATE	ACTUAL MILEAGE	SERVICED BY:

100,000 Miles (166 000 km)

□ Inspect spark plug wires. An Emission Control Service.
□ Replace spark plugs. An Emission Control Service.
□ Change automatic transaxle fluid and filter if the vehicle is mainly driven under one or more of these conditions:
- In heavy city traffic where the outside temperature regularly reaches 90^ (32^) or higher.

(Continued)

Long Trip/Highway Maintenance Schedule

100,000 Miles (166 000 km) (Continued)

• In hilly or mountainous terrain.
• When doing frequent trailer towing.
  – Uses such as found in taxi, police or delivery service.

If you do not use your vehicle under any of these conditions, the fluid and filter do not require changing.

150,000 Miles (240 000 km)

□ Drain, flush and refill cooling system (or every 60 months since last service, whichever occurs first). See “Engine Coolant” in the Index for what to use. Inspect hoses. Clean radiator, condenser, pressure cap and neck. Pressure test the cooling system and pressure cap.
An Emission Control Service.

DATE	ACTUAL MILEAGE	SERVICED BY:

DATE	ACTUAL MILEAGE	SERVICED BY:

Part B: Owner Checks and Services

Listed below are owner checks and services which should be performed at the intervals specified to help ensure the safety, dependability and emission control performance of your vehicle.

Be sure any necessary repairs are completed at once. Whenever any fluids or lubricants are added to your vehicle, make sure they are the proper ones, as shown in Part D.

At Each Fuel Fill

It is important for you or a service station attendant to perform these underhood checks at each fuel fill.

Engine Oil Level Check

Check the engine oil level and add the proper oil if necessary. See "Engine Oil" in the Index for further details.

Engine Coolant Level Check

Check the engine coolant level and add DEX-COOL ^® coolant mixture if necessary. See “Engine Coolant” in the Index for further details.

Windshield Washer Fluid Level Check

Check the windshield washer fluid level in the windshield washer tank and add the proper fluid if necessary. See "Windshield Washer Fluid" in the Index for further details.

At Least Once a Month

Tire Inflation Check

Make sure tires are inflated to the correct pressures. See "Tires" in the Index for further details.

Cassette Deck Service

Clean cassette deck. Cleaning should be done every 50 hours of tape play. See "Audio Systems" in the Index for further details.

At Least Twice a Year

Restraint System Check

Make sure the safety belt reminder light and all your belts, buckles, latch plates, retractors and anchorages are working properly. If your vehicle has a built-in child restraint, also periodically make sure the harness straps, latch plates, buckle, clip, child head restraint and anchorages are working properly. Look for any other loose or damaged safety belt and built-in child restraint system parts. If you see anything that might keep a safety belt or built-in child restraint system from doing its job, have it repaired. Have any torn or frayed safety belts or harness straps replaced.

Also look for any opened or broken air bag coverings, and have them repaired or replaced. (The air bag system does not need regular maintenance.)

Wiper Blade Check

Inspect wiper blades for wear or cracking. Replace blade inserts that appear worn or damaged or that streak or miss areas of the windshield. Also see "Wiper Blades, Cleaning" in the Index.

Automatic Transaxle Check

Check the transaxle fluid level; add if needed. See "Automatic Transaxle" in the Index. A fluid loss may indicate a problem. Check the system and repair if needed.

At Least Once a Year

Key Lock Cylinders Service

Lubricate the key lock cylinders with the lubricant specified in Part D.

Body Lubrication Service

Lubricate all body door hinges, including the liftgate. Also lubricate all hinges and latches, including those for the hood, power sliding door cable, rear compartment, glove box door and any folding seat hardware. Part D tells you what to use. More frequent lubrication may be required when exposed to a corrosive environment.

Starter Switch Check

CAUTION:

When you are doing this check, the vehicle could move suddenly. If it does, you or others could be injured. Follow the steps below.

1. Before you start, be sure you have enough room around the vehicle.
2. Firmly apply both the parking brake (see "Parking Brake" in the Index if necessary) and the regular brake.
   NOTE: Do not use the accelerator pedal, and be ready to turn off the engine immediately if it starts.
3. Try to start the engine in each gear. The starter should work only in PARK (P) or NEUTRAL (N). If the starter works in any other position, your vehicle needs service.

Brake-Transaxle Shift Interlock (BTSI) Check

CAUTION:

When you are doing this check, the vehicle could move suddenly. If it does, you or others could be injured. Follow the steps below.

1. Before you start, be sure you have enough room around the vehicle. It should be parked on a level surface.
2. Firmly apply the parking brake (see "Parking Brake" in the Index if necessary).
   NOTE: Be ready to apply the regular brake immediately if the vehicle begins to move.
3. With the engine off, turn the key to the RUN position, but don't start the engine. Without applying the regular brake, try to move the shift lever out of PARK (P) with normal effort. If the shift lever moves out of PARK (P), your vehicle's BTSI needs service.

Ignition Transaxle Lock Check

While parked, and with the parking brake set, try to turn the ignition key to LOCK in each shift lever position.

• The key should turn to LOCK only when the shift lever is in PARK (P).
• The key should come out only in LOCK.

Parking Brake and Automatic Transaxle PARK (P) Mechanism Check

CAUTION:

When you are doing this check, your vehicle could begin to move. You or others could be injured and property could be damaged. Make sure there is room in front of your vehicle in case it begins to roll. Be ready to apply the regular brake at once should the vehicle begin to move.

Park on a fairly steep hill, with the vehicle facing downhill. Keeping your foot on the regular brake, set the parking brake.

• To check the parking brake's holding ability: With the engine running and transaxle in NEUTRAL (N), slowly remove foot pressure from the regular brake pedal. Do this until the vehicle is held by the parking brake only.
• To check the PARK (P) mechanism's holding ability: With the engine running, shift to PARK (P). Then release all brakes.

Underbody Flushing Service

At least every spring, use plain water to flush any corrosive materials from the underbody. Take care to clean thoroughly any areas where mud and other debris can collect.

Part C: Periodic Maintenance Inspections

Listed below are inspections and services which should be performed at least twice a year (for instance, each spring and fall). You should let your GM dealer's service department or other qualified service center do these jobs. Make sure any necessary repairs are completed at once.

Proper procedures to perform these services may be found in a GM service manual. See "Service and Owner Publications" in the Index.

Steering, Suspension and Front Drive Axle Boot and Seal Inspection

Inspect the front and rear suspension and steering system for damaged, loose or missing parts, signs of wear or lack of lubrication. Inspect the power steering lines and hoses for proper hook-up, binding, leaks, cracks, chafing, etc. Clean and then inspect the drive axle boot seals for damage, tears or leakage. Replace seals if necessary.

Exhaust System Inspection

Inspect the complete exhaust system. Inspect the body near the exhaust system. Look for broken, damaged, missing or out-of-position parts as well as open seams, holes, loose connections or other conditions which could cause a heat build-up in the floor pan or could let exhaust fumes into the vehicle. See "Engine Exhaust" in the Index.

Radiator and Heater Hose Inspection

Inspect the hoses and have them replaced if they are cracked, swollen or deteriorated. Inspect all pipes, fittings and clamps; replace as needed.

Throttle Linkage Inspection

Inspect the throttle linkage for interference or binding, and for damaged or missing parts. Replace parts as needed. Replace any cables that have high effort or excessive wear. Do not lubricate accelerator and cruise control cables.

Brake System Inspection

Inspect the complete system. Inspect brake lines and hoses for proper hook-up, binding, leaks, cracks, chafing, etc. Inspect disc brake pads for wear and rotors for surface condition. Also inspect drum brake linings for wear and cracks. Inspect other brake parts, including drums, wheel cylinders, calipers, parking brake, etc. Check parking brake adjustment. You may need to have your brakes inspected more often if your driving habits or conditions result in frequent braking.

Part D: Recommended Fluids and Lubricants

NOTE: Fluids and lubricants identified below by name, part number or specification may be obtained from your GM dealer.

USAGE	FLUID/LUBRICANT
Engine Oil	Engine oil with the American Petroleum Institute Certified For Gasoline Engines “Starburst” symbol of the proper viscosity. To determine the preferred viscosity for your vehicle’s engine, see “Engine Oil” in the Index.
Engine Coolant	50/50 mixture of clean water (preferably distilled) and use only GM Goodwrench® DEX-COOL® or Havoline® DEX-COOL® coolant. See “Engine Coolant” in the Index.

USAGE	FLUID/LUBRICANT
Coolant Supplement Sealer	GM Part No. 3634621 or equivalent with a complete flush and refill.
Hydraulic Brake System	Delco Supreme 11 ^ Brake Fluid (GM Part No. 12377967 or equivalent DOT-3 brake fluid).
Parking Brake Cable Guides	Chassis lubricant (GM Part No. 12377985 or equivalent) or lubricant meeting requirements of NLGI # 2, Category LB or GC-LB.
Power Steering System	GM Power Steering Fluid (GM Part No. 1052884 - 1 pint, 1050017 - 1 quart, or equivalent).
Automatic Transaxle	DEXRON ^ -III Automatic Transmission Fluid.
Key Lock Cylinders	Multi-Purpose lubricant, Superlube ^ (GM Part No. 12346241 or equivalent).
Chassis Lubrication	Chassis lubricant (GM Part No. 12377985 or equivalent) or lubricant meeting requirements of NLGI # 2, Category LB or GC-LB.
Windshield Washer Solvent	GM Optikleen® Washer Solvent (GM Part No. 1051515) or equivalent.
Hood Latch Assembly, Pivots, Spring Anchor and Release Pawl	Lubriplate lubricant aerosol (GM Part No. 12346293 or equivalent) or lubricant meeting requirements of NLGI # 2, Category LB or GC-LB.

USAGE	FLUID/LUBRICANT
Hood and Door Hinges, Rear Folding Seat, Fuel Door Hinge, Liftgate Hinges, Power Sliding Door Cable	Multi-purpose lubricant, Superlube®(GM Part No. 12346241 or equivalent).
Sliding Door Track	Lubriplate lubricant aerosol (GM Part No. 12346293 or equivalent) or lubricant meeting requirements of NLGI # 2, Category LB or GC-LB.
Weatherstrip Conditioning	Dielectric Silicone Grease (GM Part No. 12345579 or equivalent).

See "Replacement Parts" in the Index for recommended replacement filters, valves and spark plugs.

Part E: Maintenance Record

After the scheduled services are performed, record the date, odometer reading and who performed the service in the boxes provided after the maintenance interval.

Any additional information from "Owner Checks and Services" or "Periodic Maintenance" can be added on the following record pages. Also, you should retain all maintenance receipts. Your owner information portfolio is a convenient place to store them.

Maintenance Record
DATE	ODOMETER READING	SERVICED BY	MAINTENANCE PERFORMED

Section 8 Customer Assistance Information

Here you will find out how to contact Pontiac if you need assistance. This section also tells you how to obtain service publications and how to report any safety defects.

8-2 Pontiac Cares
8-3 What Makes up Pontiac Cares?
8-3 Customer Satisfaction Procedure
8-5 Customer Assistance for Text Telephone (TTY) Users
8-6 Pontiac Roadside Assistance Program
8-8 Canadian Roadside Assistance
8-8 Pontiac Courtesy Transportation
8-9 GM Participation in an Alternative Dispute Resolution Program

8-10 Warranty Information
8-10 Reporting Safety Defects to the United States Government
8-11 Reporting Safety Defects to the Canadian Government
8-11 Reporting Safety Defects to General Motors
8-11 Ordering Service and Owner Publications in Canada

Pontiac Cares

With PONTIAC CARES, you are never more than a phone call away from having your concern taken care of.

The PONTIAC CARES philosophy and elements are designed to make you realize that Pontiac recognizes you as a valuable customer, appreciates your purchase decision, and is dedicated to taking care of the most important person ... YOU! PONTIAC CARES is: A valuable feature that comes with every Pontiac, a feature that offers a multitude of benefits that can give you safety, security, comfort and convenience.

What makes up Pontiac Cares?

● A 3 year/36,000 mile (60 000 km) Bumper to Bumper Warranty
- Customer Assistance
- Roadside Assistance
• Courtesy Transportation

All of these elements combine to make your driving experience an enjoyable one, and are discussed in greater detail further in your owner's manual. Pontiac is focusing on the changing needs of our customers and is committed to giving you an exceptional level of customer care throughout the ownership experience. Our goal is to create total customer enthusiasm in our product and our services, and make you the most satisfied customer in the world.

Customer Satisfaction Procedure

Woman in headset working at a desk with a vintage computer monitor displaying a video call interface (no visible text or symbols on screen)

Pontiac dealers have the facilities, trained technicians and up-to-date information to promptly address any concerns you may have. However, if a concern has not been resolved to your complete satisfaction, take the following steps:

STEP ONE -- Discuss your concern with a member of dealership management. Normally, concerns can be quickly resolved at that level. If the matter has already been reviewed with the sales, service or parts manager, contact the owner of the dealership or the General Manager.

STEP TWO -- If after contacting a member of dealership management, it appears your concern cannot be resolved by the dealership without further help, contact the Pontiac Customer Assistance Center by calling 1-800-PM-CARES. In Canada, contact GM of Canada Customer Communication Centre in Oshawa by calling 1-800-263-3777 (English) or 1-800-263-7854 (French).

For help outside of the United States and Canada, call the following numbers as appropriate:

• In Mexico: [phone]
- In Puerto Rico: 1-800-496-9992 (English) or 1-800-496-9993 (Spanish)
● In the U.S. Virgin Islands: 1-800-496-9994
- In the Dominican Republic: 1-800-751-4135 (English) or 1-800-751-4136 (Spanish)
• In the Bahamas: 1-800-389-0009
In Bermuda, Barbados, Antigua and the British Virgin Islands: 1-800-534-0122
• In all other Caribbean countries: [phone]
- In other overseas locations, call GM International Product Center in Canada at: [phone].

For prompt assistance, please have the following information available to give the Customer Assistance Representative:

• Your name, address, home and business telephone numbers
  ● Vehicle Identification Number (This is available from the vehicle registration or title, or the plate at the top left of the instrument panel and visible through the windshield.)
  ● Dealership name and location
  ● Vehicle delivery date and present mileage
  ● Nature of concern

We encourage you to call us so we can give your inquiry prompt attention. However, if you wish to write Pontiac, address your inquiry to:

Pontiac Customer Assistance Center One Pontiac Plaza Pontiac, MI 48340-2952

In Canada, write to:

General Motors of Canada Limited Customer Communication Centre, 163-005 1908 Colonel Sam Drive Oshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7

Refer to your Warranty and Owner Assistance Information booklet for addresses of GM Overseas offices.

When contacting Pontiac, please remember that your concern will likely be resolved in the dealership, using the dealer's facilities, equipment and personnel. That is why we suggest you follow Step One first if you have a concern.

Customer Assistance for Text Telephone (TTY) Users

To assist customers who are deaf, hard of hearing, or speech-impaired and who use Text Telephones (TTYs), Pontiac has TTY equipment available at its Customer Assistance Center. Any TTY user can communicate with Pontiac by dialing: 1-800-833-PONT. (TTY users in Canada can dial 1-800-263-3830.)

Pontiac Roadside Assistance Program

Three black-and-white line drawings of fuel pumps, a mobile phone, and a key (no text or symbols)

Security While You Travel

1-800-ROADSIDE (1-800-762-3743)

As the proud owner of a new Pontiac vehicle, you are automatically enrolled in the Pontiac Roadside Assistance program. This value-added service is intended to provide you with peace of mind as you drive in the city or travel the open road.

Pontiac's Roadside Assistance toll-free number is staffed by a team of technically trained advisors, who are available 24 hours a day, 365 days a year.

We take anxiety out of uncertain situations by providing minor repair information over the phone or making arrangements to tow your vehicle to the nearest Pontiac dealer.

We will provide the following services for 3 years/36,000 miles (60 000 km), at no expense to you:

• Fuel delivery
• Keys locked in vehicle
• Tow to nearest dealership for warranty service
• Change a flat tire
• Jump starts
• Courtesy Transportation -- See Pontiac Courtesy Transportation section for details

We have quick, easy access to telephone numbers of the following additional services depending on your needs:

Hotels
- Glass replacement
● Rental vehicle or taxis
● Police, fire department or hospitals

In many instances, mechanical failures are covered under Pontiac's comprehensive warranty. However, when other services are utilized, our advisors will explain any payment obligations you might incur.

For prompt and efficient assistance when calling, please provide the following information to give the advisor:

• Location of vehicle
• Telephone number of your location
  • Vehicle model, year and color
• Mileage of vehicle
  • Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)
  • Vehicle license plate number

Pontiac reserves the right to limit services or reimbursement to an owner or driver when in Pontiac's judgement the claims become excessive in frequency or type of occurrence.

While we hope that you never have the occasion to use our service, it is added security while traveling for you and your family. Remember, we're only a phone call away. Pontiac Roadside Assistance -- 1-800-ROADSIDE or 1-800-762-3743.

Canadian Roadside Assistance

Vehicles purchased in Canada have an extensive Roadside Assistance program accessible from anywhere in Canada or the United States. Please refer to the separate brochure provided by the dealer or call 1-800-268-6800 for emergency services.

Pontiac Courtesy Transportation

Silhouette of a bus with windows and door (no text or symbols)

Pontiac strives to give you a worry free ownership of your vehicle, and we realize the inconvenience of being without a car. So Pontiac has come up with a way to eliminate any frustrations you might have when trying to get a ride to work, or wondering how you will get home. Well, your worries are over. Pontiac provides no-cost transportation when you bring your 1997 Pontiac in for warranty service.

It applies to any repair covered under the 3 year/36,000 mile (60 000 km) limited warranty, and to any 1997 Pontiac requiring repair as a result of product recall or special policy situations. For same day service, you are entitled to one-way shuttle service of up to 10 miles (16 km). If the vehicle requires multiple day repairs, you're entitled to either a Pontiac loaner or reimbursement for a rental car, up to \$30/day, for up to five days.

Some state insurance regulations make it impractical to rent vehicles to people under 21 years of age. If you are under 21 and have difficulty renting a vehicle, Pontiac will reimburse you, up to \$30/day, for any documented transportation you receive.

In Canada, please consult your GM dealer for information on Courtesy Transportation.

GM Participation in an Alternative Dispute Resolution Program

This program is available in all 50 states and the District of Columbia. Canadian owners refer to your Warranty and Owner Assistance Information booklet for information on the Canadian Motor Vehicle Arbitration Plan (CAMVAP). General Motors reserves the right to change eligibility limitations and/or to discontinue its participation in this program.

Both Pontiac and your Pontiac dealer are committed to making sure you are completely satisfied with your new vehicle. Our experience has shown that, if a situation arises where you feel your concern has not been adequately addressed, the Customer Satisfaction Procedure described earlier in this section is very successful.

There may be instances where an impartial third party can assist in arriving at a solution to a disagreement regarding vehicle repairs or interpretation of the New Vehicle Limited Warranty. To assist in resolving these disagreements, Pontiac voluntarily participates in BBB AUTO LINE.

BBB AUTO LINE is an out-of-court program administered by the Better Business Bureau system to settle automotive disputes. This program is available free of charge to customers who currently own or lease a GM vehicle.

If you are not satisfied after following the Customer Satisfaction Procedure, you may contact the BBB using the toll-free telephone number, or write them at the following address:

BBB AUTO LINE

Council of Better Business Bureaus, Inc.

4200 Wilson Boulevard

Suite 800

Arlington, VA 22203-1804

Telephone: [phone]

To file a claim, you will be asked to provide your name and address, your Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) and a statement of the nature of your complaint. Eligibility is limited by vehicle age and mileage, and other factors.

We prefer you utilize the Customer Satisfaction Procedure before you resort to AUTO LINE, but you may contact the BBB at any time. The BBB will attempt to resolve the complaint serving as an intermediary. If this mediation is unsuccessful, an informal hearing will be scheduled where eligible customers may present their case to an impartial third-party arbitrator.

The arbitrator will make a decision which you may accept or reject. If you accept the decision, GM will be bound by that decision. The entire dispute resolution procedure should ordinarily take about 40 days from the time you file a claim until a decision is made.

Some state laws may require you to use this program before filing a claim with a state-run arbitration program or in the courts. For further information, contact the BBB at 1-800-955-5100 or the Pontiac Customer Assistance Center at 1-800-PM-CARES.

Warranty Information

Your vehicle comes with a separate warranty booklet that contains detailed warranty information.

REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS TO THE UNITED STATES GOVERNMENT

If you believe that your vehicle has a defect which could cause a crash or could cause injury or death, you should immediately inform the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration (NHTSA), in addition to notifying General Motors.

If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open an investigation, and if it finds that a safety defect exists in a group of vehicles, it may order a recall and remedy campaign. However, NHTSA cannot become involved in individual problems between you, your dealer or General Motors.

To contact NHTSA, you may either call the Auto Safety Hotline toll-free at 1-800-424-9393 (or 366-0123 in the Washington, D.C. area) or write to:

NHTSA, U.S. Department of Transportation Washington, D.C. 20590

You can also obtain other information about motor vehicle safety from the Hotline.

REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS TO THE CANADIAN GOVERNMENT

If you live in Canada, and you believe that your vehicle has a safety defect, you should immediately notify Transport Canada, in addition to notifying General Motors of Canada Limited. You may write to:

Transport Canada

Box 8880

Ottawa, Ontario K1G 3J2

REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS TO GENERAL MOTORS

In addition to notifying NHTSA (or Transport Canada) in a situation like this, we certainly hope you'll notify us. Please call us at 1-800-PM-CARES or write:

Pontiac

Customer Assistance Center

One Pontiac Plaza

Pontiac, MI 48340-2952

In Canada, please call us at 1-800-263-3777 (English) or 1-800-263-7854 (French). Or, write:

General Motors of Canada Limited

Customer Communication Centre, 163-005

1908 Colonel Sam Drive

Oshawa, Ontario LIH 8P7

Ordering Service and Owner Publications in Canada

Service manuals, service bulletins, owner's manuals and other service literature are available for purchase for all current and past model General Motors vehicles.

The toll-free telephone number for ordering information in Canada is 1-800-668-5539.

1997 PONTIAC SERVICE PUBLICATIONS ORDERING INFORMATION

The following publications covering the operation and servicing of your vehicle can be purchased by filling out the Service Publication Order Form in this book and mailing it in with your check, money order, or credit card information to Helm, Incorporated (address below.)

CURRENT PUBLICATIONS FOR 1997 PONTIAC

SERVICE MANUALS

Service Manuals have the diagnosis and repair information on engines, transmission, axle, suspension, brakes, electrical, steering, body, etc. RETAIL SELL PRICE: \$90.00

TRANSMISSION, TRANSAXLE, TRANSFER CASE UNIT REPAIR MANUAL

This manual provides information on unit repair service procedures, adjustments and specifications for the 1997 GM transmissions, transaxles and transfer cases. RETAIL SELL PRICE: \$40.00

SERVICE BULLETINS

Service Bulletins give technical service information needed to knowledgeably service General Motors cars and trucks. Each bulletin contains instructions to assist in the diagnosis and service of your vehicle.

PLEASE COMPLETE THE ORDER FORM SHOWN ON THE FOLLOWING PAGE AND MAIL TO:

Helm, Incorporated • P.O. Box 07130 • Detroit, MI 48207

OWNER'S INFORMATION

Owner publications are written directly for Owners and intended to provide basic operational information about the vehicle. The owner's manual will include the Maintenance Schedule for all models.

In-Portfolio: Includes a Portfolio, Owner's Manual and Warranty Booklet. RETAIL SELL PRICE: \$15.00

Without Portfolio: Owner's Manual only. RETAIL SELL PRICE: \$10.00

CURRENT & PAST MODEL ORDER FORMS

Service Publications are available for current and past model GM vehicles. To request an order form, please specify year and model name of the vehicle.

OR ORDER TOLL FREE: 1-800-782-4356

Monday-Friday 8:00 AM - 6:00 PM Eastern Time

For Credit Card Orders Only (VISA-MasterCard-Discover)

ORDER TOLL FREE (NOTE: For Credit Card Holders Only) 1-800-782-4356 (Monday-Friday 8:00 AM - 6:00 PM EST) FAX Orders Only 1-313-865-5927				Orders will be mailed within 10 days of receipt. Please allow adequate time for postal service. If further information is needed, write to the address shown below or call 1-800-782-4356. Material cannot be returned for credit without packing slip with return information within 30 days of delivery. On returns, a re-stocking fee may be applied against the original order.
PUBLICATION FORM NUMBER			ITEM DESCRIPTION		VEHICLE MODEL			QTY.	PRICE EACH*	TOTAL PRICE
					NAME	YEAR
			Service Manual			1997			$90.00
			Car & Light Truck Transmission Unit Repair			1997			40.00
			Owner's Manual In Portfolio			1997			15.00
			Owner's Manual Without Portfolio			1997			$10.00

GM-PON-ORD97
*(Prices are subject to change without notice and without incurring obligation. Allow ample time for delivery.)
Note to Canadian Customers: All listed prices are quoted in U.S. funds. Canadian residents are to make checks payable in U.S. funds. To cover Canadian postage, add \$11.50 plus the U.S. order processing.

NOTES

Section 9 Information

Accessory Power Outlet 2-85

Adding Equipment to the Outside Of Your Vehicle ..... 6-3

Adjusting the Bucket Seats 1-27

Adjusting the Split Bench Seat 1-19

Air Bag 1-50

How Does it Restrain 1-54

How it Works 1-52

Location 1-52

Readiness Light 1-51, 2-95

Servicing 1-55

What Makes it Inflate 1-53

What Will You See After it Inflates 1-54

When Should it Inflate 1-53

Air Cleaner 6-15

Air Conditioning 3-4

Air Conditioning Refrigerants 6-64

Air Inflator 2-88

Alignment and Balance, Tire 6-45

Aluminum Wheels, Cleaning 6-54

Antenna, Integrated Windshield 3-33

Antifreeze 6-21

Anti-Lock Brake System Warning Light 2-98, 4-7

Brakes 4-7

Anti-Lock Brake System Warning Light 2-98,4-7

Appearance Care 6-48

Appearance Care Materials 6-56

Ashtray 2-83

Audio Controls, Steering Wheel Touch Control ..... 3-30

Audio Systems 3-10

Automatic Door Locks 2-6

Automatic Overdrive 2-34

Automatic Transaxle Check 7-38

Automatic Transaxle Fluid 6-18

How to Add 6-20

How to Check 6-18

When to Check and Change 6-18

Automatic Transaxle Operation 2-32

Shifting 2-32

Automatic Transaxle Park Mechanism Check 7-40

Battery Saver 2-61

Battery 6-30

Jump Starting 5-3

Warnings 5-3, 5-5

BBB Auto Line 8-9

Before Leaving on a Long Trip 4-23

Better Business Bureau Mediation 8-9

Brake

Adjustment 6-29

Fluid 6-27

Master Cylinder 6-27

Parking 2-36

Pedal Travel 6-29

Replacing System Parts 6-30

System Warning Light 2-96, 6-28

Trailer 4-36

Transaxle Shift Interlock 2-39

Transaxle Shift Interlock Check 7-39

Wear 6-29

Brakes, Anti-Lock 4-7

Braking 4-6

Braking in Emergencies 4-11

Break-In, New Vehicle 2-27

BTSI 2-39

BTSI Check 7-39

Bucket Seats 1-26

Adjusting 1-27

Folding or Reclining the Seatback 1-26

Removing 1-28

Replacing 1-30

Bulb Replacement 6-31

Canadian Roadside Assistance 8-8

Capacities and Specifications 6-64

Captain's Chairs 1-32

Reclining the Seatback 1-32

Removing 1-33

Replacing 1-34

Carbon Monoxide 2-40, 4-29, 4-37

Cassette Deck Service 7-37

Cassette Tape Player 3-12, 3-15

Cassette Tape Player Care 3-32

CD Adapter Kits 3-15, 3-18

CD Player Theft-Deterrent Feature 3-27

Center Dome Lamp 2-64

Center Rear Passenger Position (Bench Seat) 1-62

Center Rear Passenger Position (Bucket Seat) 1-63

Certification/Tire Label 4-30

Chains, Safety 4-36

Chains, Tire 6-47

Changing a Flat Tire 5-22

Charging System Indicator Light 2-96

Checking Your Restraint Systems 1-92

Chemical Paint Spotting 6-55

Child Restraints 1-78

Built-in 1-67

Cleaning Built-in 6-51

Securing in a Rear Outside Seat Position 1-80

Securing in the Center Rear Seat

Position (Bucket Seat) 1-84

Securing in the Center Rear Seat

Position (Third Row Bench Seat) 1-82

Securing in the Right Front Seat Position 1-86

Top Strap 1-79

Where to Put 1-78

Cigarette Lighter 2-83

Circuit Breakers and Fuses 6-59

Cleaner, Air 6-15

Cleaning

Aluminum Wheels 6-54

Built-in Child Restraint 6-51

Exterior Lamps/Lenses 6-53

Fabric 6-49

Glass 6-52

Inside of Your Pontiac 6-48

Instrument Panel 6-51

Outside of Your Pontiac 6-53

Special Problems 6-49

Stains 6-49

Tires 6-54

Vinyl 6-50

Wheels 6-54

Windshield and Wiper Blades 6-52

Climate Control System 3-2

Clock, Setting the 3-10

Coinholder 2-74

Comfort Controls 3-1

Compact Disc Care 3-33

Compact Disc Player 3-19, 3-21

Compact Disc Player Errors 3-20, 3-23

Compact Disc Player, Remote 3-24

Compact Overhead Console 2-68

Compact Spare Tire 5-32

Content Theft Deterrent 2-24

Control of a Vehicle 4-6

Convenience Net 2-77

Side 2-78

Convex Outside Mirror 2-67

Coolant 6-21

Adding 6-23

Checking 6-23

Heater, Engine 2-30

Recovery Tank 5-16

What to Use 6-22

Courtesy Transportation 8-8

Cruise Control 2-56

Cupholders 2-74

Customer Assistance for Text Telephone Users 8-5

Customer Assistance Information 8-1

Customer Satisfaction Procedure 8-3

Damage, Finish 6-55

Damage, Sheet Metal 6-54

Daytime Running Lamps 2-60

Dead Battery 5-3

Defects, Reporting Safety 8-10

Defensive Driving 4-2

Defogger, Rear Window 3-9

Defogging 3-8

Defrosting 3-8

Delayed Illumination 2-63

Dimensions, Vehicle 6-65

Door

Locks 2-4

Power Sliding 2-15

Sliding 2-14

Door Ajar Light 2-107

Driver Information Center 2-71

Driver Position 1-40

Driver's Four-Way Manual Seat 1-2

City 4-21

Defensive 4-2

Drunken 4-3

Freeway 4-22

In a Blizzard 4-28

In Foreign Countries 6-5

In the Rain 4-18

Night 4-16

On Curves 4-11

On Grades While Towing a Trailer 4-39

On Hill and Mountain Roads 4-24

On Snow and Ice 4-26

Through Water 4-20

Wet Roads 4-18

Winter 4-26

With a Trailer 4-37

Drunken Driving 4-3

Dump and Stow Feature 1-7

Electrical Equipment, Adding 2-30

Electrical System 6-58

Electronic Level Control 4-30

Engine 6-10

Coolant 6-21

Coolant Heater 2-30

Coolant Level Check 7-37

Coolant Temperature Gage 2-101

Cooling System 6-64

Exhaust 2-40

Identification 6-57

Oil Level Check 7-37

Overheated Protection Operating Mode 5-12

Overheating 5-12

Running While Parked 2-41

Specifications 6-65

Starting Your 2-29

Engine Oil 2-106,6-11

Additives 6-14

Checking 6-12

Used 6-15

What Kind to Use 6-13

When to Add 6-12

When to Change 6-14

Engine Temperature Warning Light 2-102

Equipment, Adding to the Outside Of Your Vehicle ..... 6-3

Exhaust, Engine 2-40

Exit Lighting 2-63

Fabric Cleaning 6-49

Fan Knob, Climate Control System 3-2

Filling Your Tank 6-5

Filter, Air 6-15

Filter, Pollen 6-16

Finish Care 6-53

Finish Damage 6-55
First Gear 2-35
Flashers, Hazard Warning 5-2
Flat Tire, Changing 5-22
Fluid Capacities 6-64
Fluids and Lubricants 7-42
Fog Lamps 2-61
Folding Driver's Seatback 1-3
Foreign Countries, Fuel 6-5
French Language Manual ...... ii
Front Door 2-4
Front Parking/Turn Signal Lamp Bulb Replacement .... 6-34
Front Seat Storage Bin 2-75
Front Seat Storage Net 2-76
Front Sidemarker Lamp Bulb Replacement 6-36
Front Towing 5-10
Fuel 6-3
Filling Your Tank 6-5
Gage 2-107
In Foreign Countries 6-5
Fuses and Circuit Breakers 6-59

Gages

Engine Coolant Temperature 2-101

Fuel 2-107

Speedometer 2-93

Tachometer 2-94

Garage Door Opener Compartment 2-69

GAWR 4-30

Gear Positions, Automatic Transaxle 2-32

Glove Box 2-68

Gross Axle Weight Rating 4-30

Gross Vehicle Weight Rating 4-30

Guide en Français

GVWR 4-30

Halogen Bulbs 6-31

Hazard Warning Flashers 5-2

Head Restraints 1-6

Headlamps 2-59

Bulb Replacement 6-31

High/Low Beam Changer 2-54

On Reminder 2-60

Wiring 6-58

Hearing Impaired, Customer Assistance 8-5

Heating 3-4

High-Beam Headlamps 2-54

Highway Hypnosis 4-24

Hill and Mountain Roads 4-24

Hitches, Trailer 4-35

Hood

Checking Things Under 6-8

Prop 6-9

Release 6-8

Horn 2-52

Hydroplaning 4-20

Ignition Positions 2-27

Ignition Transaxle Lock Check 7-40

Illuminated Entry 2-62

Illuminated Visor Vanity Mirrors 2-85

Inflation, Tire 6-41

Inflator, Air 2-88

Inside Day/Night Rearview Mirror 2-66

Inspections Brake System 7-41

Exhaust Systems 7-41

Front-Wheel-Drive Axle Boot 7-41

Front-Wheel-Drive Axle Seal 7-41

Radiator and Heater Hose 7-41

Steering 7-41

Suspension 7-41

Throttle Linkage 7-41

Instrument Panel 2-90

Cleaning 6-51

Cluster 2-92

Fuse Block 6-59

Light Intensity Control 2-61

Instrument Panel Switchbank 2-13

Interior Lamps 2-61

Interior Lamps Control 2-62

Interior Lamps Override Switch 2-62

Jack, Tire 5-25

Jump Starting 5-3

Key Lock Cylinders Service 7-38

Keyless Entry System 2-8

Battery Replacement 2-11

Resynchronizing 2-12

Keys 2-2

Labels

Certification/Tire 4-30

Service Parts Identification 6-57

Tire-Loading Information 4-30

Vehicle Identification Number 6-57

Lamps 2-59

Delayed Illumination 2-63

Dome 2-64

Exit Lighting 2-63

Fog 2-61

Illuminated Entry 2\~62

Interior 2-61

On Reminder 2-60

Rear Cargo 2-64

Underhood 6-11

Leaving Your Vehicle 2-7

Leaving Your Vehicle with the Engine Running ..... 2-38

Liftgate 2-22

Lighter 2-83

Lights

Air Bag Readiness 1-51,2-95

Anti-Lock Brake System Warning 2-98,4-7

Brake System Warning 2-96, 6-28

Charging System Indicator 2-96

Door Ajar 2-107

Engine Temperature Warning 2-102

Interior 2-61

Low Coolant Warning 2-102, 6-23

Low Fuel Warning 2-108

Low Oil 2-106,6-11

Low Traction 2-100,4-9

Oil Pressure 2-105

Safety Belt Reminder 1-36, 2-95

Service Engine Soon 2-103

Traction Control System Warning 2-99,4-10

Loading Your Vehicle 4-30

Locks

Automatic Door 2-6

Cylinders 7-38

Door 2-4

Key Lock Cylinder Service 7-38

Last Door Closed Locking 2-7

Lockout Deterrent 2-7

Power Door 2-5

Sliding Door 2-14

Sliding Door Child Security 2-20

Sliding Door Delayed Locking 2-7

Steering Column Park Check 7-40

Locks and Lighting Choices 2-42

Loss of Control 4-15

Low Coolant Warning Light 2-102,6-23

Low Fuel Warning Light 2-108

Low Oil Light 2-106, 6-11

Low Traction Light 2-100,4-9

Lubricants and Fluids 7-42

Lubrication Service, Body 7-38

Luggage Carrier 2-79

Lumbar Control 1-6

Maintenance, Normal Replacement Parts 6-65

Maintenance Record 7-44

Maintenance Schedule 7-1

How This Section is Organized 7-3

Long Trip/Highway Definition 7-6

Long Trip/Highway Intervals 7-6

Owner Checks and Services 7-37

Periodic Maintenance Inspections 7-41

Recommended Fluids and Lubricants 7-42

Scheduled Maintenance Services 7-4

Short Trip/City Definition 7-5

Short Trip/City Intervals 7-5

Your Vehicle and the Environment 7-2

Maintenance, Underbody 6-55

Maintenance When Trailer Towing 4-40

Malfunction Indicator Lamp 2-103

Matching Transmitters to Your Vehicle 2-10

Mirrors 2-66

Convex Outside 2-67

Illuminated Visor Vanity 2-85

Inside Day/Night Rearview 2-66

Power Remote Control 2-66

Visor Vanity 2-84

Mode Buttons, Climate Control System 3-3

Mode Knob, Climate Control System 3-2

Mountain Roads 4-24

Multifunction Lever 2-53

Net, Convenience 2-77

Neutral 2-33

New Vehicle "Break-In" 2-27

Night Vision 4-17

Odometer 2-93

Odometer, Trip 2-93

Off-Road Recovery 4-13

Oil, Engine 2-106, 6-11

Oil Pressure Light 2-105

Overhead Console 2-69

Driver Information Center 2-71

Garage Door Opener Compartment 2-69

Sunglasses Compartment 2-71

Overhead Console Switchbank 2-13

Overheated Engine Protection 5-12

Overheating Engine 5-12

Owner Checks and Services 7-37

Owner Publications, Ordering 8-12

Paint Spotting, Chemical 6-55

Park

Automatic Transaxle 2-32

Shifting Into 2-37

Shifting Out of 2-39

Parking At Night 2-26

Brake 2-36

Brake Mechanism Check 7-40

Lots 2-26

Over Things That Burn 2-40

With a Trailer 4-39

Passenger Position 1-50

Passing 4-13

Periodic Maintenance Inspections 7-41

Pollen Filter 6-16

Pontiac Cares 8-2

Power Accessory Outlet 2-85

Door Locks 2-5

Option Fuses 6-58

Rear Quarter Windows 2-52

Remote Control Mirror 2-66

Seat 1-3

Steering 4-11

Sunroof 2-87

Windows 2-51

Power Steering Fluid 6-25

How to Check 6-25

What to Use 6-25

When to Check 6-25

Pregnancy, Use of Safety Belts 1-49

Problems on the Road 5-1

Publications, Service and Owner 8-12

Radiator 5-19

Radiator Pressure Cap 6-24

Radio Reception 3-31

Radios 3-10

Rain, Driving In 4-18

Reading Lamps 2-65

Rear Air Vents 3-8

Cargo Lamp 2-64

Climate Control 3-6

Comfort Controls 3-7

Fan Control 3-6

Outside Seat Position 1-56

Safety Belt Comfort Guides 1-60

Seat Audio 3-26

Seat Passengers 1-56

Seats 1-6

Storage 2-76

Towing 5-11

Window Defogger 3-9

Windshield Washer 2-55

Rearview Mirror, Inside Day/Night 2-66

Reclining Front and Captain's Seatbacks 1-4

Recommended Fluids and Lubricants 7-42

Recovery Tank, Coolant 5-16

Refrigerants, Air Conditioning 6-64

Compact Disc Player 3-24

Remote Operation of the Power Sliding Door 2-10

Removing Bucket Seats 1-28

Captain's Chairs 1-33

Second Row Solid Bench Seat 1-8

Split Bench Seat 1-20

Third Row Solid Bench Seat 1-14

Replacement Bulbs 6-64

Parts 6-65

Wheel 6-46

Replacing Bucket Seats 1-30

Captain's Chairs 1-34

Second Row Solid Bench Seat 1-10

Split Bench Seat 1-22

Third Row Solid Bench Seat 1-16

Replacing Safety Belts 1-92

Reporting Safety Defects 8-10

Resetting the Power Sliding Door 2-19

Restraints Checking 1-92

Head 1-6

Head 1-6

Replacing Parts After a Crash 1-92

Second Row Safety Belt Stowage 1-7

System Check 7-38

Restraints, Child 1-78

Reverse 2-33

Right Front Passenger Position 1-50

Roadside Assistance 8-6

Roadside Assistance, Canadian 8-8

Rocking Your Vehicle 5-33

Rotation, Tires 6-42

Saddlebag 2-76
Safety Belt Extender 1-92
Safety Belts 1-35
Adults 1-40
Care 6-51
Center Rear Passenger Position (Bench Seat) ..... 1-62
Center Rear Passenger Position (Bucket Seat) ..... 1-63
Children 1-65
Driver Position 1-40
Extender 1-92
How to Wear Properly 1-40
Incorrect Usage 1-44, 1-90, 1-91
Lap Belt 1-62, 1-63
Lap-Shoulder 1-40, 1-57
Larger Children 1-89
Passenger Position 1-50
Questions and Answers 1-39
Rear Comfort Guides 1-60
Rear Seat Outside Passenger Positions 1-56
Rear Seat Passengers 1-56
Replacing After a Crash 1-92
Right Front Passenger Position 1-50
Shoulder Belt Height Adjuster 1-43
Smaller Children and Babies 1-65
Use During Pregnancy 1-49
Why They Work 1-36
Safety Chains 4-36
Safety Defects, Reporting 8-10
Safety Warnings and Symbols .... iii

Scheduled Maintenance Services 7-4

Seat Controls 1-6

Seatback Folding Driver's 1-3

Reclining Front and Captain's 1-4

Seats Controls 1-6

Driver's Four-Way Manual 1-2

Dump and Stow 1-7

Lumbar Control 1-6

Manual Front Passenger 1-4

Power 1-3

Rear 1-6

Restraint Systems 1-1

Seat Controls 1-2

Second Row Safety Belt Stowage 1-7

Securing a Child Restraint 1-80

Second Gear 2-34

Second Row Solid Bench Seat 1-8

Folding the Seatback 1-8

Removing 1-8

Replacing 1-10

Service 6-2

Bulletins, Ordering 8-12

Engine Soon Light 2-103

Manuals, Ordering 8-12

Parts Identification Label 6-57

Publications, Ordering 8-11

Work, Doing Your Own 6-2

Service and Appearance Care 6-1
Service and Owner Publications 8-11
Service Publications 8-11
Servicing Your Air Bag-Equipped Pontiac 1-55
Sheet Metal Damage 6-54
Shifting Automatic Transaxle 2-32
Into Park 2-37
Out of Park 2-39
Shoulder Belt Height Adjuster 1-43
Side Ashtrays 2-84
Side Convenience Net 2-78
Signaling Turns 2-53
Skidding 4-15
Sound Equipment, Adding 3-31
Spare Tire, Compact 5-32
Specifications and Capacities 6-64
Specifications, Engine 6-65
Speech Impaired, Customer Assistance 8-5
Speedometer 2-93
Split Bench Seat 1-18
Adjusting 1-19
Folding or Reclining the Seatback 1-18
Removing 1-20
Replacing 1-22
SRS 1-50
Stains, Cleaning 6-49
Starter Switch Check 7-39
Starting Your Engine 2-29

Steam 5-13
Steering 4-11
In Emergencies 4-12
Power 4-11
Tips 4-11
Wheel, Tilt 2-52
Steering Wheel Touch Controls 3-30
Storage Bin 2-74
Storage Compartments 2-67
Front Seat 2-76
Sunglasses 2-71
Storage, Vehicle 6-30
Storing a Flat or Spare Tire 5-31
Stuck: In Sand, Mud, Ice or Snow 5-33
Sun Visors 2-84
Sunroof 2-87
Supplemental Restraint System 1-50
Switchbanks 2-13
Symbols, Vehicle
Tachometer 2-94
Taillamp Bulb Replacement 6-37
Tape Player Care 3-32
Temperature Knob, Climate Control System 3-2
Theft 2-26
Theft-Deterrent Feature, CD Player 3-27
THEFTLOCK 3-27
Thermostat 6-24
Third Gear 2-34

Third Row Solid Bench Seat 1-13

Adjusting 1-13

Folding the Seatback 1-13

Removing 1-14

Replacing 1-16

Tilt Steering Wheel 2-52

Time, Setting the 3-10

Tire Chains 6-47

Tire Loading 4-30

Tire-Loading Information Label 4-30

Tires 6-40

Alignment and Balance 6-45

Buying New 6-43

Chains 6-47

Changing a Flat 5-22

Cleaning 6-54

Compact Spare 5-32

Inflation 6-41

Inflation Check 7-37

Inspection and Rotation 6-42

Loading 4-30

Pressure 6-41

Storing a Flat or Spare 5-31

Temperature 6-45

Traction 6-45

Treadwear 6-44

Uniform Quality Grading 6-44

Used Wheel Replacement 6-47

Wear Indicators 6-43

Wheel Replacement 6-46

When It's Time for New 6-43

Top Strap 1-79

Torque Lock 2-39

Torque, Wheel Nut 5-30, 6-64

Towing a Trailer 4-32

Towing Your Vehicle 5-8

Traction Control System 4-9

Traction Control System Warning Light 2-99,4-10

Trailer

Brakes 4-36

Driving on Grades 4-39

Driving with 4-37

Hitches 4-35

Maintenance When Towing 4-40

Parking on Hills 4-39

Safety Chains 4-36

Tongue Weight 4-34

Total Weight on Tires 4-35

Towing 4-32

Turn Signals 4-39

Weight 4-34

Transaxle Fluid, Automatic 6-18

Transmitters, Keyless Entry 2-8

Transportation, Courtesy 8-8

Trip Odometer 2-93

TTY Users 8-5

Turn Signal and Lane Change Signals 2-53

Turn Signal Reminder Chime 2-54

Turn Signal/Multifunction Lever 2-53

Turn Signals When Towing a Trailer 4-39

Underbody Flushing Service 7-40

Underbody Maintenance 6-55

Underhood Fuse and Relay Center 6-62

Vehicle

Control 4-6

Damage Warnings iv

Dimensions 6-65

Identification Number 6-57

Loading 4-30

Storage 6-30

Ventilation System 3-5

Ventilation Tips 3-5

Visor Vanity Mirrors 2-84

Visors, Sun 2-84

Warning Devices 5-3

Warning Lights, Gages and Indicators 2-94

Washer Fluid, Windshield 6-26

Washing Your Vehicle 6-53

Weatherstrips 6-52

Wheel

Alignment 6-45

Nut Torque 5-30, 6-64

Replacement 6-46

Used Replacement 6-47

Wrench 5-25

Windows 2-50

Power 2-51

Power Rear Quarter 2-52

Side Latches 2-51

Windshield Washer 2-55

Fluid 2-55,6-26

Fluid Level Check 7-37

Rear 2-55

Windshield Wiper 2-54

Rear 2-55

Blade Replacement 6-39

Fuses 6-58

Winter Driving 4-26

Wiper Blade Check 7-38

Wiring, Headlamp 6-58

Wrench, Wheel 5-25

Service Station Information

For detailed information, refer to the page number listed, or see the index in the back of the owner's manual.